Home

Model 335 Temperature Controller

1. 459 67 273 15 183 33 454 270 3 15 290 178 89 94 26 120 84 44 188 71 450 267 78 5 37 289 67 178 71 94 44 119 67 84 44 188 89 449 67 267 59 5 56 280 173 33 99 82 117 67 83 15 190 441 67 263 15 10 279 67 173 15 100 112 80 193 15 440 262 22 10 93 274 170 103 15 110 78 89 194 26 439 67 262 04 11 11 270 167 78 105 57 109 67 78 71 194 44 436 260 13 15 269 67 167 59 105 56 100 73 33 199 82 430 256 67 16 48 261 67 163 15 110 99 67 73 15 200 429 67 256 48 16 67 260 162 22 110 93 94 70 203 15 423 67 253 15 20 259 67 162 04 11111 90 67 78 205 37 420 251 11 22 04 256 160 113 15 89 67 67 59 205 56 419 67 250 93 22 22 250 156 67 116 48 81 67 63 15 210 418 00 250 23 15 249 67 156 48 116 67 80 62 22 210 93 410 245 56 27 59 243 67 153 15 120 79 67 62 04 21111 409 67 245 37 27 78 240 151 11 122 04 76 60 213 15 405 67 243 15 30 239 67 150 93 122 22 70 56 67 216 48 400 240 33 15 238 150 123 15 69 67 56 48 216 67 399 67 239 82 33 33 230 145 56 127 59 63 67 53 15 220 390 23444 3871 229 67 145 37 127 78 60 51 11 222 04 389 67 234 26 38 89 225 67 143 15 130 59 67 50 93 222 22 387 67 233 15 40 220 140 133 15 58 50 223 15 382 230 43 15 219 67 139 82 133 33 50 45 56 227 59 380 228 89 44 26 210 134 44 138 71 49 67 45 37 227 78 379 67 228 71 44 44 209 67 134 26 138 89 45 67 43 15 230 370 223 3
2. 1 365 0 0 19083 330 0 0 28930 2 345 0 0 24739 305 0 0 36220 3 305 0 0 36397 285 0 0 41860 4 285 0 0 42019 265 0 0 47220 5 265 0 0 47403 240 0 0 53770 6 240 0 0 53960 220 0 0 59260 7 220 0 0 59455 170 0 0 73440 8 170 0 0 73582 130 0 0 84490 9 130 0 0 84606 100 0 0 92570 10 090 0 0 95327 075 0 0 99110 11 070 0 1 00460 060 0 1 02840 12 055 0 1 04070 040 0 1 07460 13 040 0 1 07460 036 0 1 08480 14 034 0 1 09020 034 0 1 09090 15 032 0 1 09700 032 0 1 09810 16 030 0 1 10580 030 0 1 10800 17 029 0 1 11160 029 0 1 11500 18 028 0 1 11900 028 0 1 12390 19 027 0 1 13080 027 0 1 13650 20 026 0 1 14860 026 0 1 15590 21 025 0 1 17200 025 0 1 18770 22 023 0 1 25070 024 0 1 23570 TABLE C 4 Lake Shore DT 500 series silicon diode curves no longer in production Model 335 Temperature Controller DT 500 D Curve Breakpoint 153 DT 500 E1 Curve 23 021 0 1 35050 022 0 1 32570 24 017 0 1 63590 013 0 1 65270 25 015 0 1 76100 013 0 1 96320 26 013 0 1 90660 009 0 2 17840 27 009 0 2 11720 004 0 2 53640 28 003 0 2 53660 003 0 2 59940 29 001 4 2 59840 001 4 2 65910 TABLE C 4 Lake Shore DT 500 series silicon diode curves no longer in production PT 100 Breakpoint PT 1000 1 030 0 3 820 030 0 38 20 2 032 0 4 235 032 0 42 35 3 036 0 5 146 036 0 51 46 4 033 0 5 650 033 0 56 50
3. m Nolonger offered by Lake Shore Instrument may not support the sensor over its entire range TABLE 4 8 Sensor curves Once the input is configured section 4 4 you may choose a temperature curve Any standard or user curve that matches the format of the sensortype configured for a given input will be available underthe Curve parameter in the Input Setup menu for that input You are also given the choice of None When set to None the front panel readings configured for kelvin or Celsius will display the NOCURV message and the interface will report 0 K and 2273 15 C for KRDG and CRDG queries respectively Data points for standard curves are detailed in Appendix C Menu Navigation Input Setup Input A or B gt Eres Curve Any curve of matching type Interface INCRV 4 4 8 Filter The reading filter applies exponential smoothing to the sensor input readings If the filter is turned on fora sensor input all reading values for that input are filtered The filter is a running average so it does not change the update rate of an input Filtered readings are not used for control functions but they are used for all input features including Max Min The number of filter points determines filter bandwidth One filter point corresponds to one new reading on that input A larger number of points does more smoothing butalso slows the instrument s response to real changes in temperature The default number of filt
4. cece eee eee eens 102 6 3 3 4 Installing the USB Driver from the Included CD 103 6 3 4 COMMUMICATION 5 cie ee a Ra ea 104 6 3 4 1 Character Format 0 e 104 6 3 4 2 Message STINGS i i perpetue ra apea a a stat eke 104 6 3 5 Message Flow Control ii 104 Command Summary scesi ie orte ebbe Re ethane v dine anne 105 6 4 1 Interface Commands eee 107 General METRE 127 Models strali aaa leale a d Ede 127 Siero qe PER 127 ACCESSO NES oroni RM aa 127 Kack MOUNTING teur recette ts bleed eere De e de oe Ee ee ebbe bed 129 Model 3060 H Thermocouple Input Option cece cece eee eens 130 Model 3003 Heater and Output Conditioner cece e cece e eens 131 Shri e contain A AE 133 USB Troubleshootlng sce onere ira 133 8 2 1 NewInst llatiQH criniera 133 8 2 2 Existing Installation No Longer Working sse 133 8 2 3 Intermittent Lockups ssssssssssssssss e eee eene 133 IEEE Interface Troubleshooting sss 134 8 3 1 New Installation eee 134 8 3 2 Existing Installation No Longer Working i 134 8 3 3 Intermittent LOCKUDS iiuciecedectecek ber ori brani pi 134 Fuse DAW E EPET M 134 Line Voltage Selection aria EH ER Ya a erable E E n 134 Fuse Replacement rerien enp cce Aci 135 Factory Reset MENU cia rai ae RR ETE EDEN TENE NES NR 136 8 7 1 Default Valles ia DURER 136 8 7 2 Product Information esee eee 137 EITO
5. 50 4 4 6 1 Internal Room Temperature Compensation 50 4 4 6 2 Internal Room Temperature Compensation Calibration Procedure 50 44 7 Curveselectioni sscees xa x Ding heen ca VER UR YR Da E TRY ER Rd 51 AAB FIET srpa E a n a E RE A EEEREN RRN 52 449 Input NAME as icsces ym sa e iaia 53 4 4 10 Temperature Limit seri e a kE e emn 53 4 4 11 Preferred Units cose E ra 54 4412 Max MI x RA Yu AS 54 4 5 Output and Control Setup coe etr ai aa 54 4 5 1 Heater QUEDULES inner coated e utere e i 54 4 5 1 1 Heater Output Type Output 2 cece cece eee ee 55 4 5 1 2 75 W Configuration cece cece eee eee e eee ee ee ene eee e ed 55 4 5 1 3 Max Current and Heater Resistance ccc cece cece cence eee 55 4 5 1 3 1 User Max Current cece cece eee mee 56 4 5 1 4 PowerUp Enable cence na eee ees 57 4 5 1 5 HeaterOut Display 4 eee tues rrr ne eet 58 4 5 1 6 OUtput MOdES iier RE rasi 58 4 5 1 6 1 Closed Loop PID Mode neces 58 4 5 11 6 2 ZorneMOe vence Ren ER EDE RIP RR 58 4 5 1 6 3 Open Loop Mode eee cece eee e eens 59 4 5 1 7 Control Parameters eee een 59 4 51171 Control INPUT 59 4 5 1 7 2 Proportional P cece cece eee e eee ee eens 60 4 5 1 7 3 Integral D aisi ise starte Sae aae ote dead ped ida 60 4 5 1 7 4 Derivative D sisse 61 4 5 1 7 5 Manual OUtput ci
6. 1 Allow the cooling system to cool and stabilize with the heater off Place the Model 335 in closed loop PID mode tuning Turn integral derivative and manual output settings to O Enter a setpoint several degrees above the cooling system s lowest temperature Enter a low proportional setting of approximately 5 or 10 and enterthe appro priate heater range as described in section 2 8 1 The load temperature should stabilize at a temperature below the setpoint The heater display should show a value greater than 0 and less than 100 If the load temperature does not stabilize below the setpoint do one ofthe following Ut deu i o a Ifthe load temperature and heater display reading swing rapidly the proportional setting or possibly the heater range may be set too high Reduce the proportional setting orthe heater range and go back to step 6 b Iftheload temperature and heater display reading change very slowly a condition described as drift itis an indication of a proportional setting that is too low Increase the proportional setting and go back to step 6 E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 26 CHAPTER 2 Cooling System Design and Temperature Control 2 8 3 Tuning Integral Model 335 Temperature Controller 7 Gradually increase the proportional setting by doubling iteach time At each new setting allow time for the temperature ofthe load to stabilize 8 Repeatstep 7 until you reach a setting in which the load temperature
7. Input A Temp Limit on Input B The temperature reading on a sensor input has exceeded the Temperature Limit setting Keypad Locked An attempt has been made to change a parameter while the keypad is locked Refer to section 4 7 Heater 1 Short Heater 2 Short A short circuit condition has been observed on one of the heater outputs The output will be turned off when this occurs Heater 1 Open Heater 2 Open An open circuit condition has been observed on one of the heater outputs Invalid Cal Press Escape amp Enter The calibration memory is either corrupt or is at the default uncalibrated state This message appears when the Model 335 is first powered on To clear the message and continue with instrument start up press Escape and Enter simultaneously Invalid Opt Cal Press Escape amp Enter The installed option card calibration memory is either corrupt or is at the default uncalibrated state This message appears when the Model 335 is first powered on To clear the message and continue with instrument start up press the Escape and Enter keys simultaneously Firmware Update In Progress This indicates that the Model 335 is in firmware update mode Htr Circuit Fail Output 1 Htr Circuit Fail Output 2 A hardware failure has been detected on one ofthe heater output circuits The heater has been shut dow
8. To assist in the ease of replacing a Model 331 or a Model 332 with a Model 335 cer tain hardware settings are automatically configured when the Emulation mode is set to Model 331 or Model 332 Both emulation modes will trigger the heater resistance setting on Output 1 to be configured to the 50 Q setting which will also limit the max current setting to 1 A Thissetting matches the hardware capabilities of the previous model temperature controllers The Model 331 Emulation mode will triggerthe outputtype setting for Output 2 to be configured to Voltage because the voltage output on the Model 335 exactly matches the hardware capabilities of the Loop 2 output on the Model 331 The Model 332 emulation mode will trigger the output type setting for Output 2 to be configured to Current This does not provide an exact match of the Model 332 hard ware asthe Loop 2 output on the Model 332 is actually a 10 V voltage source out put However the maximum current draw of 1A on Loop 2 ofthe Model 332 is reached at full scale output when using a 10 O heater providing 10 W of heater power and the Output 2 current source on the Model 335 is also capable of providing 1Aofcurrent into a 10 Q heater at full scale So applications using a 10 Q heater on Output 2 will work the same using a Model 335 in current mode as they did when using the Model 332 The settings that are automatically configured can be changed manually after configur ing the Emulation
9. 12 number pad keys and the Up Down Escape and Enter keys FIGURE 4 2 The direct operation keys provide one touch access to the most often used functions of the Model 335 The number pad keys are dual function keys If the instrumentis in the number entry mode the keys are used to enter numbers If itis in normal operating mode the number keys provide menu entry points An abbreviated description of each key is provided in the next sections A more detailed description of each function is provided in section 4 3 to section 4 5 4 2 1 1 Direct Operation Keys AandB Press these keys for quick access to information for the associated sensor input including the 4313 sensor name control loop information sensor reading and Min Max Setpoint Press this key to enter the control setpoint 4 5 1 7 6 Proportional P Pressthis key to manually adjustthe Proportional control parameter 4 5 1 7 2 Integral I Pressthis key to manually adjustthe Integral control parameter 4 5 1 7 3 Derivative D Press this key to manually adjust the Derivative control parameter 4 5 1 7 4 For current source output press this key to select a High Med or Low heater range For voltage Heater Range source output Output 2 voltage mode press this key to select Output On Off except when in 4 5 1 7 8 Monitor Out mode Manual Out Press this key to adjust the Manual Output setting ofthe currently d
10. INPUTB ala Gaje Q 0 aama LO FIGURE 3 1 Model 335 rear panel 3 4 Line Input This section describes how to properly connect the Model 335 to line power Please Assembly follow these instructions carefully to ensure proper operation ofthe instrument and the safety of operators N 100 120 220 240V 10 Voltage 3 15AT250V 50 60Hz210VAMAX 5x20mm 2 FIGURE 3 2 Line input assembly 3 4 1 Line Voltage The Model 335 hasfour different AC line voltage configurations so that it can be oper ated from line power anywhere in the world The nominal voltage and voltage range of each configuration is shown below The recommended setting for 230 V operation is 240 V Nominal Minimum Maximum 100V 90V 110V 120V 108V 132V 220V 198V 242V 240V 216V 264V TABLE 3 1 Line voltage Model 335 Temperature Controller C CAUTION 3 4 2 Line Fuse and Fuse Holder 3 4 3 Power Cord ANY EV Ute 3 4 4 Power Switch 3 5 Diode Resistor Sensor Inputs 3 5 1 Sensor Input Connector and Pinout 3 4 2 Line Fuse and Fuse Holder 31 AC line voltage is set at Lake Shore but it is good to verify that the AC line voltage indica tor in the fuse drawer window is appropriate before turning the instrument on The instrument may be damaged if turned on with the wrong voltage selected Also remove and verify that the proper fuse is installed before plugging in and turning on the instru ment Refer to s
11. change in setpoint actual temperature response P only too high time P only b P only too low PI d P 1 D FIGURE 2 2 Examples of PID control Model 335 Temperature Controller 2 8 Manual Tuning 2 8 1 Setting Heater Range 2 8 2 Tuning Proportional 2 8 1 SettingHeaterRange 25 There has been a lot written about tuning closed loop control systems and specifically PID control loops This section does not attempt to compete with control theory experts It describes a few basic rules to help less experienced users get started This technique will not solve every problem but it has worked for many others in the field This section assumes you have worked through the operation sections ofthis manual you have a good temperature reading from the sensor chosen as a control sensor and you are operating Loop 1 It is also a good idea to begin at the center of the tempera ture range ofthe cooling system not close to its highest or lowest temperature Autotune section 2 9 is another good place to begin and trial and error can be help ful as well Setting an appropriate heater output range is an important first part ofthe tuning process The heater range should allow enough heater power to comfortably over come the cooling power ofthe cooling system If the heater range will not provide enough power the load will not be able to reach the setpoint temperature Con versely if the range is set too high the loa
12. lt output gt zone upper bound P value lt I value D value mout value range input rate Configures the ou Specifies which heater output to configure 1 or 2 Specifies which zone in the table to configure Valid entries are 1 10 Specifies the upper Setpoint boundary ofthis zone in kelvin Specifies the P for this zone 0 1 to 1000 Specifies the for this zone 0 1 to 1000 Specifies the D for this zone 0 to 200 Specifies the manual output for this zone O to 100 Specifies the heater range for this zone Valid entries 0 Off 1 Low 2 Med 3 High Specifies the sensor input to use for this zone O Default Use previously assigned sensor 1 Input A 2 Input B Specifies the ramp rate for this zone 0 1 100 K min tput zone parameters Refer to Paragraph 2 9 ZONE 1 1 25 0 10 20 0 0 2 2 10 term Output1 zone Lis valid to 25 0 K with P 10 20 D 0 a heater range of medium sensor input B anda ramp rate of 10 K min Output Zone Table Parameter Query ZONE output zone term n nn output zone Specifies which heater output to query 1 or 2 Specifies which zone in the table to query Valid entries 1 10 lt upper boundary gt lt P value l value gt lt D value gt lt mout value gt lt range gt lt input gt lt rate gt term nnnnn nnnnn nnnnn nnnn nnnnn n n nnnn refer to command for description 7 1 General 1
13. FILTER input off on points window term a n nn nn lt input gt Specifies input to configure A or B off on Specifies whether the filter function is O Off or 1 On lt points gt Specifies how many data points the filtering function uses Valid range 2 64 lt window gt Specifies what percent of full scale reading limits the filtering function Reading changes greater than this percentage reset the filter Valid range 1to 10 FILTER B 1 10 2 term _ filter input B data through ten readings with 2 of full scale window Input Filter Parameter Query FILTER lt input gt term a lt input gt Specifies input to query A or B off on gt lt points gt lt window gt term n nn nn refer to command for description Heater Output Query HTR lt output gt term n lt output gt Heater output to query 1 Output 1 2 Output 2 lt heater value gt term tnnn n heater value Percent of full scale current for Output 1 and Output 2 in Current mode or percent of full scale voltage for Output 2 in Voltage mode E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 116 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation HTRSET Input Format Example Remarks HTRSET Input Format Returned Format HTRST Input Format Returned Format Remarks IEEE Input Format Example Model 335 Temperature Controller Heater Setup Command HTRSET lt output gt lt type gt lt heater resistance max
14. Two configurable PID control loops providing 50 W and 25 Wor75Wand1W Autotuning automatically calculates PID parameters Automatically switch sensor inputs using zones to allow continuous measure ment and control from 300 mK to 1505 K Custom display setup allows you to label each sensor input USB and IEEE 488 interfaces Supports diode RTD and thermocouple temperature sensors Sensor excitation current reversal eliminates thermal EMF errors for resistance sensors m 10Vanalog voltage outputs alarms and relays Designed with the user and ease of use in mind the Model 335 temperature control ler offers many user configurable features and advanced functions that until now have been reserved for more expensive high end temperature controllers The Model 335 isthe first two channel temperature controller available with user configurable heater outputs delivering a total of 75 W oflow noise heater power 50W and 25 W or 75 W and 1 W With that much heater power packed into an afford able half rack sized instrument the Model 335 gives you more power and control than ever Control outputs are equipped with both hardware and software features allowing you and not your temperature controller to easily control your experiments Output one functions as a current output while output two can be configured in either cur rent or voltage mode With output two in voltage mode it functions as a 10 V analog output while still providing 1 W of heater
15. lt state gt lt code gt term n nnn refer to command for description Minimum Maximum Data Query MDAT lt input gt term a input Specifies which inputto query A or B min value gt lt max value term tnnnnnn tnnnnnn Returns the minimum and maximum input data Also see the RDGST query Minimum and Maximum Function Reset Command MNMXRST term Resets the minimum and maximum data for all inputs E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 120 MODE Input Format Example MODE Input Returned Format MOUT Input Format Example Remarks MOUT Input Format Returned Format OPST Input Returned Format Remarks OPSTE Input Format Remarks OPSTE Input Returned Format Model 335 Temperature Controller CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation Remote Interface Mode Command MODE mode term n mode 0 local 1 remote 2 remote with local lockout MODE 2 term places the Model 335 into remote mode with local lockout Remote Interface Mode Query MODE term mode term n refer to command for description Manual Output Command MOUT output value term n nnnnn term output Specifies output to configure 1 or 2 value Specifies value for manual output MOUT 1 22 45 term Output 1 manual output is 22 4526 Manual output only applies to outputs in Closed Loop PID Zone or Open Loop modes Manual Output Query MOUT lt output gt term n l
16. std curves Definition of second parameter 21 59 user curves FIGURE 6 5 Sample command format Query name Brief description of query Formofthe query input INCRV input Curve Number Query Syntax of user parameter input Miis NOV lt input gt term see key below ormat a TNNT input Specify input A B Definition of returned parameter Returned curve number gt term Format nn Syntax of returned parameter FIGURE 6 6 Sample query format EL akeShore www lakeshore com 106 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation Command Function Page Command Function Page CLS Clear Interface Cmd 107 INNAME Sensor Input Name Cmd 117 ESE Event Status Enable Register Cmd 107 INNAME Sensor Input Name Query 117 ESE Event Status Enable Register Query 107 INTYPE Input Type Parameter Cmd 118 ESR Standard Event Status Register Query 108 INTYPE Input Type Parameter Query 118 IDN Identification Query 108 KRDG Kelvin Reading Query 119 OPC Operation Complete Cmd 108 LEDS Front Panel LEDS Cmd 119 OPC Operation Complete Query 108 LEDS Front Panel LEDS Query 119 RST Reset Instrument Cmd 108 LOCK Front Panel Keyboard Lock Cmd 119 SRE Service Request Enable Register Cmd 109 LOCK Front Panel Keyboard Lock Query 119 SRE Service Request Enable Register Query 109 MDAT Minimum Maximum Data Query
17. 177 mK 200 mK 14 2 mK m 14K 1039000 5200000 K 13pK 0 1 mK 4 1 mK 26 pK E i 4 2K 584 60 422 3 Q K 63 uK 0 8 mK 4 8 mK 126 pK iiet 77K 14 330 0 098 Q K 4 6 mK 108 mK 133 mK 19 2 mK 300K 8 550 0 0094 Q K 16 mK 760 mK 865 mK 32 mK 0 5K 37010 5478 Q K 41yK 0 5 mK 5 mK 82pK RX 102A AA iosa 14K 20050 667 Q K 1284K 1 4 mK 6 4 mK 256 pK calibration 4 2K 13700 80 3 Q K 902 uK 8 mK 24 mK 1 8 mK 40K 10490 1 06 Q K 62 mK 500 mK 537 K 124 mK 75K 5862 9uV 15 6 pV K 26 mK OSIO REN 52 mK IT ex 300K 1075 34V 40 6 pV K 10 mK 0 038 K7 ee 420mK BOER 600K 13325 pV 41 7 uV K 10 mK 10 184 K7 com 1505 K 49998 3 nV 36 006 pV K 11mK 0 73 K7 22mK 4 Typical sensor sensitivities were taken from representative calibrations for the sensor listed 5 Control stability of the electronics only in an ideal thermal system Non HT version maximum temperature 325 K 7 Accuracy specification does not include errors from room temperature compensation Model 335 Temperature Controller TABLE 1 2 Typical sensor performance 1 3 Model 335 Specifications 1 3 1Input Specifications 1 3 Model335Specifications Sensor Input range Excitation Display Measurement Electronic Measurement temperature Electronic temperature current resolution resolution accuracy coefficient stability coefficient at 25 C Diode Negative OVto2 5V 10 pA 0 05 2 3 100 pV 10 pV
18. 33 3 40286 11 90 66 3 52145 2 30 TABLEC 7 Lake Shore RX 202A Rox curve El akeShore www lakeshore com 156 Appendices Break Break Break Break 57 4 95 2 95792 192 142 714 5 1 6 45774 3 15 48 6 10828 18 1482 2 6 45733 3 68 49 6 08343 59 4 96 2 82629 196 143 19 2959 741 5 3 6 45688 4 2 50 6 05645 61 5 97 2 6762 200 5 144 20 8082 777 4 6 45632 4 78 51 6 02997 63 5 98 2 52392 205 145 23 1752 832 5 5 6 45565 5 4 52 6 00271 65 5 99 2 36961 209 5 146 24 5166 864 6 6 45494 6 53 5 97469 67 5 100 2 21329 214 147 25 6001 889 5 7 6 4541 6 65 54 5 94591 69 5 101 2 05503 218 5 148 26 5536 912 8 6 4531 7 35 55 5 91637 71 5 102 1 87703 223 5 149 27 4199 932 5 9 6 45201 8 05 56 5 8861 73 5 103 1 69672 228 5 150 28 2413 952 10 6 45073 8 8 57 5 85508 75 5 104 1 51427 233 5 151 29 0181 970 5 11 6 44934 9 55 58 5 82334 77 5 105 1 32972 238 5 152 29 7714 988 5 12 6 44774 10 35 59 5 78268 80 106 1 12444 244 153 30 5011 1006 13 6 44601 11 15 60 5 74084 82 5 107 0 91675 249 5 154 31 2074 1023 14 6 44403 12 61 5 69792 85 108 0 70686 255 155 31 8905 1039 5 15 6 44189 12 85 62 5 6539 87 5 109 0 47553 261 156 32 571 1056 16 6 43947 13 75 63 5 60879 90 110 0 22228 267 5 157 33 2489 1072 5 17 6 43672 147 64 5 5626 92 5 111 0 053112 274 5 158 33 9038
19. 4 4 6 1 Internal Room Temperature Compensation Room temperature compensation is required to give accurate temperature measure ments with thermocouple sensors It corrects for the temperature difference between the instrument thermal block and the curve normalization temperature of O C An external ice bath is the most accurate form of compensation but is often inconvenient The Model 335 has internal room temperature compensation that is adequate for most applications The internal compensation can be turned on or off by the user Itoperates with any thermocouple type that has an appropriate tempera ture response curve loaded Room temperature compensation is not meaningful for sensorunits measurements Room temperature compensation should be calibrated as part of every installation section 4 4 6 2 Menu Navigation Input Setup nput A or B ENTER Room Compensation Off or On Default On Interface Command INTYPE 4 4 6 2 Internal Room Temperature Compensation Calibration Procedure Factory calibration ofthe instrument is accurate to within approximately 1 K Differ ences in thermocouple wire and installation technique create errors greater than the instrument errors The best accuracy is achieved by calibrating with the thermocou ple actually being used because it eliminates most sources of error If that is not pos sible use a thermocouple made from the same wire 4 4 7 Curve Selection 4 4 7 CurveSelection 51 Itis
20. 45 mK 77 mK 8 4 mK 475K 0 0906V 2 22 mV K 4 5 mK 38 mK 88 mK 9 mK CPD 1 4K 5 391V 97 5mV K 0 2 mK 7 mK 19 mK 0 4 mK Cau DIG RP IAN 77K 1422V 1 24 mV K 16 mK 180 mK 202 mK 32 mK BENED 300K 0 8978V 2 85 mV K 7 mk 60 mK 92 mK 14 mK 475K 03778V 315mVK 64mK 438mK 88 mK 13 mK 30K 3 6600 0 191 O K 11mK 13mK 23mK 2mK 1000 Platinum RTD PT 103 with 14 77K 20 380 0 423 O K 0 5 mK 10 mK 22 mK 1 0 mK 500 O Full Scale calibration 300K 110 350 0 387 Q K 5 2mK 39 mK 62 mK 10 4 mK 500K 185 6680 0 3780 K 5 3 mK 60 mK 106 mK 10 6 mK Cons 03K 232240 10785 Q K 8 5 uK 0 1 mK 3 6 mK 17 pK Cero ROS 0 5K 124820 2665 20 K 26 pK 0 2 mK 4 7 mK 52 pK rea 4 2K 277320 32 209 Q K 140 uK 3 8mK 8 8mK 280 pK 300K 30 920 0 06540 K 23 mK 339 mK 414 mK 46 mK ociosos I 265660 48449 Q K 209K 0 3mK 5 3MmK tOyK Cemo With LAN 4 2K 350720 1120 8 Q K 196 uK 2 1 mK 7 1 mK 392 uK ssi 77K 205670 2 41160 K 19 mK 38 mK 54 mK 3 8mK 420K 45 030 0 08290 K 18 mK 338 mK 403 mK 36 mK EUM 0 35K 182250 1934530 K 4uK 48 uK 4 2 mK 8 pK RAEE GSD 14K 4490 581 Q K 41 pK 481 pK 4 7 mK 82 uK iiie 4 2K 940 26 6 Q K 564K 1 8 mK 6 8 mK 112 pK 100K 279 0 024 Q K 6 3 mK 152 mK 175mK 12 6 mK EEE 1 8K 152880 268680 K 28 uK 302 uK 45mK 56uK with 14D 4 2K 16890 862 Q K 91 pK 900 uK 5 1 mK 182 pK Sii 10K 2530 62 0 Q K 73 UK 1 8 mK 6 8 mK 146 pK 100K 2 80 0 021 Q K 71mk
21. 5 040 0 6 170 040 0 61 70 6 042 0 6 726 042 0 67 26 7 046 0 7 909 046 0 79 09 8 052 0 9 924 052 0 99 24 9 058 0 12 180 058 0 121 80 10 065 0 15 015 065 0 150 15 11 075 0 19 223 075 0 192 23 12 085 0 23 525 085 0 235 25 13 105 0 32 081 105 0 320 81 14 140 0 46 648 140 0 466 48 15 180 0 62 980 180 0 629 80 16 210 0 75 044 210 0 750 44 17 270 0 98 784 270 0 987 84 18 315 0 116 270 315 0 1162 70 19 355 0 131 616 355 0 1316 16 20 400 0 148 652 400 0 1486 52 21 445 0 165 466 445 0 1654 66 22 490 0 182 035 490 0 1820 35 23 535 0 198 386 535 0 1983 86 24 585 0 216 256 585 0 2162 56 25 630 0 232 106 630 0 2321 06 26 675 0 247 712 675 0 2477 12 27 715 0 261 391 715 0 2613 91 28 760 0 276 566 760 0 2765 66 29 800 0 289 830 800 0 2898 30 TABLE C 5 Lake Shore PT 100 1000 platinum RTD curves E akeShore www lakeshore com 154 Appendices 1 3 02081 3 05186 13 50 3 17838 2 96 2 3 02133 38 8 37 3 05322 13 10 72 3 18540 2 81 3 3 02184 37 7 38 3 05466 12 70 73 3 19253 2 67 4 3 02237 36 6 39 3 05618 12 30 74 3 20027 2 53 5 3 02294 35 5 40 3 05780 11 90 75 3 20875 2 39 6 3 02353 344 41 3 05952 11 50 76 3 21736 2 26 7 3 02411 33 4 42 3 06135 11 10 77 3 22675 2 13 8 3 02472 32 4 43 3 06330 10 70 78 3 23707 2 00 9 3 02537 31 4 44 3 06537 10 30 79 3 24842 1 87 10 3 02605 30 4 45 3 06760 9 90 80 3 26000 1 75 11 3 02679 29 4 46 3
22. 98 6 F as rapidly as possible then protect the injured tissue from fur ther damage and infection Call a physician immediately Rapid warming of the affected parts is best achieved by bathing it in warm water The water temperature should not exceed 105 F 40 C and under no circumstances should the frozen part be rubbed either before or after rewarming If the eyes are involved flush them thor oughly with warm water for at least 15 minutes In case of massive exposure remove clothing while showering with warm water The patient should not drink alcohol or smoke Keep warm and rest Call a physician immediately 151 Appendix C Curve Tables C 1 General Standard curve tables included in the Model 335 temperature controller are as follows Curve Location Table Curve 01 DT 470 Silicon Diode Table D 1 Curve 02 DT 670 Silicon Diode Table D 2 Curve 03 amp 04 DT 500 D E1 Silicon Diode Table D 3 Curve 06 amp 07 PT 100 1000 Platinum RTD Table D 4 Curve 08 RX 102A Rox Table D 5 Curve 09 RX 202A Rox Table D 6 Curve 12 Type K Thermocouple Table D 7 Curve 13 Type E Thermocouple Table D 8 Curve 14 TypeT Thermocouple Table D 9 Curve 15 Chromel AuFe 0 03 Thermocouple Table D 10 Curve 16 Chromel AuFe 0 07 Thermocouple Table D 11 TABLE C 1 1 475 0 0 09062 170 0 0 82405 031 0 1 10476 2 470 0 0 1 191 31 160
23. CAUTION 5 11 7 Emulation Mode Differences For Output 2 of the Model 335 the factory default Output Type setting is Current but either output type can be used in any emulation mode Therefore when setting the emulation mode from the front panel the user is also prompted to set the Output Type for Output 2 In most cases the Voltage setting is more appropriate for Model 331 emulation and the Current setting is more appropriate for Model 332 emulation but the user must determine the appropriate setting for the given system The Output 2 current source is NOT limited to 10 V and is capable of providing more than 25 W of power depending on the heater resistance When using the current source for Output 2 ensure that the power rating of the attached heater will not be exceeded given the maximum current of 1 A See section 2 5 1 for information on limiting the maximum current for the current source outputs which can be used to limit the amount of power into the attached heater The Current and Voltage outputs use separate physical rear panel connections See section 4 5 1 for information on the Output Type setting Menu Navigation Interface ExterR Emulation Mode None Model 331 Model 332 Interface Command EMUL The only difference between the Model 331 Emulation mode and the Model 332 Emulation mode is in the interpretation of the INTYPE command The Model 332 Emulation mode interprets Sensor Type parameter settings of 8 through
24. Each half ofthe display contains a sensor reading on the top and if applicable the setpoint ofthe associated control loop appears on the bottom If the control output is in Open Loop mode then the manual heater output setting is dis played If the input is not assigned as the Control Input of a control loop then the dis play area underthe sensor reading is left blank The sensor reading is displayed in the units assigned to the respective sensor input s Preferred Units setting which can be found underthe Input Setup menu section 4 4 Menu Navigation Display Setup Display Mode Two Loop Mode Interface Command DISPLAY FIGURE 4 4 Two loop mode 4 3 1 3 Input Display Modes The input display mode provides detailed information about an input sensor and the associated control loop if applicable and they are most commonly accessed by press ing the A and B on the keypad These modes are called Input A Input A Max Min Input B and Input B Max Min in the Display Setup menu parameter list FIGURE 4 5 Input display mode The top line ofthe display shows the sensor input you selected to monitor The bot tom line ofthe display contains all the information about the sensor input s control loop Only the items applicable to the control loop will be displayed specifically the number of the control loop output followed by the Setpoint and Heater Output per centage and heater range If the sensor input is not assigned as the Contr
25. Filter Points gt 8 Filter Window gt 10 Interface FILTER To increase usability and reduce confusion the Model 335 provides a means of assigning a name to each sensor input The designated input name is displayed on the front panel when the A or B keys are pressed identifying the respective sensor The input name can also be configured to be displayed when using the custom display mode Refer to section 4 2 3 for Alpha Numeric entry Depending on the display mode you have chosen the input name may show only nine characters Menu Navigation Input Setup nput A or B EXter Input Name 15 character string Default Input A or B Interface Command INNAME The Temperature Limit parameter provides a means of protecting your equipment from damage by shutting down all control outputs when the assigned temperature limitis exceeded on the sensor input The parameter is available for both sensor inputs A temperature limit of O K default value turns this feature off Menu Navigation Input Setup gt nput A or B ires Temperature Limit O K to 2999 K Default 0 0000 K Interface Command TLIMIT E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 54 CHAPTER 4 Operation 4 4 11 Preferred Units 4 4 12 Max Min 4 5 Output and Control Setup 4 5 1 Heater Outputs Model 335 Temperature Controller The Preferred Units parameter setting determines which units are used to display setpoint and max min parameters whenever the
26. Havethe sen sorand instrument periodically recalibrated or in some other way null the time dependent errors Use a sensor calibration that is appropriate for the accuracy requirement Many types of sensors can be purchased in different packages Some types of sensors can even be purchased as bare chips without any package A sensor package generally determines its size thermal and electrical contact to the outside and sometimes lim its temperature range When different packages are available for a sensor you should consider the mounting surface for the sensor and how leads will be thermally anchored when choosing There can sometimes be confusion in the difficult task of choosing the right sensor getting it calibrated translating the calibration data into a temperature response curve that the Model 335 can understand and then getting the curve loaded into the instrument Lake Shore provides a variety of calibration services to fit different accu racy requirements and budgets Best Precision calibration All sensors can be calibrated over various temperature ranges Lake Shore has defined calibration ranges available for each sensortype Better SoftCal An abbreviated calibration 2 point 77 K and 305 K 3 point 4 2 K 77 K and 305 K or 3 point 77 K 305 K and 480 K which is available for 400 Series silicon diodes and platinum sensors Good Sensors using standard curves Silicon diodes follow standard curves Pla
27. Initiate serial poll Serial poll the bus to determine which instrument sent the interrupt and clear the RQS bit in the Status Byte ESR Read and clear the Standard Event Status Register allowing an SRQto be generated on another command error TABLE 6 4 Programming example to generate an SRQ 6 2 6 4 Using Status Byte Query STB The Status Byte Query STB command is similarto a serial poll except itis pro cessed like any other instrument command The STB command returns the same result as a serial poll except that the Status Byte bit 6 RQS MSS is not cleared In this case bit 6 is considered the MSS bit Using the STB command does not clear any bits in the Status Byte Register 6 2 6 5 Using the Message Available MAV Bit Status Byte summary bit 4 MAV indicates that data is available to read into the bus controller This message may be used to synchronize information exchange with the bus controller The bus controller can for example send a query command to the Model 335 and then wait for MAV to set If the MAV bit has been enabled to initiate an SRQ the user s program can direct the bus controller to look for the SRQ leaving the bus available for other use The MAV bit will be clear whenever the output buffer is empty 6 2 6 6 Using Operation Complete OPC and Operation Complete Query OPC The Operation Complete OPC and Operation Complete Query OPC are both used to indicate when pending device oper
28. See FIGURE 7 2 RM 2 Dual mounting shelf for two Model 335 temperature controllers Mounting shelf to attach any two 5 25 in tall half rack instruments side by side on a 483 mm 19 in rack mount shelf VGE 7031 IMI 7031 varnish formerly GE 7031 Varnish 1 pint can IMI 7031 insulating varnish and adhesive possesses electrical and bonding properties which when combined with its chemical resistance and good saturating properties make it an excellent material for cryogenic temper atures As an adhesive IMI 7031 bonds a variety of materials has fast tack time and may be air dried or baked It is also an electrically insulating adhesive at cryogenic temperatures and is often used as acalorimeter cement When soaked into cigarette paper it makes a good high thermal conductivity low electrical conductivity heat sinking layer Maximum operating tem perature 423 K 150 C Wire Lake Shore cryogenic wire Lake Shore sells the following types of cryogenic wire DT Duo Twist MN Single Strand MW Manganin NC Nichrome Heater ND Heavy Duty QL Quad Lead and QT Quad Twist Lake Shore Coaxial Cable Lake Shore sells the following types of coaxial cable CC Ultra Miniature Coaxial Cable SR Semi Rigid Coaxial Cable CRYC CryoCable Accessories included with a new Model 335 RoHS compliant Model 335 Temperature Controller TABLE 7 4 Accessories 7 5 Rack Mounting 7 5 RackMounting 129 c
29. Service Request SRQ m REN Remote puts the Model 335 into remote mode m IFC Interface Clear stops current operation on the bus m SRQ Service Request tells the bus controller that the Model 335 needs interface service A multiline command asserts a group of signal lines All devices equipped to imple ment such commands do so simultaneously upon command transmission These commands transmit with the Attention ATN line asserted low The Model 335 recog nizes two multiline commands m LLO Local Lockout prevents the use of instrument front panel controls m DCL Device Clear clears Model 335 interface activity and puts it into a bus idle state Finally addressed bus control commands are multiline commands that must include the Model 335 listen address before the instrument responds Only the addressed device responds to these commands The Model 335 recognizes three of the addressed bus control commands m SDC Selective Device Clear the SDC command performs essentially the same function as the DCL command except that only the addressed device responds m GTL Go To Local the GTL command is used to remove instruments from the remote mode With some instruments GTL also unlocks front panel controls if they were previously locked out with the LLO command 6 2 3 IEEE 488 2CommandsStructure 91 m SPE Serial Poll Enable and SPD Serial Poll Disable serial polling accesses the Service Request Status Byte Register This s
30. Warm Up Supply a control loop must be created Acontrol loop consists of a control output for controlling the temperature and an input for feedback into the control algorithm Use the Control Input parame ter to assign the control input sensor to the desired output E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 60 CHAPTER 4 Operation Model 335 Temperature Controller In the Monitor Out mode the Control Input parameter is used to determine the source ofthe output voltage In the Open Loop mode the Control Input parameter can be set simply for convenience in order to easily access the associated output s Manual Output and Heater Range parameters using the Direct Operation keys Refer to section 4 2 1 1 for details on Direct Operation keys Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 1 or 2 Ere Control Input None Input A Input B Default Output 1 Control Input Input A Output 2 Control Input Input B Interface Command OUTMODE 4 5 1 7 2 Proportional P The proportional parameter also called gain is the P part of the PID control equation It has a range of 0 to 1000 with a resolution of 0 1 The default value is 50 Entera value greater than O for P when using closed loop control To set P first configure the front panel display to show the desired control loop infor mation then use the P key on the front panel A quick way to access the setting ifthe control loop information is not already being displayed isto usethe front
31. ing instability in the control adjustment First of two stages of observing system response to setpoint Compiles data for characterizin P 9 y p P P 8 Will not fail in this stage Not applicable change using new control the system parameters Second of two stages of observin i Hn E g Control parameters are changed again System response is too slow or the If not already using High system response to setpoint Vx EH 10 based on observation this is the final heater is too underpowered for the sys range increase initial change using new control parameters stage of Pl and PID Autotuning tem to Autotune heater range Model 335 Temperature Controller TABLE 5 1 Autotune stages Menu Navigation Autotune gt nput A B Autotune P Autotune PI Autotune PID Interface Command ATUNE 5 3 Zone Settings 5 3 ZoneSettings 69 The Model 335 allows you to establish up to ten custom contiguous temperature zones where the controller will automatically use pre programmed values for PID heater range manual output ramp rate and control input Zone control can be active for both control loops at the same time Configure the zones using 1 asthe lowest to 10asthe highest zone Zone boundaries are always specified in kelvin K The bottom ofthe first zone is always O K therefore only the upper limit is required for all subse quent zones Make a copy of FIGURE 5 2 to plan your zones To use the programmed zo
32. n lt mode gt Specifies display mode 0 Input A 1 Input A Max Min 2 Two Input Loop A 3 Input B 4 Input B Max Min 5 Two Input Loop B 6 Custom 7 Two Loop When the input display mode is set to Custom use the DISPFLD command to configure the display Display Setup Query DISPLAY term mode term n refer to command for description EMUL Input Format Remarks EMUL Input Returned Format FILTER Input Format Example FILTER Input Format Returned Format HTR Input Format Returned Format 6 4 1 InterfaceCommands 115 Model 331 332 Interface Emulation Mode Command EMUL emulation mode gt lt PID scaling mode term nn emulation mode OzNone 335 12331 22332 PID scaling mode PID control scaling 02335 Temperature 1 331 332 Sensor The 331 and 332 emulation modes provide a means of using the Model 335 in place ofa Model 331 or 332 in a software controlled system without updating the software The emulation mode setting only affects remote operation front panel operation of the Model 335 is not changed Please reference the Model 331 or 332 user s manual for information on the interface commands for those models For more information on using the emulation modes see section 5 11 Model 331 332 Interface Emulation Mode Query EMUL term emulation mode gt lt PID scaling mode term n n refer to command for description Input Filter Parameter Command
33. 1088 5 18 6 43378 15 65 65 5 51535 95 112 0 350783 282 159 34 5561 1104 5 19 6 43065 16 6 66 5 46705 97 5 113 0 651006 289 5 160 35 2059 1120 5 20 6 42714 17 6 67 5 4177 100 114 0 973714 297 5 161 35 8532 1136 5 21 6 42321 18 65 68 5 36731 102 5 115 1 31919 306 162 36 4979 1152 5 22 6 41905 19 7 69 5 3159 105 116 1 70801 315 5 163 37 14 1168 5 23 6 41442 20 8 70 5 26348 107 5 117 2 14052 326 164 37 7596 1184 24 6 40952 21 9 71 5 19928 110 5 118 2 69954 339 5 165 38 3767 1199 5 25 6 40435 23 72 5 13359 113 5 119 3 75883 365 166 38 9915 1215 26 6 39841 24 2 73 5 06651 116 5 120 4 29687 378 167 39 6038 1230 5 27 6 39214 254 74 4 99801 119 5 121 4 74986 389 168 40 2136 1246 28 6 38554 26 6 75 4 92813 122 5 122 5 17977 399 5 169 40 821 1261 5 29 6 37863 27 8 76 4 85687 125 5 123 5 60705 410 170 41 4063 1276 5 30 6 37077 29 1 77 4 78426 128 5 124 6 03172 420 5 171 41 9893 1291 5 31 6 36253 304 78 4 71031 131 5 125 6 49428 432 172 42 5699 1306 5 32 6 35391 317 79 4 63503 134 5 126 7 09465 447 173 43 1288 1321 33 6 34422 33 1 80 4 55845 137 5 127 8 15226 473 5 174 43 6853 1335 5 34 6 33408 34 5 81 4 48056 140 5 128 8 75291 488 5 175 44 2394 1350 35 6 3235 35 9 82 4 38814 144 129 9 25576 501 176 44 7721 1364 36 6 3117 374 83 4 29393 147 5 130 9 74087 513 177 45 3024 1378 37 6 29939 38 9 84 4 19806 151 131 10 2285 525 178 45 8114 1391 5 38 6 2866 40 4 85 4 10051 154 5 132 10 7186 537 179 46 3182 1405 39 6 27241 42 86 4
34. 12 asthe NTC RTD ranges that are exclusive to the Model 332 The Model 331 Emulation mode interprets Sensor Type parameter settings of 8 and 9 asthe alternate 1mA Diode cur rent excitation range E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 88 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation Model 335 Temperature Controller 6 1 General 89 Chapter 6 Computer Interface 6 1 General 6 2 IEEE 488 Interface Operation This chapter provides operational instructions for the computer interface for the Lake Shore Model 335 temperature controller Both of the computer interfaces pro vided with the Model 335 permit remote operation The first isthe IEEE 488 interface described in section 6 2 The second is the USB interface described in section 6 3 The two interfaces share a common set of commands detailed in section 6 4 Only one of the interfaces can be used ata time The IEEE 488 interface is an instrumentation bus with hardware and programming standards that simplify instrument interfacing The Model 335 IEEE 488 interface complies with the IEEE 488 2 standard and incorporates its functional electrical and mechanical specifications unless otherwise specified in this manual All instruments on the interface bus perform one or more ofthe interface functions of Talker Listener or Bus Controller A Talker transmits data onto the busto other devices A Listener receives data from other devices through the bus The Bus Control ler designates to the devices on th
35. 4 2 Front Panel Description 6 cece cee cece ence ence teen eene 42 A521 Keypad DefINILIONS siis retra irer ERRp Ea eqs seteomeettentoreacede minder 42 4 2 1 1 Direct Operation Keys eee eeeeeee eee eee e teen ee ee ened 42 4 2 1 2 Menu Number Pad Keys cece cece cece eee enee rreren 42 4 2 2 ANMUNGIALONS 2 ieu oa pe teet bee teda ea be se Eb WR E RON RAS 43 4 2 3 General Keypad Operation cece cece cece e eee e eee ee teens 43 4 3 Display Set p essei ea ceret SO ORE TREE UR cade fas ea Ta Nr os 44 4 3 1 Display MOdES ic ioer crece tht REEL OEEERRRESAAESE PA DE INEEREMES 44 4 3 1 1 Two Input One Loop Modes cece eee e eee e ee 44 4 3 1 2 Two Loop Mode iii Ra SCORE Ree L E E deans 45 4 3 1 3 Input Display Modes cece cece eect eee eee tees 45 4 3 1 4 Custom Display Mode cece eee cenike ee een nneee eens 46 4 3 2 Display Brightness 5 crecer rtt er er htm et e EUR Ya reas 47 44 Input Setups cesses iae iii ao 47 4 4 1 Diode Sensor Input Setup eet eee tee e eens 48 4 4 2 Positive Temperature Coefficient PTC Resistor Sensor Input Setup 48 4 4 3 Negative Temperature Coefficient NTC Resistor Sensor Input Setup 48 4 44 Range Selection er Rer eem TROU STER AA IRR LI IRR 49 4 4 5 Thermal Electromotive Force EMF Compensation 49 4 4 6 Thermocouple Sensor Input Setup Model 3060 Only
36. 4 4 for details on manually selecting the range Current Reversal is also enabled by default in orderto compen sate for thermal EMF voltages Refer to section 4 4 5 for details on the Thermal EMF Compensation Current Reversal feature Menu Navigation Input Setup nput A or B Sensor Type PTC RTD Platinum Interface Command INTYPE NTC resistor sensors include Cernox Rox Thermox and others detailed in TABLE 4 6 More detailed specifications are provided in TABLE 1 2 The excitation cur rent for the NTC RTD sensor type can vary between 100 nA and 1 mA depending on resistance range When autoranging is enabled the range will be automatically selected so that the excitation voltage is below 10 mV This keeps the power dissi pated in the sensor at a minimum yet still enough to provide accurate measure ments Current Reversal is also enabled by default in orderto compensate for thermal EMF voltages Refer to section 4 4 5 for details on the Thermal EMF Compensation Current Reversal feature Menu Navigation Input Setup nput A or B Sensor Type NTC RTD Cernox Interface Command INTYPE 4 4 4 Range Selection 4 4 5 Thermal Electromotive Force EMF Compensation 4 4 4 RangeSelection 49 The Model 335 is equipped with an autoranging feature that will automatically select the appropriate resistance range for the connected resistive temperature device In some cases it may be desirable to manually select the resi
37. 4V 10V Heater load for max power 250 500 1000 Heater load range 10 Q to 1000 100 Q min short circuit protected Ranges 3 decade steps in power N A Heater noise 0 12 pA RMS 0 3 mV RMS Heater connector Dual banana Detachable terminal block Grounding Output referenced to chassis ground Safety limits Curve temperature power up heater off short circuit protection TABLE 1 6 Output 2 Warm up heater mode settings Output 2 only Warm up percentage Warm up mode Oto 10096 with 196 resolution Continuous control or auto off Monitor Output settings Output 2 voltage only Scale Data source Settings Update rate Range Resolution Accuracy Noise Minimum load resistance Connector User selected Temperature or sensor units Input source top of scale bottom of scale or manual 10 s 10V 16 bit 0 3 mV 2 5 mV 0 3 mV RMS 100 Q short circuit protected Detachable terminal block EL akeShore www lakeshore com 10 CHAPTER 1 Introduction 1 3 5 Front Panel Display 2 line by 20 character 9 mm character height vacuum fluorescent display Number of reading displays 1to4 Display units K C V mV Q Reading source Temperature sensor units max and min Display update rate 2 rdg s Temperature display resolution 0 001 from 0 to 99 9999 0 01 from 100 to 999 999 0 1 above 1000 Sensor units display resolution Sensor dependent to 5 digits Other displays Sensor name setpoint heater range heater ou
38. 50 138 8 176630 452 00 29 6 139220 29 00 84 3 439460 171 00 139 8 541540 459 00 30 6 128130 30 40 85 3 340240 174 50 140 8 909320 466 00 31 6 116580 31 80 86 3 239610 178 00 141 9 306450 473 50 32 6 103700 33 30 87 3 122930 182 00 142 9 706830 481 00 33 6 090300 34 80 88 3 004370 186 00 143 10 1103 488 50 34 6 075460 36 40 89 2 884040 190 00 144 10 5169 496 00 35 6 060040 38 00 90 2 761910 194 00 145 10 9264 503 50 36 6 044070 39 60 91 2 638010 198 00 146 11 3664 511 50 37 6 025470 41 40 92 2 512340 202 00 147 11 8098 519 50 38 6 006200 43 20 93 2 384920 206 00 148 12 2564 527 50 39 5 986280 45 00 94 2 255770 210 00 149 12 7342 536 00 40 5 965730 46 80 95 2 124900 214 00 150 13 2155 544 50 41 5 942210 48 80 96 1 992320 218 00 151 13 7 553 00 42 5 917930 50 80 97 1 858060 222 00 152 14 1879 561 50 43 5 892970 52 80 98 1 705090 226 50 153 14 7079 570 50 44 5 864730 55 00 99 1 549970 231 00 154 15 2314 579 50 45 5 835680 57 20 100 1 392820 235 50 155 15 7583 588 50 46 5 805860 59 40 101 1 233640 240 00 156 16 2887 597 50 47 5 776670 61 50 102 1 072450 244 50 157 16 8224 606 50 48 5 741100 64 00 103 0 909257 249 00 158 17 3594 615 50 49 5 704560 66 50 104 0 744065 253 50 159 17 9297 625 00 50 5 667130 69 00 105 0 576893 258 00 160 18 5037 634 50 51 5 628800 71 50 106 0 407776 262 50 161 19 1116 644 50 52 5 589590 74 00 107 0 217705 267 50 162 19 7538 655 00 53 5 549510 76 50 108 0 025325 272 50 163 20 461
39. 7 5 Powering Output 2 Using an External Power Supply C CAUTION 3 7 4 HeaterOutput Noise 37 It is recommended to use twisted heater leads Large changes in heater current can induce noise in measurement leads and twisting reduces the effect It is also recom mended to run heater leads in a separate cable from the measurement leads to fur ther reduce interaction There is a chassis ground point at the rear panel ofthe instrument for shielding the heater cable if necessary The cable shield can betied tothis point using a 3 18 mm 4 spade terminal or ring connector The shield should not be connected at the opposite end ofthe cable and should never be tied to the heater output leads For best noise performance do not connectthe resistive heater or its leads to ground Also avoid connecting heater leads to sensor leads or any other instrument inputs or outputs The heater output circuitry in the Model 335 is capable of sourcing 75 W of power This type of circuitry can generate some electrical noise The Model 335 was designed to generate as little noise as possible but even noisethat is a small percentage ofthe output voltage or current can be too much when sensitive measurements are being made nearby If the Model 335 heater leads are too noisy and the above wiring tech niques do not help Lake Shore offers the Model 3003 heater output conditioner to help reduce noise section 7 7 Output 2 in voltage mode can be used to program a
40. 70 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation Upper boundary K Proportional Integral Derivative MHPOutput Heater Range Ramp Rate Control Input 0 1 1000 0 1 1000 0 200 0 100 off Med 0 1 100K min Default Zone 10 Low High A OB OC OD Upper boundary K Proportional Integral Derivative MHPOutput Heater Range Ramp Rate Control Input 0 1 1000 0 1 1000 0 200 0 100 Off Med 0 1 100 K min Default Zone 09 Low High A OB OC OD Upper boundary K Proportional Integral Derivative MHPOutput Heater Range Ramp Rate Control Input 0 1 1000 0 1 1000 0 200 0 100 1 Off Med 0 1 100 K min Default Zone 08 ILow OHigh A LIB OC OD Upper boundary K Proportional Integral Derivative MHPOutput Heater Range Ramp Rate Control Input 0 1 1000 0 1 1000 0 200 0 100 Off Med 0 1 100 K min Default Zone 07 Low DHigh A OB Oc oD Upper boundary K Proportional Integral Derivative MHPOutput Heater Range Ramp Rate Control Input 0 1 1000
41. 80 pV 0 005 10 pV 0 0005 of rdg C 20 pV ofrdg OVto10V 10pA 0 05 23 1mV 20 iv 80 pV 40 01 20 pV 0 0005 of rdg C 240 pV of rdg PTC RTD Positive cato 100 1mA4 1mQ 0 2mQ 0 002 Q 0 01 mO 0 001 of rdg C 0 4 mOQ 0 01 of rdg 00to300 1mA4 1mQ 0 2mQ 0 002 Q 0 03 mO 0 001 of rdg C 0 4 mQ 0 01 of rdg 00to1000 1mA4 10mQ 2mQ 0 004 Q 0 1 mO 0 001 of rdg C 4mQ 0 01 of rdg 00to3000 1mA4 10mQ 2mQ 0 004 Q 0 3 mO 0 001 of rdg C 4 mQ 0 01 of rdg 0Oto1kO 1mA4 100 mQ 20 mQ 0 04 0 1 mO 0 001 of rdg C 40 mQ 0 02 of rdg 00to3kO 1mA4 100 mQ 20 mQ 0 04 0 3 mO 0 001 of rdg C 40 mQ 0 02 of rdg 0Qto10kQ 1 mA4 10 200mQ t0 40 10 MO 0 001 of rdg C 400 MA 0 02 of rdg NTCRTD Negative 00to100 1mA4 1mQ 0 15 mQ 0 0020 0 06 0 01 mA 0 001 of rdg C 0 3 MQ 10 mV ofrdg 00to300 300 uA 1mQ 0 45 MQ 0 002 Q 0 06 0 03 mQ 0 0015 of rdg C 0 9mQ of rdg 00to1000 100 pad 10mQ 1 5mQ 0 01 Q 0 04 0 1 MO 0 001 of rdg C 3 mO of rdg 00 to 3000 30 pA4 10 mQ 4 5mQ 0 01 Q 0 04 0 3 mQ 0 0015 of rdg C t9 mQ ofrdg 0Oto1kO 10 pA4 100 mQ 15 mQ 0 002 0 1 Q 0 04 1 mQ 0 001 of rdg C 30 mQ 0 004 of rdg of rdg of rdg 0Qto3 kQ 3 pAt 100 mQ 45 mO 0 002 0 10 0 04 3 mQ 0 0015 o0frdg C 90 mQ 0 004 of rdg of rdg of rdg 0Qto 10kQ 1 pA4 10 150 mQ 0 002 1 0 Q 0 04 10mO 0 001 of rdg C 300 mQ of rdg of rdg 0 004 of rdg 0Qto30kO 300
42. For Output 2 in Voltage mode 0 Off 1 On The range setting has no effect if an output is in the Off mode and does not apply to anoutput in Monitor Out mode An output in Monitor Out mode is always on Heater Range Query RANGE lt output gt term n lt output gt Specifies which output to query 1 or 2 range term n refer to command for description Input Reading Status Query RDGST input term a lt input gt Specifies which input to query A or B status bit weighting gt term nnn The integer returned represents the sum of the bit weighting ofthe input status flag bits A 000 response indicates a valid reading is present Bit Bit Weighting Status Indicator 0 1 invalid reading 4 16 temp underrange 5 32 temp overrange 6 64 sensor units zero 7 128 sensor units overrange Relay Control Parameter Command RELAY relay number gt lt mode gt lt input alarm gt lt alarm type gt term n n a n relay number Specifies which relay to configure 1 or 2 mode Specifies relay mode 0 Off 1 On 2 Alarms input alarm Specifies which input alarm activates the relay when the relay is in alarm mode A or B alarm type Specifies the input alarm type that activates the relay when the relay is in alarm mode 0 Low alarm 1 High Alarm 2 Both Alarms RELAY 1 2 B O term relay 1 activates when Input B low alarm activates Relay Control Parameter Query RELAY relay numbe
43. Temperature Calibration which should be recalibrated after the parameters are set to default values or any time the thermocouple curve is changed The factory defaults can be reset and the user curves cleared using the Factory Reset menu To access the Factory Reset menu press and hold Escape for 5 s Once the menu appears select yes or no to the prompt Factory Reset Selecting yes restores the defaults as listed in TABLE 8 1 Then select yes or no to the prompt Clear Curves and press Enter Interface setup Default Sensortype Diode IEEE address 12 Filter off Emulation mode None Input name Input A Input B Temperature limit OK Off Alarm off Input units Kelvin Relay Curve DT 670 Relay off Range 2 5 V Silicon Mode Unlocked Diode current 10 pA Lock code 123 jare rd Defaut Autorange On Proportional P 50 0 Current reversal On Integral I 20 0 Room comp On Manual Output 0 000 Room cal Cleared Default Output setup Output mode Default o Closed loop PID Heater range Control input InputA for Output 1 Input B for Output 2 Setpoint value Default 0 000 K Heater resistance 250 Remote local Power up enable off Remote local Local Heater out display Current Zone settings all zones Setpoint ramping Off Upper boundary 0 000 K Display mode Two Input LoopA I
44. This version works with the IEEE 488 and USB computer interfaces on the Model 335 and allows the temperature curves to be manipulated directly in the program window This version will also work with all existing Lake Shore temperature controller and temperature monitor instruments Curve Handler is available free of charge from the Lake Shore website at www lakeshore com This section highlights some ofthe important elements of proper sensor installation For more detailed information Lake Shore sensors are shipped with installation instructions that cover that specific sensor type and package The Lake Shore Temper ature Measurement and Control Catalog includes an installation section as well To further help you properly install sensors Lake Shore offers a line of cryogenic accesso ries Many ofthe materials discussed are available through Lake Shore and can be ordered with sensors or instruments Choosing appropriate mounting materials is very important in a cryogenic environ ment The high vacuum used to insulate cryostats is one consideration Materials used in these applications should have a low vapor pressure so they do not evaporate or out gas and spoil the vacuum insulation Metals and ceramics do not have this problem but greases and varnishes must be checked Another consideration is the wide extremes in temperature most sensors are exposed to The linear expansion coefficient of materials becomes important when temperature change
45. Use of liquid helium LHe and liquid nitrogen LN is often associated with the Model 335 temperature controller Although not explosive there are a number of safety considerations to keep in mind in the handling of LHe and LN B 2 Properties LHe and LN are colorless odorless and tasteless gases Gaseous nitrogen makes up about 78 percent ofthe Earth s atmosphere while helium comprises only about 5 ppm Most helium is recovered from natural gas deposits Once collected and iso lated the gases will liquefy when properly cooled A quick comparison between LHe and LN is provided in TABLE B 1 Boiling Point at 1atm 4 2K 77K Thermal Conductivity Gas w cm K 0 083 0 013 Latent Heat of Vaporization Btu L 24 152 Liquid Density Ib L 0 275 0 78 TABLE B 1 Comparison of liquid helium and liquid nitrogen B 3 Handling Cryogenic containers Dewars must be operated in accordance with the manufac Cryogenic Storage turer instructions Safety instructions will also be posted on the side of each Dewar Dewars Cryogenic Dewars must be kept in a well ventilated place where they are protected from the weather and away from any sources of heat A typical cryogenic Dewar is shown in FIGURE B 1 NON MAGNETIC NON FLAMMABLE KEEP UPRIGHT FIGURE B 1 Typical cryogenic storage Dewar B 4 Liquid Helium Transferring LHe and LN and operation of the storage Dewar controls shoul
46. applications price availability and shipments should be directed to sales Questions regarding instrument calibration or repair should be directed to instrument service Do not return a product to Lake Shore without a Return Material Authorization RMA number section 8 14 2 The Lake Shore Service Department is staffed Monday through Friday between the hours of 8 00 AM and 5 00 PM EST excluding holidays and company shut down days Contact Lake Shore Service through any ofthe means listed below However the most direct and efficient means of contacting is to complete the online service request form at http www lakeshore com sup serf html Provide a detailed description of the problem and the required contact information You will receive a response within 24 hours orthe next business day in the event of weekends or holidays If you wish to contact Service or Sales by mail or telephone use the following Lake Shore Cryotronics e Instrument Service Department Mailing address P 575 McCorkle Blvd Westerville Ohio USA 43082 8888 Email address sales lakeshore com Sales i service lakeshore com Instrument Service Telephone 614 891 2244 Sales 614 891 2243 select the option for Service Instrument Service Fax 614 818 1600 Sales 614 818 1609 Instrument Service Web service request http www lakeshore com sup serf html Instrument Service TABLE 8 7 Contact information The temperature controller is packaged to pro
47. are not being Input Option used to measure thermocouple temperature sensors Calibration for the option is stored on the card so it can be installed in the field and used with multiple Model 335 temperature controllers without recalibration Model 335 Temperature Controller 7 7 Model 3003 Heater and Output Conditioner 7 7 Model 3003 Heaterand Output Conditioner 131 The Lake Shore Model 3003 heater output conditioner is a passive filter that reduces the already low noise present in the heater output of the Model 335 The Model 3003 connects between the heater output terminals on the rear panel of acontroller anda resistive heater See FIGURE 7 3 Specifications are as follows Max Current 2 A Max Voltage 60 V Attenuation 50 or 60 Hz line frequency 20 dB 100 Hz and above line frequency harmonics 40 dB Enclosure Size 144 mm wide x 72 mm long x 165 mm deep 5 7 x 2 8 x 6 5 in Weight 1 6 kg 3 5 Ib The Model 3003 is a passive filter and requires no external power supply The High and Low terminals on the controller must be connected to the High and Low termi nals marked From Controller on the Model 3003 The binding posts or a dual banana plug can be used to connect to the Model 3003 Precautions must be taken to ensure the High and Low terminals are not reversed A diode in the Model 3003 shorts the heater output if the polarity of the terminals is reversed TheHigh and Low terminals marked To Heater on the Model 3003 shoul
48. are performed at liquid nitrogen 77 35 K and room temperature 305 K Accuracy for the DT 470 SD 13 diode sensor is as follows 1 0K 2Kto 30K no change below 30 K 0 25K 30Kto 60K 0 15K 60 K to lt 345 K 0 25 K 345 K to lt 375 K 1 0K 375to475K TABLE 5 6 Two point SoftCal calibration accuracy for DT 470 SD 13 diode sensors Three point SoftCal calibrations are performed at liquid helium 4 2 K liquid nitro gen 77 35 K and room temperature 305 K Accuracy for the DT 470 SD 13 diode sensor is as follows 0 5 K 2Kto 30K 0 25 K 30 K to lt 60 K 0 15 K 60 K to lt 345 K 40 25 K 345 K to lt 375 K 1 0K 375 to 475 K TABLE 5 7 Three point SoftCal calibration accuracy for DT 470 SD 13 diode sensors The platinum sensor is a well accepted temperature standard because of its consis tent and repeatable temperature response above 30 K SoftCal gives platinum sen sors better accuracy than their nominal matching to the DIN 43760 curve SoftCal Point One SoftCal Point Two SoftCal Point Three Liquid nitrogen Room temperature High temperature boiling point point point 77 35 K 305K 480 K HA tt 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 50 100 K 200 325 K 400 600 K FIGURE 5 10 Acceptable temperature range for platinum SoftCal sensors One two or three calibration data points can be used If you are using one point the algorithm shifts the entire
49. begins a sustained and predictable oscillation rising and falling in a consistent period of time See FIGURE 2 2 a The goal isto find the proportional value in which the oscillation begins do not turn the setting so high that temperature and heater output changes become extreme 9 Ifstep 8 is achieved complete steps 10 and 11 if step 8 is not achieved skip to step 12 10 Record the proportional setting and the amount of time it takes for the load to change from one temperature peakto the next The time is called the oscillation period ofthe load It helps describe the dominant time constant ofthe load which is used in setting integral 11 Reduce the proportional setting by half The appropriate proportional setting is one half ofthe value required for sustained oscillation in step 8 See FIGURE 2 2 b Continue to section 2 8 3 12 There are a few systems that will stabilize and not oscillate with a very high pro portional setting and a proper heater range setting Forthese systems setting a proportional setting of one half ofthe highest setting is a good starting point Continue to section 2 8 3 When the proportional setting is chosen and the integral is set to O off the Model 335 controls the load temperature below the setpoint Setting the integral allows the Model 335 control algorithm to gradually eliminate the difference in tem perature by integrating the error over time See FIGURE 2 2 d An integral setting that is
50. best practice to use the same material for thermocouple wires if it is at all possible it is also bestto avoid splices When splices are necessary continue the splice with the same type of material For less demanding applications a short across the input terminals will suffice Both thermocouple inputs should be calibrated on either channel A or B even if they use the same type of thermocouple An appropriate curve must be selected and room temperature compensation must be turned on before calibration can be started Follow this procedure to calibrate room temperature compensation For best results the calibration temperature should be close to the measurement tem perature that requires best accuracy 1 Attach a thermocouple sensor or direct short across the input terminals of the thermocouple input See FIGURE 3 7 for polarity 2 Placethe instrument away from drafts If you are calibrating using a short place an accurate room temperature thermometer near the terminal block 3 Allow the instrument to warm up for at least 0 5 h without moving or handling the sensor 4 Ifyou are calibrating with a short skip to step 6 otherwise insert the thermocou ple into the ice bath liquid nitrogen helium Dewar or other known fixed tem perature 5 Readthe displayed temperature If the temperature display is not as expected check to be sure that the thermocouple is making good thermal contact If possi ble add a thermal massto the en
51. both heating and cooling capabilities Since thermoelectric devices are solid state they are free ofthe mechanical vibrations associated with mechanical coolers Some thermoelectric coolers in a stacked configuration are capable of cool ing devices down to cryogenic temperatures about 100 K These are often used to cool and maintain the temperatures of charge coupled device CCD sensors Since thermoelectric devices are capable of both heating and cooling they require a controller that has a bipolaroutputto take full advantage ofthis The Model 335 can be configured for bipolar control on Output 2 in voltage mode Closed loop PID control works the same in bipolar mode asit does in unipolar mode except that the output can go negative instead of stopping at zero Refer to section 5 4 to setup Output 2 in bipolar mode The Model 335 cannot drive a thermoelectric device directly Most thermoelectric devices require high current approximately 3 A and low voltage typically 10 V Output 2 is capable of 10 V and 100 mA An external power amplifier is necessary to boost the power up to a level that will effectively control the thermoelectric device Refer to section 3 7 5 for more information on using an external power amplifier with Output 2 3 1 General 29 Chapter 3 Installation 3 1 General 3 2 Inspection and Unpacking This chapter provides general installation instructions forthe Model 335 tempera ture controller Please re
52. by half If the load is stable make a series of small two to five degree changes in the setpoint and watch the load react Continue to increase the integral setting until the desired response is achieved 2 8 4 Tuning Derivative 2 9 Autotuning 2 8 4 TuningDerivative 27 If an experiment requires frequent changes in setpoint derivative should be consid ered See FIGURE 2 2 e A derivative setting of O off is recommended when the con trol system is seldom changed and data is taken when the load is at steady state The derivative setting is entered into the Model 335 asa percentage ofthe integral time constant The setting range is 0 to 200 where 100 1 4 seconds Start with a setting of 50 to 100 Again do not be afraid to make some small setpoint changes halving or doubling this setting to watch the affect Expect positive setpoint changes to react differently from negative setpoint changes Choosing appropriate PID control settings can be tedious Systems can take several minutes to complete a setpoint change making it difficult to watch the display for oscillation periods and signs of instability With the Autotune feature the Model 335 automates the tuning process by measuring system characteristics and along with some assumptions about typical cryogenic systems computes setting values for P and D Autotune works only with one control loop at a time and does not set the man ual output or heater range Setting an
53. cur rent gt lt max user current gt lt current power gt term n n n n n nnn n lt output gt Specifies which heater output to configure 1 or 2 type Output type Output 2 only 0 Current 1 Voltage htr resistance Heater Resistance Setting 12 25 0 22 500 max current Specifies the maximum heater output current O User Specified 12 0 707 A 2 1 A 3 1 141 A 4 1 732A max user current Specifies the maximum heater output current if max current is set to User Specified current power Specifies whether the heater output displays in current or power current mode only Valid entries 1 current 2 power HTRSET 2 0 1 2 0 1 term Heater Output 2 uses the current source output the 25 Q heater setting has a maximum current of 1 A the maximum user current is set to OA because itis not going to be used since a discrete value has been chosen and the heater output will be displayed in units of current Max current will be limited to 1 Aon Output 1 if the heater resistance is set to 50 O If the heater resistance is set to 25 O on Output 1 then the max current will be limited to 1 414 A if Output 2 is in Current mode or 1 732 Aif Output 2 is in Voltage mode See section 4 5 1 3 for more information on the max current setting Heater Setup Query HTRSET lt output gt term n output Specifies which heater output to query 1 or 2 lt type gt lt htr resistance gt lt max current gt lt max user
54. curve up or down to meet the single point If you are using two points the algorithm has enough information to tilt the curve achieving good accuracy between the data points The third point extends the improved accuracy to span all three points EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 84 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation 5 10 4 SoftCal Accuracy With Platinum Sensors 5 10 5 SoftCal CalibrationCurve Creation Model 335 Temperature Controller m Pointone calibration data point at or near the boiling point of nitrogen 77 35 K Acceptable temperature entries are 50 K to 100 K m Pointtwo calibration data point near room temperature 305 K Acceptable tem perature entries are 200 K to 300 K m Point three calibration data point at a higher temperature 480 K Acceptable temperature entries are 400 K to 600 K A SoftCal calibration is only as good as the accuracy of the calibration points The accuracies listed for SoftCal assume 0 05 K for 77 35 K liquid nitrogen and 305 K room temperature points If you are performing the SoftCal with Lake Shore instruments note that the boiling point of liquid cryogen though accurate is affected by atmospheric pressure Use calibrated standard sensors if possible One point SoftCal calibrations with platinum sensors have no specified accuracy Two point SoftCal calibrations for applications above 70 K are performed at liquid nitrogen 77 35 K and room temperature 305 K
55. for closed loop control as a means of quickly accessing the Manual Output setting using the Manual Out front panel key Menu Navigation Manual Out gt 0 to 100 Default 0 Interface Command MOUT E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 62 CHAPTER 4 Operation Model 335 Temperature Controller 4 5 1 7 6 Setpoint The Setpoint parameter is used to set the desired load temperature for a control loop Before a setpoint can be entered a control loop must be created by configuring an input sensor and assigning it to a control output using the Control Input parameter The Setpoint can be entered in either temperature units or sensor units based on the sensor input s Preferred Units setting The Setpoint Ramping feature is available when controlling in temperature units to provide smooth continuous control from one temperature to the next Refer to section 4 4 for details on Input Setup Refer to section 4 5 1 7 1 for details on assigning a Control Input Refer to section 4 5 1 7 7 for details on the Setpoint Ramping feature Most applications require control in units of temperature To control in units of tem perature set the Preferred Units parameter of the control input sensor to either kel vin or Celsius When controlling in temperature the available setting range ofthe setpoint is limited by the Setpoint Limit parameter ofthe assigned temperature curve Referto section 4 4 11 for details on setting the Preferred Units parameter Refer
56. gt lt range gt lt compensation gt lt units gt term n n n n n refer to command for description If autorange is on the returned range parameter is the currently auto selected range KRDG Input Format Returned Format Remarks LEDS Input Format Remarks Example LEDS Input Returned Format LOCK Input Format Remarks Example LOCK Input Returned Format MDAT Input Format Returned Format Remarks MNMXRST Input Remarks 6 4 1 InterfaceCommands 119 Kelvin Reading Query KRDG lt input gt term a lt input gt lt kelvin value gt term tnnnnnn Also see the RDGST query Specifies which input to query A B Front Panel LEDS Command LEDS off on term n lt off on gt O LEDs Off 1 LEDs On If set to 0 front panel LEDs will not be functional Function can be used when display brightness is a problem LED O term turns all front panel LED functionality off Front Panel LEDS Query LEDS term lt off on gt term n refer to command for description Front Panel Keyboard Lock Command LOCK lt state gt lt code gt term n nnn state 0 Unlocked 1 Locked code Specifies lock out code Valid entries are 000 999 Locks out all front panel entries except pressing ALL OFF to immediately turn off all heater outputs Referto section 4 7 LOCK 1 123 term enables keypad lock and sets the code to 123 Front Panel Keyboard Lock Query LOCK term
57. interface cables Leave no unused or unterminated cables attached to the instrument Make cable runs as short and direct as possible Higher radiated emissions are possible with long cables Do nottightly bundle cables that carry different types of signals Model 335 Temperature Controller Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Cooling System Design and Temperature Control 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 Table of Contents Product Description cece eect teen eee e eee eeeeeeeeeneeneeennaea 1 Lll S nsor lnputs ess Eris eno EE a ne RR 2 1 1 2 Temperature Control i 3 1 13 Interface was ear 3 1 1 4 Configurable Display 00 cece cece eee ee e e 4 1 1 5 Model 3060 Thermocouple Input Option c cece eee cece eee eee 4 Sensor Selection ata 5 Model 335 Specifications eee eee eee 7 1 3 1 Input Specifications eee 7 1 3 2 Sensor Input Configuration ne 8 L3 34THEMOMetyizi m Re x eod HERREN ead RERIOC V pub deeb san 8 134 Control soere much pev s tee tlie aae a ea eR eU ob QUEE i 8 1 3 4 1 Heater Outputs Outputs 1and 2 eee ees 8 1 3 5 Front Panels oiii eer Rer ER eb Eb ka iet ERWPCRC nud e Rte OE Res 10 13 6 Interface ee obeserk es pre he a 10 13 7 General vs salons haw cer Pe f ia 10 Safety Summary and Symbols e e 11 GENErdll ci 13 Temperature Sensor Selection ene 13 2 2 1 Temperatur
58. is intended to bethe same temperature Copper and aluminum are examples of metals that have good thermal conductivity while stainless steel does not Non metallic electrically insulating materials like alumina oxide and similar ceramics have good thermal con ductivity while G 10 epoxy impregnated fiberglass does not Sensor packages cool ing loads and sample holders should have good thermal conductivity to reduce temperature gradients Surprisingly the connections between thermally conductive mounting surfaces often have very poor thermal conductivity referto section 2 4 4 and section 2 4 5 2 4 4 Contact Area 2 4 5 Contact Pressure 2 4 6 Lead Wire 2 4 4 ContactArea 17 Thermal contact area greatly affects thermal conduction because a larger area has more opportunity to transfer heat Even when the size of a sensor package is fixed thermal contact area can be improved with the use of a gasket material like indium foil and cryogenic grease A soft gasket material forms into the rough mating surface to increasethe area ofthe two surfaces that are in contact Good gasket materials are soft thin and have good thermal conductivity They must also withstand the environ mental extremes Indium foil and cryogenic grease are good examples When sensors are permanently mounted the solder or epoxy used to hold the sensor actas both gasket and adhesive Permanent mounting is not a good solution for everyone because it limits flexibility a
59. is issued The RMA will be cancelled if we do not receive the equipment after 60 days 8 14 4 Shipping Charges 8 14 5 Restocking Fee 8 14 4 ShippingCharges 145 All shipments to Lake Shore are to be made prepaid by the customer Equipment serviced under warranty will be returned prepaid by Lake Shore Equipment serviced out of warranty will be returned FOB Lake Shore Lake Shore reserves the right to charge a restocking fee for items returned for exchange or reimbursement E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 146 CHAPTER 8 Service Model 335 Temperature Controller 147 gAppendix A Temperature Scales A 1 Definition A 2 Comparison A 3 Conversions Temperature is a fundamental unit of measurement that describes the kinetic and potential energies ofthe atoms and molecules of bodies When the energies and velocities of the molecules in a body are increased the temperature is increased whether the body is a solid liquid or gas Thermometers are used to measure temper ature The temperature scale is based on the temperature at which ice liquid water and water vapor are all in equilibrium This temperature is called the triple point of water and is assigned the value 0 C 32 F and 273 15 K These three temperature scales are defined as follows m Celsius abbreviation C A temperature scale that registers the freezing point of water as 0 C and the boiling point as 100 C under normal atmospheric pres sure Former
60. last position The key can be used to enter the whitespace character m Setting selection allows you to select from a list of values During a selection sequence use A or V to cycle through the parameter values To select the dis played parameter as the new setting press Enter Once Enter is pressed the set ting is saved and the next menu parameter is displayed Pressing Escape at any time before pressing Enter will cancel any changes and exit the menu The intuitive front panel layout and keypad logic the bright vacuum flourescent dis play and the LED indicators enhance the user friendly front panel interface ofthe Model 335 which simultaneously displays up to four readings The Model 335 provides four display modes designed to accommodate different instrument configurations and user preferences The display modes are listed here and further information is provided for each display in section 4 3 1 1 to section 4 3 1 4 m The Two Input One Loop display mode provides both sensor readings as well as control loop information for one control loop m The Two Loop display mode provides the sensor reading and control setpoint for both control loops m The Input display mode provides detailed information about the relevant sensor input and the associated output m The Custom display mode provides a means for you to assign different types of information to specific sections ofthe display Menu Navigation Display Setup Disp
61. maximum power greater than the power rating for either current source output but doing so can cause the Model 335 to work improperly In this situation the max user current setting should be used to limit the power Refer to section 4 5 1 3 1 for details on using the max user current setting The resistor chosen as a heater must be able to withstand the power being dissipated in it Pre packaged resistors have a power specification that is usually given for the resistor in free air This power may need to be derated if used in a vacuum where con vection cooling cannot take place and itis not adequately anchored to a cooled sur face The Model 335 has a current limit feature which allows you to specify the maximum output current for each heater output section 4 5 1 which when set appropriately will help protect the heater from being overheated For best temperature measurement accuracy position the heater so that tempera ture gradient across the sample is minimized For best control the heater should be in close thermal contact with the cooling power Geometry of the load can make one or both of these difficult to achieve That is why there are several heater shapes and sizes Resistive wire like nichrome is the most flexible type of heater available The wire can be purchased with electrical insulation and has a predictable resistance per given length This type of heater wire can be wrapped around a load to give balanced even heating of th
62. ofthe line input assembly on the rear panel of the Model 335 and it turns line powerto the instrument on and off When the circle is depressed power is off When the line is depressed power is on This section details how to connect diode and resistor sensors to the Model 335 inputs Refer to section 4 4 to configure the inputs Refer to section 3 6 for a descrip tion ofthe optional thermocouple input The input connectors are 6 pin DIN 45322 sockets The sensor connector pins are defined in FIGURE 3 3 and TABLE 3 2 Two mating connectors 6 pin DIN plugs are included in the connector kit shipped with the instrument These are common con nectors so additional mating connectors can be purchased from local electronics suppliers They can also be ordered from Lake Shore as G 106 233 C ic DI m bo w e ensor input connector EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 32 CHAPTER 3 Installation 3 5 2 Sensor Lead Cable 3 5 3 Grounding and Shielding Sensor Leads Model 335 Temperature Controller 1 I Current 2 V Voltage 3 None Shield 4 V Voltage 5 I Current 6 None Shield TABLE 3 2 Diode resistor input connector details The sensor lead cable used outside the cooling system can be much different from what is used inside Between the instrument and vacuum shroud heat leak is not a concern In this case cabling should be chosen to minimize error and noise pick up Larger conductor 22 AWG
63. operation only the curves that share the input type you have selected are displayed If the curve you wish to select does not appear in the selection sequence make sure the curve format matches the recommended format for the inputtype selected Refer to TABLE 4 6 E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 52 CHAPTER 4 Operation The sensor reading of the instrument can always be displayed in sensor units If a temper ature response curve is selected for an input its readings may also be displayed in tem perature DT 470 Diode DT 470 1 4Kto 475 K Table D 1 02 DT 670 Diode DT 670 1 4 Kto 500 K Table D 2 03 DT 500 D Diode DT 500 D 1 4 Kto 365 K Table D 3 04 DT 500 E1 Diode DT 500 E1 1 1K to 330K Table D 3 05 Reserved 06 PT 100 PTCRTD PT 100 30Kto800K Table D 4 07 PT 1000 PTCRTD PT 1000 30Kto800K Table D 4 08 RX 102A AA NTCRTD Rox RX 102A 0 05 Kto 40 K Table D 5 09 RX 202A AA NTC RTD Rox RX 202A 0 05 Kto 40 K Table D 6 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 TypeK Thermocouple Type K 3Kto 1645 K Table D 7 13 Type E Thermocouple Type E 3Kto1274K Table D 8 14 TypeT Thermocouple TypeT 3Kto670K Table D 9 T5 AuFe 0 03 Thermocouple AuFe 0 03 3 5 Kto 500 K Table D 10 16 AuFe 0 07 Thermocouple AuFe 0 07 3 15 Kto 610K Table D 11 17 Reserved n m m 18 Reserved 19 Reserved Ea 20 Reserved 21to59 User curves
64. output 10 V times the Warm Up Percentage For example if the Warm Up Percentage is set to 50 the con trol output voltage for the given unpowered output will be 50 of 10 V or 5 V when the output is on Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 2 0utput Type Voltage Output Mode Warm Up Supply Control Input A B Ext Warm Up Percentage 0 to 100 Default 100 Interface Command WARMUP The Warm Up Control parameter determines what happens when the control set point is reached The options are m Auto Off once the Heater Range is set to on the Warm Up Percentage voltage is applied to the output section 5 5 1 and the output stays on until the control input temperature reaches the control setpoint The output will then be turned off 0 V and the Heater Range setting will automatically be set to Off effectively turning off all temperature control for the control loop If the Heater Range is again manually set to On the cycle will begin again and the output will turn on and stay on until the control input temperature reaches the setpoint again Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 2 0utput Type Voltage Output Mode Warm Up Supply Control Input A B res Warmup Control Auto Off Interface Command WARMUP m Continuous this mode implements what is often referred to as On Off control Once the Heater Range is set to on the Warm Up Percentage voltage is applied to the output until the control input temper
65. panel Aor B keys to temporarily display the control loop information while the new setting is entered Referto section 4 3 for details on configuring the front panel display Menu Navigation P gt 0 to 1000 Default 50 Interface Command PID 4 5 1 7 3 Integral 1 The integral parameter also called reset is the part of the PID control equation It has a range of 0 to 1000 with a resolution of 0 1 The default value is 20 Setting to O turnsthe reset function off The I setting is related to seconds by setting 71000 l econgs For example a reset number setting of 20 corresponds to a time constant of 50 s A system will normally take several time constants to settle into the setpoint The 50s time constant if correctforthe system being controlled would result in a system that stabilizes at a new setpoint in between 5 min and 10 min To set I first configure the front panel display to show the desired control loop infor mation then use the I key on the front panel A quick way to access the setting if the control loop information is not already being displayed is to use the front panel Aor B keys to temporarily display the control loop information while the new setting is entered Referto section 4 3 for details on configuring the front panel display Menu Navigation I gt 0 to 1000 Default 20 Interface Command PID 4 5 1 HeaterOutputs 61 4 5 1 7 4 Derivative D The derivative parameter sometimes called ra
66. points can be entered into the Model 335 so it can generate a curve If the CalCurve service is purchased with the calibrated sensor the curve is also generated at the factory and can be entered like any other curve Lake Shore silicon diode sensors incorporate remarkably uniform sensing elements that exhibit precise monotonic and repeatable temperature response For example the Lake Shore DT 400 Series of silicon diode sensors have a repeatable temperature response from 2 K to 475 K These sensors closely follow a standard curve SoftCal is an inexpensive way to improve the accuracy of an already predictable sensor A unique characteristic of DT 400 Series diodes is that their temperature responses pass through 28 K at almost exactly the same voltage This improves SoftCal algo rithm operation by providing an extra calibration data point It also explains why SoftCal calibration specifications are divided into two temperature ranges above and below 28 K See FIGURE 5 9 m Pointone calibration data point at or near the boiling point of helium 4 2 K Acceptable temperature entries are 2 K to 10 K This data point improves between the calibration data point and 28 K Points two and three improve tem peratures above 28 K m Point two calibration data point at or near the boiling point of nitrogen 77 35 K Temperatures outside 50 K to 100 K are not allowed This data point improves accuracy between 28 K and 100 K Points two and t
67. power and full closed loop proportional integral derivative PID control capability Alarms and relays are included to help automate secondary control functions The improved autotuning feature of the Model 335 can be used to automatically calculate PID control parameters so you spend lesstime tuning your controller and more time conducting experiments El akeShore www lakeshore com 2 CHAPTER 1 Introduction 1 1 1 Sensor Inputs Model 335 Temperature Controller The Model 335 supports the industry s most advanced line of cryogenic temperature sensors as manufactured by Lake Shore including diodes resistance temperature detectors RTDs and thermocouples The controller s zone tuning feature allows you to measure and control temperatures seamlessly from 300 mK to over 1 500 K This feature automatically switches temperature sensor inputs when your temperature range goes beyond the useable range of a given sensor You ll never again have to be concerned with temperature sensor over or under errors and measurement continuity issues The intuitive front panel layout and keypad logic bright vacuum fluorescent display and LED indicators enhance the user friendly front panel interface of the Model 335 Four standard display modes are offered to accommodate different instrument con figurations and user preferences Say goodbye to sticky notes and hand written labels as the ability to custom label sensor inputs eliminates the guesswork in re
68. ten different temperature zones Open Loop mode pro vides a means of applying a constant current to the output Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 1 or 2 0utput Mode Off Closed Loop PID Zone Open Loop Default Off Interface Command OUTMODE 4 5 1 6 1 Closed Loop PID Mode The Closed Loop PID mode is the most commonly used closed loop control mode for tightly controlling temperature using the heater outputs of the Model 335 In this mode the controller attempts to keep the load exactly at the setpoint temperature you entered To do this it uses feedback from the control input sensor to calculate and actively adjust the control output setting The Model 335 uses a control algorithm called PID that refers to the three terms used to tune the control Referto section 4 4 9 for details on assigning a Control Input for the closed loop feedback Refer to section 2 7 and section 2 8 fora detailed discussion of PID control and manual tuning In Closed Loop PID mode the controller will accept user entered Proportional Inte gral and Derivative parameters to provide 3 term PID control Manual output can be used during closed loop control to add to the calculated PID control output Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 1 or 2 0utput Mode Closed Loop PID Interface OUTMODE 4 5 1 6 2 Zone Mode Optimal control parameter values are often different at different temperatures within a system Once control parameter values have been
69. the associated queries in section 6 4 1 E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 92 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation 6 2 4 Status System Overview Model 335 Temperature Controller The Model 335 implements a status system compliant to the IEEE 488 2 standard The status system provides a method of recording and reporting instrument informa tion and istypically used to control the Service Request SRQ interrupt line A dia gram ofthe status system is shown in FIGURE 6 1 The status system is made up of status register sets the Status Byte register and the Service Request Enable register Each register set consists of three types of registers condition event and enable 6 2 4 1 Condition Registers Each register set except the Standard Event Register set includes a condition regis ter as shown in FIGURE 6 1 The condition register constantly monitors the instru ment status The data bits are real time and are not latched or buffered The register is read only 6 2 4 2 Event Registers Each register set includes an event register as shown in FIGURE 6 1 Bits in the event register correspond to various system events and latch when the event occurs When an event bit is set subsequent events corresponding to that bit are ignored Set bits remain latched until the register is cleared by a query command such as ESR ora CLS command The register is read only 6 2 4 3 Enable Registers Each register set includes an enable r
70. to 28 AWG stranded copper wire is recommended because it has low resistance yet remains flexible when several wires are bundled in a cable The arrangement of wires in a cable is also important For best results voltage leads V and V should be twisted together and current leads I and l should be twisted together The twisted pairs of voltage and current leads should then be covered with a braided or foil shield that is connected to the shield pin ofthe instrument This type of cable is available through local electronics suppliers Instrument specifications are given assuming 3 m 10 ft of sensor cable Longer cables 30 m 100 ft or more can be used but environmental conditions may degrade accuracy and noise specifica tions Referto section 2 4 6 for information about wiring inside the cryostat The sensor inputs are isolated from earth ground to reduce the amount of earth ground referenced noise that is present on the measurement leads Connecting sen sor leads to earth ground on the chassis of the instrument or in the cooling system will defeat that isolation Grounding leads on more than one sensor prevents the sen sor excitation current sources from operating Shielding the sensor lead cable is important to keep external noise from entering the measurement A shield is most effective when it is near the measurement potential so the Model 335 offers a shield at measurement common The shield of the sensor cable should be connected to th
71. to section 5 8 2 for details on setting a curve Setpoint Limit The Setpoint Limit feature only limits the Setpoint entry For even greater protection the Temperature Limit feature can be used to turn off all heater outputs if a sensor reading above the specified temperature is observed Refer to section 4 4 10 for details on the Temperature Limit feature There are some instances when temperature control in sensor units may be desired for example when a temperature curve is not available For these applications the Model 335 can control temperature in sensor units To control in sensor units set the Preferred Units parameter to sensor When controlling in sensor units the Setpoint resolution matches the display resolution for the sensor input type given in the speci fications section 1 3 Temperature control in sensor units can be unpredictable since most sensors do not have a linear response to temperature and therefore have can have different sensitivity in dif ferent temperature ranges When changing the Preferred Units from sensor to temperature kelvin or Celsius or from temperature to sensor the Model 335 converts the setpoint to the new control units by using the assigned temperature curve This provides minimal disruption in the control output when changing the Preferred Units parameter while the control loop is active Menu Navigation Setpoint See note below When controlling in temperature the setpoint is limited
72. unplugged and that the Model 335 is not pow ered down while the com port is open The USB driver creates a com port when the USB connection is detected and removes the com port when the USB connec tion is no longer detected Removal of the com port while it is in use by the soft ware can cause the software to lock up or crash E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 134 CHAPTER 8 Service 8 3 IEEE Interface Troubleshooting 8 3 1 New Installation 8 3 2 Existing Installation No Longer Working 8 3 3 Intermittent Lockups 8 4 Fuse Drawer 8 5 Line Voltage Selection AWARNING Model 335 Temperature Controller This section provides IEEE interface troubleshooting for issues that arise with new installations old installations and intermittent lockups 1 Checkthe instrument address 2 Always send a message terminator 3 Send the entire message string at one time including the terminator 4 Send only one simple command at a time until communication is established 5 Be sure to spell commands correctly and use proper syntax 6 Attempt both Talk and Listen functions If one works but not the other the hard ware connection is working so look at syntax terminator and command format 1 Powerthe instrument off and then on again to see if itis a soft failure 2 Powerthe computer off and then on again to see if the IEEE card is locked up 3 Verify that the address has not been changed on the instrument during a memory
73. zt black green _ ox green red black red MLIN Co Lo rear view SOK shield FIGURE 7 1 Model 335 sensor and heater cable assembly 10 ft P N 112 177 20 ft P N 112 178 The Model 335 can be installed into a 483 mm 19 in rack mount cabinet using the optional Lake Shore Model RM 1 2 rack mount kit The rack mount kit contains mounting ears panel handles and screwsthat adaptthe front panel to fit into a 88 9 mm 3 5 in tall full rack space Refer to FIGURE 7 2 for installation details Ensure that there is a 25 mm 1 in clearance on both sides of the instrument after rack mounting E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 130 CHAPTER 7 Options and Accessories NOTE Customer must use 5 64 in 2 mm hex key to remove four existing screws from sides of instrument Uniton right side mounting shown Uniton left side also possible Item Description P N Qty 1 Rack mount ear 107 440 1 2 Rackmountsupport 107 442 1 3 Rack mount panel 107 432 1 4 Rackmounthandle 107 051 01 2 5 Screw 6 32x in 0 035 4 FHMS Phillips 6 Screw 8 32 x 3s in 0 081 6 FHMS Phillips FIGURE 7 2 Model RM 1 rack mount kit 7 6 Model 3060 H The field installable Model 3060 H thermocouple input option adds thermocouple Thermocouple functionality to inputs A and B While the option can be easily removed this is not necessary asthe standard inputs remain fully functional when they
74. 0 0 84651 60 030 0 1 10702 3 465 0 0 11356 32 150 0 0 86874 61 029 0 1 10945 4 460 0 0 12547 33 145 0 0 87976 62 028 0 1 11212 5 455 0 0 13759 34 140 0 0 89072 63 027 0 1 11517 6 450 0 0 14985 35 135 0 0 90161 64 026 0 1 11896 7 445 0 0 16221 36 130 0 0 91243 65 025 0 1 12463 8 440 0 0 17464 37 125 0 0 92317 66 024 0 1 13598 9 435 0 0 18710 38 120 0 0 93383 67 023 0 1 15558 10 430 0 0 19961 39 115 0 0 94440 68 022 0 1 17705 11 420 0 0 22463 40 110 0 0 95487 69 021 0 1 19645 12 410 0 0 24964 41 105 0 0 96524 70 019 5 1 22321 13 400 0 0 27456 42 100 0 0 97550 71 017 0 1 26685 14 395 0 0 28701 43 095 0 0 98564 72 015 0 1 30404 15 380 0 0 32417 44 090 0 0 99565 73 013 5 1 33438 16 365 0 0 36111 45 085 0 1 00552 74 012 5 1 35642 17 345 0 0 41005 46 080 0 1 01525 75 011 5 1 38012 18 330 0 0 44647 47 075 0 1 02482 76 010 5 1 40605 19 325 0 0 45860 48 070 0 1 03425 77 009 5 1 43474 20 305 0 0 50691 49 065 0 1 04353 78 008 5 1 46684 21 300 0 0 51892 50 058 0 1 05630 79 007 5 1 50258 22 285 0 0 55494 51 052 0 1 06702 80 005 2 1 59075 23 265 0 0 60275 52 046 0 1 07750 81 004 2 1 62622 24 250 0 0 63842 53 040 0 1 08781 82 003 4 1 65156 25 235 0 0 67389 54 039 0 1 08953 83 002 6 1 67398 26 220 0 0 70909 55 036 0 1 09489 84 002 1 1 68585 27 205 0 0 74400 56 034 0 1 09864 85 001 7 1 69367 28 190 0 0 77857 57 033 0 1 10060 86 001 4 1 69818 29 180 0 0 80139 58 032 0 1 10263 TABLEC 2 Lake Shore DT 470 Silicon Diode Curve 01 EJ ak
75. 0 1 1000 0 200 0 100 1 Off Med 0 1 100 K min Default Zone 06 ILow High A OB OC OD Upper boundary K Proportional Integral Derivative MHPOutput Heater Range Ramp Rate Control Input 0 1 1000 0 1 1000 0 200 0 100 off Med 0 1 100 K min Default Zone 05 Low High A OB OC OD Upper boundary K Proportional Integral Derivative MHPOutput Heater Range Ramp Rate Control Input 0 1 1000 0 1 1000 0 200 0 100 1 Off Med 0 1 100 K min Default Zone 04 ILow DHigh A OB OC OD Upper boundary K Proportional Integral Derivative MHPOutput Heater Range Ramp Rate Control Input 0 1 1000 0 1 1000 0 200 0 100 Off Med 0 1 100 K min Default Zone 03 Low High A OB OC Upper boundary K roportiona ntegra erivative utput eater Range amp Rate ontrol Input Proportional Integral Derivati MHP Outp H Rang RampR C Inp 0 1 1000 0 1 1000 0 200 0 100 1 Off Med 0 1 100K min Default Zone 02 Low High A OB OC OD Upper boundary K Proportional Integral Derivative MHPOutput Heater Range Ramp Rate Control Input 0 1 1000 0 1 1000 0 200 0 100 off Med 0 1 100 K min Default Zone 01 Low High A OB OC FIGURE 5 2 Record of zone settings Model 335 Temperature Controller 5 4 Bipolar Control 5 5 Warm Up Supply 5 4 BipolarControl 71 Menu Navigation Zone Settings Output 1 2 gt Zone to edit 1 to 10 Interface Command ZONE The most common type of temperature control out
76. 0 144 20 5573 567 00 37 9 486720 41 20 91 4 212440 195 00 145 21 5702 580 00 38 9 457560 43 00 92 3 992330 199 50 146 22 627 593 50 39 9 427340 44 80 93 3 769140 204 00 147 23 7279 607 50 40 9 396080 46 60 94 3 543070 208 50 148 24 873 622 00 41 9 363810 48 40 95 3 314120 213 00 149 26 0623 637 00 42 9 330540 50 20 96 3 082340 217 50 150 27 3356 653 00 43 9 296270 52 00 97 2 847790 222 00 151 28 6935 670 00 44 9 257090 54 00 98 2 610520 226 50 152 30 1761 688 50 45 9 216690 56 00 99 2 343820 231 50 153 31 8242 709 00 46 9 175140 58 00 100 2 073770 236 50 154 33 7187 732 50 47 9 132450 60 00 101 1 800570 241 50 155 36 1028 762 00 48 9 088620 62 00 102 1 524210 246 50 156 41 8502 833 00 49 9 043710 64 00 103 1 244740 251 50 157 44 2747 863 00 50 8 997710 66 00 104 0 962207 256 50 158 46 2907 888 00 51 8 950650 68 00 105 0 676647 261 50 159 48 1007 910 50 52 8 902530 70 00 106 0 359204 267 00 160 49 8256 932 00 53 8 840980 72 50 107 0 009079 273 00 161 51 5056 953 00 54 8 777760 75 00 108 0 344505 279 00 TABLE C 9 Type E Nickel Chromium us Copper Nickel Thermocouple Curve El akeShore www lakeshore com 158 Appendices 1 3 15 56 84 00 111 6 257510 5 424100 0 623032 289 00 2 6 257060 3 56 57 5 380600 86 50 112 0 843856 294 50 3 6 256520 4
77. 00 58 5 336260 89 00 113 1 067190 300 00 4 6 255810 4 50 59 5 291080 91 50 114 1 293090 305 50 5 6 254950 5 04 60 5 245070 94 00 115 1 521570 311 00 6 6 253920 5 62 61 5 188800 97 00 116 1 752660 316 50 7 6 252780 6 20 62 5 131290 100 00 117 1 986340 322 00 8 6 251380 6 85 63 5 072630 103 00 118 2 222600 327 50 9 6 249730 7 55 64 5 012780 106 00 119 2 461410 333 00 10 6 247810 8 30 65 4 951770 109 00 120 2 702740 338 50 11 6 245590 9 10 66 4 889610 112 00 121 2 946550 344 00 12 6 243040 9 95 67 4 826300 115 00 122 3 192800 349 50 13 6 240300 10 80 68 4 761840 118 00 123 3 441440 355 00 14 6 237210 11 70 69 4 696250 121 00 124 3 715300 361 00 15 6 233710 12 65 70 4 629530 124 00 125 3 991980 367 00 16 6 229800 13 65 71 4 561670 127 00 126 4 271300 373 00 17 6 225630 14 65 72 4 492700 130 00 127 4 553250 379 00 18 6 221000 15 70 73 4 422610 133 00 128 4 837770 385 00 19 6 215860 16 80 74 4 351390 136 00 129 5 148790 391 50 20 6 210430 17 90 75 4 266950 139 50 130 5 462770 398 00 21 6 204430 19 05 76 4 180930 143 00 131 5 779560 404 50 22 6 198680 20 10 77 4 093440 146 50 132 6 099160 411 00 23 6 191780 21 30 78 4 004430 150 00 133 6 421500 417 50 24 6 184530 22 50 79 3 913940 153 50 134 6 746540 424 00 25 6 176930 23 70 80 3 821970 157 00 135 7 099510 431 00 26 6 168310 25 00 81 3 728520 160 50 136 7 455590 438 00 27 6 159280 26 30 82 3 633620 164 00 137 7 814630 445 00 28 6 149830 27 60 83 3 537260 167
78. 00133 158 133 11 2317 549 5 180 46 8038 1418 40 6 25768 43 6 87 3 90053 161 5 134 11 7883 563 181 47 2873 1431 41 6 24239 45 2 88 3 79815 165 135 12 3888 577 5 182 47 7684 1444 42 6 22656 46 8 89 3 6942 168 5 136 13 054 593 5 183 48 2287 1456 5 43 6 21019 48 4 90 3 58873 172 137 13 7844 611 184 48 6868 1469 44 6 19115 50 2 91 3 46638 176 138 14 5592 629 5 185 49 1426 1481 5 45 6 17142 52 92 3 34204 180 139 15 3786 649 186 49 5779 1493 5 46 6 15103 53 8 93 3 21584 184 140 16 2428 669 5 187 50 0111 1505 5 47 6 12998 55 6 94 3 08778 188 141 17 1518 691 TABLE C 8 Type K Nickel Chromium us Nickel Aluminum thermocouple curve Model 335 Temperature Controller 157 1 3 15 55 77 50 109 9 834960 8 713010 0 701295 285 0 2 9 834220 3 59 56 8 646710 80 00 110 1 061410 291 00 3 9 833370 4 04 57 8 578890 82 50 111 1 424820 297 00 4 9 832260 4 56 58 8 509590 85 00 112 1 791560 303 00 5 9 830920 5 12 59 8 438800 87 50 113 2 161610 309 00 6 9 829330 5 72 60 8 366570 90 00 114 2 534960 315 00 7 9 827470 6 35 61 8 292900 92 50 115 2 943070 321 50 8 9 825370 7 00 62 8 217810 95 00 116 3 355100 328 00 9 9 822890 7 70 63 8 141330 97 50 117 3 770870 334 50 10 9 820010 8 45 64 8 047780 100 50 118 4 190420 341 00 11 9 816880 9 20 6
79. 06968 9 55 81 3 27169 1 64 12 3 02749 28 5 47 3 07190 9 20 82 3 28462 1 53 13 3 02823 27 6 48 3 07428 8 85 83 3 29779 1 43 14 3 02903 26 7 49 3 07685 8 50 84 3 31256 1 33 15 3 02988 25 8 50 3 07922 8 20 85 3 32938 1 23 16 3 03078 24 9 51 3 08175 7 90 86 3 34846 1 130 17 3 03176 24 0 52 3 08447 7 60 87 3 37196 1 020 18 3 03280 23 1 53 3 08786 7 25 88 3 39220 0 935 19 3 03393 22 2 54 3 09150 6 90 89 3 41621 0 850 20 3 03500 214 55 3 09485 6 60 90 3 44351 0 765 21 3 03615 20 6 56 3 09791 6 35 91 3 47148 0 690 22 3 03716 19 95 57 3 10191 6 05 92 3 50420 0 615 23 3 03797 19 45 58 3 10638 5 74 93 3 54057 0 545 24 3 03882 18 95 59 3 11078 5 46 94 3 58493 0 474 25 3 03971 18 45 60 3 11558 5 18 95 3 63222 0 412 26 3 04065 17 95 61 3 12085 4 90 96 3 68615 0 354 27 3 04164 17 45 62 3 12622 4 64 97 3 75456 0 295 28 3 04258 17 00 63 3 13211 4 38 98 3 82865 0 245 29 3 04357 16 55 64 3 13861 4 12 99 3 91348 0 201 30 3 04460 16 10 65 3 14411 3 92 100 4 01514 0 162 31 3 04569 15 65 66 3 14913 3 75 101 4 14432 0 127 32 3 04685 15 20 67 3 15454 3 58 102 4 34126 0 091 33 3 04807 14 75 68 3 16002 3 42 103 4 54568 0 066 34 3 04936 14 30 69 3 16593 3 26 104 4 79803 0 050 35 3 05058 13 90 70 3 17191 3 11 TABLE C 6 Lake Shore RX 102A Rox curve Model 335 Temperature Controller 155 34 67 1 3 35085 40 0 3 40482 1145 3 52772 2 17 2 3 35222 38 5 35 3 40688 11 00
80. 1 666 50 54 5 508560 79 00 109 0 188573 278 00 164 20 8627 673 00 55 5 466760 81 50 110 0 404639 283 50 TABLE C 10 Type T Copper us Copper Nickel thermocouple curve Model 335 Temperature Controller 159 32 160 1 4 6667 2 24537 2 4 62838 6 35 33 2 06041 170 3 4 60347 8 15 34 1 86182 180 5 4 4 58043 9 75 35 1 66004 191 5 4 53965 12 5 36 1 47556 200 5 6 4 47226 16 95 37 1 0904 220 7 4 43743 19 3 38 0 73397 237 5 8 4 39529 22 2 39 0 68333 240 9 4 34147 26 40 0 3517 256 10 4 29859 29 1 41 0 2385 261 5 11 4 26887 313 42 0 078749 277 12 4 22608 34 5 43 0 139668 280 13 4 2018 36 3 44 0 426646 294 5 14 4 02151 49 8 45 0 546628 300 5 15 3 94549 55 4 46 0 858608 316 16 3 87498 60 5 47 0 938667 320 17 3 80464 65 5 48 1 3456 340 18 3 73301 70 5 49 1 7279 358 5 19 3 65274 76 50 1 76905 360 5 20 3 5937 80 51 2 20705 381 5 21 3 51113 85 5 52 2 51124 396 22 3 45023 89 5 53 2 69878 405 23 3 43451 90 5 54 2 94808 417 24 3 37842 94 55 3 13562 426 25 3 35469 95 5 56 3 43707 440 5 26 3 28237 100 57 3 85513 460 5 27 3 11919 110 58 4 17136 475 5 28 2 95269 120 59 4 28662 481 29 2 78168 130 60 4 64037 498 30 2 60639 140 61 4 68168 500 31 2 42737 150 TABLE C 11 Chromel AuFe 0 03 thermocouple curve EL akeShore www lakeshore com 160 Appendices one mt enti sone mi sento eons m t
81. 119 STB Status Byte Query 109 MNMXRST Minimum and Maximum Function Reset Cmd 119 TST Self Test Query 109 MODE Remote Interface Mode Cmd 120 KWAI Wait to Continue Cmd 109 MODE Remote Interface Mode Query 120 ALARM Input Alarm Parameter Cmd 110 MOUT Manual Output Cmd 120 ALARM Input Alarm Parameter Query 110 MOUT Output Manual Heater Power MHP Output Query 120 ALARMST Input Alarm Status Query 110 OPST Operational Status Query 120 ALMRST Reset Alarm Status Cmd 110 OPSTE Operation Status Enable Cmd 120 ANALOG Monitor Out Parameter Cmd 111 OPSTE Operational Status Enable Query 120 ANALOG Monitor Out Parameter Query 111 OPSTR Opertional Status Register Query 121 ATUNE Autotune Cmd 111 OUTMODE Output Mode Command 121 BRIGT Display Brightness Cmd 111 OUTMODE Output Mode Query 121 BRIGT Display Brightness Query 112 POLARITY Output Voltage Polarity Command 122 CRDG Celsius Reading Query 112 POLARITY Output Voltage Polarity Query 122 CRVDEL Curve Delete Cmd 112 PID Control Loop PID Values Cmd 121 CRVHDR Curve Header Cmd 112 PID Control Loop PID Values Query 121 CRVHDR Curve Header Query 112 RAMP Control Setpoint Ramp Parameter Cmd 122 CRVPT Curve Data Point Cmd 113 RAMP Control Setpoint Ramp Parameter Query 122 CRVPT Curve Data Point Query 113 RAMPST Control Setpoint Ramp Status Query 122 DFLT Factory Defaults Cmd 113 RANGE Heater Range Cmd 123 DIOCUR Diode Excitation Current Parameter Cmd 113 RANGE Heater Range Query 123 DIOCUR Diode E
82. 2 RELAYS siciliane 76 5 8 Curve Numbers and Storage ees 77 5 8 1 Curve Header Parameters eee eee 77 5 8 2 Curve Breakpolnts io sare REP aaa 77 5 9 Front Panel Curve Entry Operations cece cee e cence cece enn eee enna 78 5 9 1 Edit Quine cR 78 5 9 1 1 Edita Breakpoint Pair 0 0 c cece cece nett ees 79 5 9 1 2 Add a New Breakpoint Pair 80 5 9 1 3 Delete a Breakpoint Pair cece cece e teen e eee ees 80 5 9 1 4 Thermocouple Curve Considerations cece cece ee ees 80 5 92 EISE CUIVE os Lee semet eu Uer ra eie ihe ppm dle RODA e REID bonds 81 5 9 3 CODY CUN E oot e rero Re oa t elena nw Hd ute Seer RE ea 81 BO SOR CaM s arte teca e A ei re amend Obi dta 81 5 10 1 SoftCal with Silicon Diode Sensors cece e cece eee e ees 82 5 10 2 SoftCal Accuracy with DT 400 Series Silicon Diode Sensors 83 5 10 3 SoftCal With Platinum Sensors ee 83 5 10 4 SoftCal Accuracy With Platinum Sensors c cece cece ee eens 84 5 10 5 SoftCal CalibrationCurve Creation cee cece eee rren 84 5 11 Emulation Modes cceli rl sega 85 5 11 1 Emulation Mode Configuration cece eee eee eee en eee ee ened 85 5 11 2 Unsupported Commands cece cece cece eee e eene 86 5 11 3 Command Interpretation sss eee eee 86 SILA PID Scaling ModE ia ote eerte e CEA RR COR II 86 5 11 5 Baud Rate sura ER
83. 2 4 9 Thermal Radiation 2 5 Heater Selection and Installation 2 5 1 Heater Resistance and Power 2 4 9 Thermal Radiation 19 Thermal blackbody radiation is one of the ways heat is transferred Warm surfaces radiate heat to cold surfaces even through a vacuum The difference in temperature between the surfaces is one thing that determines how much heat is transferred Thermal radiation causes thermal gradients and reduces measurement accuracy Many cooling systems include a radiation shield The purpose of the shield is to sur round the sample stage sample and sensor with a surface that is at or near their tem perature to minimize radiation The shield is exposed to the room temperature surface of the vacuum shroud on its outer surface so some cooling power must be directed to the shield to keep it near the load temperature If the cooling system does not include an integrated radiation shield or one cannot be easily made one alternative is to wrap several layers of super insulation aluminized mylar loosely between the vacuum shroud and load This reduces radiation transfer to the sample space There is a variety of resistive heaters that can be used as the controlled heating source for temperature control The mostly metal alloys like nichrome are usually wire or foil Shapes and sizes vary to permit installation into different systems Cryogenic cooling systems have a wide range of cooling power The resistive heater must be ab
84. 2 9 Before initiating the Autotune process the cooling system must be configured prop erly with control input sensor and heater output making it capable of closed loop control The control sensor must have a valid temperature response curve assigned to it An appropriate heater range must also be determined as described in section 2 8 1 The system must be coarsely maintaining temperature within 5 K ofthe setpoint where new tuning parameters are desired in order for the Autotuning process to initi ate Autotune works only with one control loop at a time and does not setthe manual output or heater range To initiate the Autotune process press Autotune then select an Autotune mode There are three Autotune modes available They result in slightly different system characteristics Autotune PI is recommended for most applications m Autotune P sets only the P parameter value and D are set to 0 no matter what the initial values are This mode is recommended for systems that have very long lag times or nonlinearity that prevents stable PI control Expect some overshoot or undershoot of the setpoint and stable temperature control below the setpoint value m Autotune PI sets values for both P and parameters D is set to 0 This mode is recommended for stable control at a constant temperature It may take slightly longer to stabilize after setpoint change than Autotune PID Expect some over shoot or undershoot of the setpoint and stable tempera
85. 20 220 240 V 10 Voltage 3 15AT250V FIGURE 8 2 Power fuse access Use this procedure to remove and replace a line fuse To avoid potentially lethal shocks turn off the controller and disconnect it from AC power before performing these procedures For continued protection against fire hazard replace the fuse only with the same fuse type and rating specified for the line voltage selected Test the fuse with an ohmmeter Do not rely on visual inspection of the fuse 1 Locatethe line input assembly on the instrument rear panel See Figure 8 2 2 Turnthe power switch Off O 3 Removethe instrument power cord 4 Witha small screwdriver release the drawer holding the line voltage selector and fuse 5 Remove existing fuse s Replace them with proper Slow Blow time delay fuse ratings as follows 100 120 220 240 V 3 15 AT 250 V 5 x 20 mm 6 Re assemblethe line input assembly in reverse order 7 Verify that the voltage indicator is in the line input assembly window 8 Connectthe instrument power cord 9 Turn the power switch On I El akeShore www lakeshore com 136 CHAPTER 8 Service 8 7 Factory Reset Menu 8 7 1 Default Values Input setup general It is sometimes necessary to reset instrument parameter values orto clear the con tents of curve memory Both are stored in nonvolatile memory called NOVRAM but they can be cleared individually Instrument calibration is not affected except for Room
86. 27 Chapter 7 Options and Accessories 7 1 General This chapter provides information on the models options and accessories available forthe Model 335 temperature controller 7 2 Models 335 The list of Model 335 model numbers is provided as follows Description of Models Standard temperature controller two diode RTD inputs and two control outputs TABLE 7 1 Model description Power configurations the instrument is configured at the factory for customer selected power as follows VAC 100 Instrument configured for 100 VAC with U S power cord VAC 120 VAC 220 Instrument configured for 220 VAC with universal Euro line cord VAC 240 Instrument configured for 120 VAC with U S power cord Instrument configured for 240 VAC with universal Euroline cord VAC 120 ALL Instrument configured for 120 VAC with U S power cord and universal Euro line cord and fuses for 220 240 VAC setting Other country line cords available consult Lake Shore 7 3 Options 3060 H TABLE 7 2 Power configurations The list of Model 335 options is provided as follows Description of Options 2 thermocouple input option card Adds two thermocouple inputs to the Model 335 7 4 Accessories TABLE 7 3 Model description Accessories are devices that perform a secondary duty as an aid or refinement to the primary unit Refer to the Lake Shore Temperature Measurement and Control Catalog for det
87. 3 49 82 207 67 133 15 140 40 40 233 15 369 67 223 15 50 202 130 143 15 39 67 39 82 233 33 364 220 53 15 200 128 89 144 26 30 34 44 238 71 360 217 78 55 37 199 67 128 71 14444 29 67 34 26 238 89 359 67 217 59 55 56 190 123 33 149 82 27 67 33 15 240 351 67 213 15 60 189 67 123 15 150 22 30 243 15 350 212 22 60 93 184 120 153 15 20 28 89 244 26 349 67 212 04 61 11 180 117 78 155 37 19 67 28 71 244 44 346 210 63 15 179 67 117 59 155 56 10 23 33 249 82 340 206 67 66 48 171 67 113 15 160 9 67 23 15 250 339 67 206 48 66 67 170 112 22 160 93 4 20 253 15 333 67 203 15 70 169 67 112 04 161 11 0 17 78 255 37 330 201 11 72 04 166 110 163 15 0 33 17 59 255 56 329 67 200 93 72 22 160 106 67 166 48 8 33 13 15 260 328 200 73 15 159 67 106 48 166 67 10 12 22 260 93 320 195 56 77 59 153 67 103 15 170 10 33 12 04 261 11 319 67 195 37 77 78 150 101 11 172 04 14 10 263 15 315 67 193 15 80 149 67 100 93 172 22 20 6 67 266 48 310 190 83 15 148 100 173 15 20 33 6 48 266 67 309 67 189 82 83 33 140 95 96 177 59 26 33 3 15 270 300 184 44 88 71 139 67 95 37 177 78 30 1 11 272 04 299 67 184 26 88 89 135 67 93 15 180 30 33 0 93 272 22 297 67 183 15 90 130 90 183 15 32 0 273 15 TABLEA 1 Temperature conversions Model 335 Temperature Controller 149 gAppendix B Handling Liquid Helium and Nitrogen B 1 General
88. 35 Temperature Controller Diode sensors include the silicon and the gallium aluminum arsenide sensors detailed in TABLE 4 6 Input ranges are selectable to O V to 2 5 V or O Vto10 V and standard excitation current is 10 pA As an alternative to the standard diode excitation current of 10 pA you may select a 1 mA excitation The 1 mA excitation current is not calibrated and will not work prop erly with standard Lake Shore diode sensors For protection against accidentally set ting the 1 mA excitation current the Diode Current setting is automatically set to 10 pA every time the Sensor Type is set to Diode Menu Navigation Input Setup nput A or B Sensor Type Diode Input Setup nput A or B Sensor Type Diode gt Range 2 5 V Silicon or 10 V GaAlAs Input Setup nput A or B Sensor Type Diode gt Ere Diode Current 10 pA or 1 mA Default Sensor Type Diode Range 2 5 V Silicon Diode Current 10 pA Interface Command INTYPE DIOCUR PTC resistor sensors include the platinum and rhodium iron sensors detailed in TABLE 4 6 More detailed specifications are provided in TABLE 1 2 The Model 335 supplies a 1 mA excitation current for the PTC resistor sensor type A resistance range selection is available in orderto achieve better reading resolution Autorange is enabled by default in order to provide the best possible reading resolution but it does not affect the sensor current excitation Refer to section 4
89. 5 7 952190 103 50 119 4 613650 347 50 12 9 813290 10 00 66 7 854690 106 50 120 5 040520 354 00 13 9 809180 10 85 67 7 755260 109 50 121 5 470960 360 50 14 9 804510 11 75 68 7 653960 112 50 122 5 938380 367 50 15 9 799510 12 65 69 7 550790 115 50 123 6 409870 374 50 16 9 793900 13 60 70 7 445790 118 50 124 6 885210 381 50 17 9 787610 14 60 71 7 338970 121 50 125 7 364360 388 50 18 9 780590 15 65 72 7 230370 124 50 126 7 881760 396 00 19 9 773150 16 70 73 7 120010 127 50 127 8 403380 403 50 20 9 764910 17 80 74 6 989110 131 00 128 8 928940 411 00 21 9 755820 18 95 75 6 855790 134 50 129 9 493760 419 00 22 9 746230 20 10 76 6 720200 138 00 130 10 0629 427 00 23 9 735700 21 30 77 6 582330 141 50 131 10 6361 435 00 24 9 724650 22 50 78 6 442220 145 00 132 11 2494 443 50 25 9 713080 23 70 79 6 299900 148 50 133 11 867 452 00 26 9 699960 25 00 80 6 155400 152 00 134 12 5253 461 00 27 9 686220 26 30 81 6 008740 155 50 135 13 188 470 00 28 9 671890 27 60 82 5 859960 159 00 136 13 892 479 50 29 9 655790 29 00 83 5 687430 163 00 137 14 6005 489 00 30 9 638980 30 40 84 5 512090 167 00 138 15 3507 499 00 31 9 621500 31 80 85 5 334130 171 00 139 16 1432 509 50 32 9 602020 33 30 86 5 153520 175 00 140 16 9403 520 00 33 9 581740 34 80 87 4 970330 179 00 141 17 7798 531 00 34 9 560710 36 30 88 4 784590 183 00 142 18 6624 542 50 35 9 537440 37 90 89 4 596330 187 00 143 19 5881 554 50 36 9 513290 39 50 90 4 405600 191 0
90. 6 RQS MSS of the status byte will be set This will send a service request SRQ interrupt message to the bus controller The user program may then direct the bus controller to serial poll the instruments on the busto identify which one requested service the one with bit 6 set in its status byte Serial polling will automatically clear RQS ofthe Status Byte Register This allows sub sequent serial polls to monitor bit 6 foran SRQ occurrence generated by other event types After a serial poll the same event or any event that uses the same Status Byte summary bit will not cause another SRQ unless the event register that caused the first SRQ has been cleared typically by a query ofthe event register The serial poll does not clear MSS The MSS bit stays set until all enabled Status Byte summary bits are cleared typically by a query ofthe associated event register section 6 2 6 4 The programming example in TABLE 6 4 initiates an SRQ when a command error is detected by the instrument 6 2 6 Status System Detail Status Byte Register and Service Request 99 Commandor Operation Description ESR Read and clear the Standard Event Status Register ESE 32 Enable the Command Error CME bit in the Standard Event Status Register SRE 32 Enable the Event Summary Bit ESB to set the RQS ABC Send improper command to instrument to generate a command error Monitor bus Monitorthe bus until the Service Request interrupt SRQ is sent
91. 68 3 53459 2 04 3 3 35346 37 2 36 3 40905 10 55 69 3 54157 1 92 4 3 35476 35 9 37 3 41134 10 10 70 3 54923 1 80 5 3 35612 34 6 38 3 41377 9 65 71 3 55775 1 68 6 3 35755 33 3 39 3 41606 9 25 72 3 56646 1 57 7 3 35894 32 1 40 3 41848 8 85 73 3 57616 1 46 8 3 36039 30 9 41 3 42105 8 45 74 3 58708 1 35 9 3 36192 29 7 42 3 42380 8 05 75 3 59830 1 25 10 3 36340 28 6 43 3 42637 7 70 76 3 61092 1 150 11 3 36495 27 5 44 3 42910 7 35 77 3 62451 1 055 12 3 36659 26 4 45 3 43202 7 00 78 3 63912 0 965 13 3 36831 25 3 46 3 43515 6 65 79 3 65489 0 880 14 3 37014 24 2 47 3 43853 6 30 80 3 67206 0 800 15 3 37191 23 2 48 3 44230 5 94 81 3 69095 0 725 16 3 37377 22 2 49 3 44593 5 62 82 3 71460 0 645 17 3 37575 21 2 50 3 44984 5 30 83 3 73889 0 575 18 3 37785 20 2 51 3 45355 5 02 84 3 76599 0 510 19 3 37942 19 50 52 3 45734 4 76 85 3 79703 0 448 20 3 38081 18 90 53 3 46180 4 48 86 3 83269 0 390 21 3 38226 18 30 54 3 46632 4 22 87 3 87369 0 336 22 3 38377 17 70 55 3 47012 4 02 88 3 92642 0 281 23 3 38522 17 15 56 3 47357 3 85 89 3 98609 0 233 24 3 38672 16 60 57 3 47726 3 68 90 4 05672 0 190 25 3 38829 16 05 58 3 48122 3 51 91 4 14042 0 153 26 3 38993 15 50 59 3 48524 3 35 92 4 24807 0 120 27 3 39165 14 95 60 3 48955 3 19 93 4 40832 0 088 28 3 39345 14 40 61 3 49421 3 03 94 4 57858 0 067 29 3 39516 13 90 62 3 49894 2 88 95 4 76196 0 055 30 3 39695 13 40 63 3 50406 2 73 96 4 79575 0 051 31 3 39882 12 90 64 3 50962 2 58 97 4 81870 0 050 32 3 40079 12 40 65 3 51528 244
92. 74 50 59 0 170179 265 50 93 6 781410 570 50 26 4 022170 78 50 60 0 041150 275 00 94 6 931500 577 00 27 3 950100 82 50 61 0 152699 280 00 95 7 001360 580 00 28 3 877360 86 50 62 0 163149 280 50 96 7 166710 587 00 29 3 803960 90 50 63 0 374937 290 00 97 7 260420 591 00 30 3 729910 94 50 64 0 542973 297 50 98 7 412010 597 50 31 3 655230 98 50 65 0 598604 300 00 99 7 529070 602 50 32 3 579930 102 50 66 0 774384 308 00 100 7 657460 608 00 33 3 504020 106 50 67 0 840638 311 00 101 7 704410 610 00 34 3 427530 110 50 68 1 126350 324 00 TABLE C 12 Chromel AuFe 0 07 thermocouple curve Model 335 Temperature Controller
93. Accuracy for the PT 102 PT 103 or PT 111 platinum sensor is as follows 250 mK 70Kto325K 500 mK 325 K to 1400 mK at 480 K DIN class A or class B tolerance TABLE 5 8 Three point SoftCal calibration accuracy for DT 470 SD 13 diode sensors Three point SoftCal calibrations are performed at liquid nitrogen 77 35 K room temperature 305 K and high temperature 480 K Accuracy for the PT 102 PT 103 or PT 111 platinum sensor is 250 mK from 70 K to 325 K and 250 mK from 325 Kto 480K Once the calibration data points have been obtained you may create a SoftCal cali bration To create a SoftCal calibration use this procedure 1 Press Curve Entry then scroll to SoftCal and press Enter 2 Alist of sensor types is displayed containing DT 470 PT 100 and PT 1000 Scroll to the desired sensor type and press Enter 3 Usethe Store Curve To prompt to choose the user curve location in which to store the newly generated curve 4 Ifdesired use the Serial Number parameter to enter a serial number for the newly generated curve 5 Usethe Point X Temp and Point X Sensor parameters to enter calibration data for point X where X can be point one two or three If only one or two data points were acquired only enter those data points and leave the others at their default values Review the acceptable temperature ranges for each calibration data point in FIGURE 5 9 and FIGURE 5 10 If a temperature value out
94. Baud rate 57 600 Data bits 7 Start bits 1 Stop bits 1 Parity Odd Flow control None Handshaking None TABLE 6 5 Host com port configuration The USB hardware connection uses the full speed 12 000 000 bits s profile of the USB 2 0 standard however since the interface uses a virtual serial com port at a fixed data rate the data throughput is still limited to a baud rate of 57 600 bits s The Model 335 USB driver has been made available through Windows Update This isthe recommended method for installing the driver as it will ensure that you always have the latest version ofthe driver installed If you are unable to install the driver from Windows Update refer to section 6 3 3 3 to install the driver from the web or from the disc provided with the Model 335 These procedures assume that you are logged into a user account that has adminis trator privileges 6 3 3 1 Installing the Driver From Windows Update in Windows Vista or Windows 7 1 Connectthe USB cable from the Model 335 to the computer 2 Turn on the Model 335 3 Whenthe Found New Hardware wizard appears select Locate and install driver software recommended 4 IfUserAccount Control UAC is enabled a UAC dialog box may appear asking if you wantto continue Click Continue 5 The Found New Hardware wizard should automatically connect to Windows Update and install the drivers 6 3 3 Installing the USB Driver 101 If the Found New Hardware wizard is unabl
95. CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation Model 335 Temperature Controller m Event Summary ESB Bit 5 this bit is set when an enabled standard event has occurred m Message Available MAV Bit 4 this bitis set when a message is available in the output buffer 6 2 6 2 Service Request Enable Register The Service Request Enable Register is programmed by the user and determines which summary bits of the Status Byte may set bit 6 RQS MSS to generate a Service Request Enable bits are logically ANDed with the corresponding summary bits FIGURE 6 4 Whenever a summary bit is set by an event register and its correspond ing enable bit is set by the user bit 6 will setto generate a service request The Service Request Enable command SRE programs the Service Request Enable Register and the query command SRE reads it From operation event register From standard event status register From operation event register Status byte register STB RQS Generate service request reset by serial poll Read by STB senice reques T T2 T4 2 TS esegue 28 ec sr pepe ps 2 2 anam SRE SRE Notused ese mav Not Not Not Not used used used used MSS FIGURE 6 4 Status byte register and service request enable register 6 2 6 3 Using Service Request SRQ and Serial Poll When a Status Byte summary bit or MAV bit is enabled by the Service Request Enable Register and goes from 0 to 1 bit
96. Commands 107 This section liststhe interface commands in alphabetical order Begins common interface command Required to identify queries String of alphanumeric characters with length n Send these strings using surrounding quotes Quotes enable characters such as commas and spaces to be used withoutthe instrument interpreting them as delimiters nn String of number characters that may include a decimal point Dotted decimal format common with IP addresses Always contains 4 dot separated 3 digit decimal numbers such as 192 168 000 012 term Terminator characters Indicates a parameter field many are command specific state Parameter field with only On Off or Enable Disable states Floating point values have varying resolution depending on the type of command or query issued s n dd lt value gt TABLE 6 7 Interface commands key Clear Interface Command cus term Clears the bits in the Status Byte Register Standard Event Status Register and Opera tion Event Register and terminates all pending operations Clears the interface but not the controller The related controller command is 3KRST Event Status Enable Register Command ESE bit weighting term nnn Each bit is assigned a bit weighting and represents the enable disable mask of the corresponding event flag bit in the Standard Event Status Register To enable an event flag bit send the co
97. Data 3 D Data 4 GND Ground TABLE 8 5 USB pin and connector details EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 140 CHAPTER 8 Service 8 10 1 IEEE 488 Connect to the IEEE 488 Interface connector on the Model 335 rear with cables spec Interface Connector ified in the IEEE 488 standard The cable has 24 conductors with an outer shield The connectors are 24 way Amphenol 57 Series or equivalent with piggyback recepta cles to allow daisy chaining in multiple device systems The connectors are secured in the receptacles by two captive locking screws with metric threads The total length of cable allowed in a system is 2 m for each device on the bus or 20m maximum The Model 335 can drive a bus of up to 10 devices A connector extender is required to use the IEEE 488 interface and relay terminal block at the same time FIGURE 8 7 shows the IEEE 488 interface connector pin location and signal names as viewed from the Model 335 rear panel FIGURE 8 7 IEEE 488 interface Peo 1 DIO1 Data input output line 1 2 DIO 2 Data input output line 2 3 DIO 3 Data input output line 3 4 DIO 4 Data input output line 4 5 EOI End or identify 6 DAV Data valid 7 NRFD Not ready for data 8 NDAC No data accepted 9 IFC Interface clear 10 SRQ Service request 11 ATN Attention 12 SHIELD Cable shield 13 DIOS Data input output line 5 14 DIO6 Data input output line 6 15 DIO7 Data input
98. EATRRT AAE OORD PATARA 86 5 11 6 Hardware Differences i 87 5 11 7 Emulation Mode Differences eene 87 suu erii PHIL I 89 6 2 JEEE 488 IriterfaCe iaia ai 89 6 2 1 Changing IEEE 488 Interface Parameters ccc eeee cece ence rre 90 6 2 2 Remote Local Operation ccc cece cece eee eee emen 90 6 2 3 IEEE 488 2 Command Structure i 90 6 2 3 1 Bus Control Commands cece cece cece eee eee 90 6 2 3 2 Common CommandS cece cece e eee e eee eee 91 6 2 3 3 Device Specific Commands 0 cece cece e eee eee eee e eens 91 6 2 3 4 MESSAGE STINGS ici stia beo ab ides Cue C id e Re tesa hele 91 6 2 4 Status System Overview nnn 92 6 2 4 1 Condition Registers cece cece eee e eee ee een eee teens 92 6 2 4 2 EVenERSGEISters i i besserer tpes Ue vy rte Re PERIERE RR Ln ned 92 6 2 4 3 Enable Registers e 92 6 2 4 4 Status Byte Register ee eee iridna e enna 94 6 2 4 5 Service Request Enable Register cece ee eee teens 94 6 2 4 6 Reading Registers cece cence eee eme 94 Chapter 7 Options and Accessories Chapter 8 Service 6 3 6 4 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 9 7 6 7 7 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 6 2 4 7 Programming Registers cece e ete e tent ees 94 6 2 4 8 Clearing Registers iss 95 6 2 5 Status System Detail Status Register Se
99. EEE 488 Interface Parameters 6 2 2 Remote Local Operation 6 2 3 IEEE 488 2 Command Structure Model 335 Temperature Controller The IEEE 488 address must be set from the front panel before communication with the instrument can be established Menu Navigation Interface EnabledIEEE 488 Interface IEEE 488 Address 1 to 31 Default IEEE 488 Normal operations from the keypad are referred to as local operations The Model 335 can also be configured for remote operations via the IEEE 488 interface or the Remote Local key The Remote Local key will toggle between remote and local operation During remote operations the remote annunciator LED will be illumi nated and operations from the keypad will be disabled The Model 335 supports several command types These commands are divided into four groups 1 BusControl section 6 2 3 1 a Universal m Uniline m Multiline b Addressed bus control 2 Common section 6 2 3 2 3 Device Specific section 6 2 3 3 4 Message Strings section 6 2 3 4 6 2 3 1 Bus Control Commands A buscontrol command can either be a universal or an addressed bus control A uni versal command addresses all devices on the bus Universal commands include uni line and multiline commands A uniline command message asserts only a single signal line The Model 335 recognizes two of these messages from the Bus Controller Remote REN and Interface Clear IFC The Model 335 sends one uniline command
100. F 800 O K 325 Positive 0 0010 Carbon Glass CGR 1 1000 log Q K 325 Negative 0 00001 log Q Cernox CX 1050 log Q K 325 Negative 0 00001 log Q Germanium GR 200A 100 log Q K 325 Negative 0 00001 log Q Rox RX 102A log Q K 40 Negative 0 00001 log Q Type K 9006 005 mV K 1500 Positive 0 0001 mV Type E 9006 003 mV K 930 Positive 0 0001 mV TypeT 9006 007 mV K 673 Positive 0 0001 mV Au Fe 0 03 A mV K 500 Positive 0 0001 mV Au Fe 0 07 9006 001 mV K 610 Positive 0 0001 mV Not offered by Lake Shore TABLE 5 4 Typical curve parameters Setting resolution is also six digits in sensor units The curve format parameter defines the range and resolution in sensor units as shown in TABLE 5 3 The sensor type determines the practical setting resolution TABLE 5 4 lists recommended sen sor units resolutions The breakpoints should be entered with the sensorunits value increasing as point number increases There should not be any breakpoint locations left blank in the mid dle of a curve The search routine in the Model 335 interprets a blank breakpoint as the end ofthe curve There are four operations associated with front panel curve entry Edit Curve Erase Curve Copy Curve and SoftCal as detailed in TABLE 5 5 Edit allows the user to view any curve and enter or edit a curve at any Edit Curve 5 9 1 user curve location Standard curves cannot be changed Erase allows the user to delete a curve from any user curve
101. HAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation 6 3 USB Interface 6 3 1 Physical Connection 6 3 2 Hardware Support 6 3 3 Installing the USB Driver Model 335 Temperature Controller The Model 335 USB interface provides a convenient way to connect to most modern computers as a USB interface is provided on nearly all new PCs as ofthe writing of this manual The USB interface is implemented as a virtual serial com port connec tion This implementation provides a simple migration path for modifying existing RS 232 based remote interface software It also provides a simpler means of commu nicating than a standard USB implementation The Model 335 has a B type USB connector on the rear panel This is the standard connector used on USB peripheral devices and it allows the common USB A type to B type cable to be used to connect the Model 335 to a host PC The pin assignments for A type and B type connectors are shown in section 8 10 The maximum length ofa USB cable as defined by the USB 2 0 standard is 5 m 16 4 ft This length can be extended using USB hubs every 5 m 16 4 ft up to 5 times for a maximum total length of 30 m 98 4 ft The USB interface emulates an RS 232 serial port ata fixed 57 600 baud rate but with the physical connections of a USB This programming interface requires a cer tain configuration to communicate properly with the Model 335 The proper configu ration parameters are listed in TABLE 6 5
102. In this mode the output is limited to 10 V and 100 mA As with the current source mode both limits are in place atthe same time and the same equations can be used to determine the maximum power EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 20 CHAPTER 2 Cooling System Design and Temperature Control 2 5 2 Heater Location 2 5 3 Heater Types Model 335 Temperature Controller Example 1 A 20 O heater is connected to output 1 and the heater resistance setting is setto 25 O which can provide up to 1 41 A of current and up to 50 V Current limit Voltage limit P I2R P V2 R P 1 41 A x 20 Q P 50 V 2 20 Q P 40W P 125W The power limit is the smaller of the two or 40 W limited by current Example 2 A 60 Q heater is connected to Output 2 in current mode and the heater resistance setting is set to 50 O which can provide up to 0 71 A of current and up to 35 4 V Current limit Voltage limit P I2R P V2 R P 0 71 A 2 x 60 Q P 35 4 V 2 60 Q P 42 6 W P 20 9W The power limit is the smaller of the two or 20 9 W limited by voltage Example 3 A 50 Q heater is connected to Output 2 in voltage mode The maximum voltage for Output 2 in voltage mode is 10 V and the maximum current is 100 mA Current limit Voltage limit P I2R P V2 R P 0 1 A x 50 Q P 10 V 2 50 Q P 0 5W P 2W The power limit is the smaller of the two or 0 5 W limited by current It is possible to choose a heater value that results in a
103. K at 0 output 0 0 V Use the OUTMODE command to set the output mode to Monitor Out The input parameter in the ANALOG command is the same as the input parameter in the OUT MODE command It is included in the ANALOG command for backward compatibility with previous Lake Shore temperature monitors and controllers The ANALOG com mand name is also named as such for backward compatibility Monitor Out Parameter Query ANALOG output term n lt input gt lt units gt lt high value gt lt low value polarity term n n tnnnnn tnnnnn n refer to command for definition Autotune Command ATUNE lt output gt lt mode gt term n n lt output gt Specifies the output associated with the loop to be Autotuned 1 or 2 lt mode gt Specifies the Autotune mode Valid entries O P Only 1 P and l 2 P l andD ATUNE 2 1 term initiates Autotuning of control loop associated with output 2 in P and mode If initial conditions required to Autotune the specified loop are not met an Autotune initialization error will occur and the Autotune process will not be performed The TUNEST query can be used to check if an Autotune error occurred Display Brightness Command BRIGT brightness value term n brightness value 0 3 Sets the display brightness for the front panel display 022596 125096 227526 3 100276 E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 112 BRIGT Input Returned Format CRDG Input Form
104. Max Current and Heater Resistance settings Output 1 Upto 50W 50W 25W Current A 2500r500Q Output 2 Upto25W Output 1 Current Upto75W 250 75W 1W Output 2 Voltage 1W 1000 TABLE 4 10 Heater output configurations Menu Navigation Output Setup gt Output 2Voltage gt Eire Output Setup Output 1 Eres Max Current 0 1 Ato 1 732 A Default Current Interface HTRSET 4 5 1 3 Max Current and Heater Resistance The Model 335 heater outputs are designed to work optimally into a 25 Oor 50 0 heater The Heater Resistance and Max Current parameters work together to limit the maximum available power into the heater This is useful for preventing heater dam age or limiting the maximum heater power into the system When using a 25 O or 50 O heater set the Heater Resistance parameter accordingly The Max Current set E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 56 CHAPTER 4 Operation Model 335 Temperature Controller ting will then provide multiple discrete current limit values that correspond to com mon heater power ratings The available current limits keep the output operating within the voltage compliance limitto ensure the best possible resolution These parameters work with the Heater Range parameter section 4 5 1 7 8 to provide safety and flexibility If you are not using a standard heater resistance set the Heater Resistance setting to 25 Q for any resistance less than 50 Q orto 50 Q for any higher heater r
105. Microsoft Windows the com port number can be checked using Device Manager under Ports COM amp LPT 3 Checkthatthe correct settings are being used for communication Refer to section 6 3 3 for details on installing the USB driver 4 Checkcable connections and length 5 Sendthe message terminator 6 Send entire message string at one time including the terminator Many terminal emulation programs do not 7 Send only one simple command ata time until communication is established 8 Besureto spell commands correctly and use proper syntax 8 2 2 Existing 1 Powerthe instrument off then on again to see if itis a soft failure Installation No Longer 2 Powerthe computer off then on again to see if communication port is locked up ki 3 Checkallthe cable connections Working 4 Checkthatthe com port assignment has not been changed In Microsoft Windows the com port number can be checked using Device Manager under Ports COM amp LPT 5 Check that the USB driver is installed properly and that the device is functioning In Microsoft Windows the device status can be checked using Device Manager by right clicking Lake Shore Model 335 Temperature Controller under Ports COM amp LPT or Other Devices and then clicking Properties 8 2 3 Intermittent 1 Check cable connections and length Lockups 2 Increase delay between all commands to 100 ms to make sure the instrument is not being overloaded 3 Ensure that the USB cable is not
106. PM SSaEES cia ivan bh de end Oben rate Dex ve hoon senses 137 Calibration Procedure eee enn 137 E akeShore www lakeshore com Model 335 Temperature Controller 8 10 Rear Panel Connector Definition LL 138 8 10 1 IEEE 488 Interface Connector eee 140 8 11 Electrostatic Discharge cee ce cece tidur EETA KIDE ETENE EAA AAN 141 8 11 1 Identification of Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Components 141 8 11 2 Handling Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Components 141 8 12 Model 3060 Installation cece cece cece e cent een e eens 141 8 13 Firmware Updates ila raro EARE 143 8 13 1 Updating the Firmware ii 143 8 14 Technical Inquiries ssas reo t EET RT e vU a REC CE 144 8 14 1 Contacting Lake Shore n 144 8 14 2 Return of Equipment eee e eee 144 8 14 3 RMA Valid Period ee eee 144 8 14 4 Shipping ChargeS menn 145 8 14 5 Restocking FEE i e eerte rere xxr Hy EEREN ee ue eras 145 1 1 ProductDescription 1 Chapter 1 Introduction 335 Temperature Controller Remote Alarm InputSetup OutputSetup DisplaySetup Curve Entry Interface Remote Local DOD I RampRate ZoneSettings Autotune Alarm Relays Max MinReset WVDHYDDOIDVDYYD cu 1 1 Product Description FIGURE 1 1 Model 335 front view Features m Operates down to 300 mK with appropriate NTC RTD sensors Two sensor inputs
107. Provides a baseline for mo 4 after returning setpoint to or the new control parameters are caus Use a smaller initial P value su subsequent stages ne Pech original value ing instability in the control Ensures that there is no temperature ais f i p System response is too slow to Autotune zs oscillation or excessive noise in the ee 5 Testing for temperature stability orthe new control parameters are Use a smaller initial P value temperature reading after control gar PERL f causing instability in the control parameter adjustment Observing system response to Control parameters are changed again System response is too slow to Autotune If not already using High 6 setpoint change using new con based on observation this is the final or the heater is too underpowered forthe range increase initial trol parameters stage of P only Autotuning system to Autotune heater range Waiting for temperature to settle System response is too slow to Autotune m Provides a baseline for subsequent TE 7 after returning setpoint to origi ave or the new control parameters are caus Use a smaller initial P value nal value 8 ing instability in the control Ensures that there is no temperature lis h pe System response is too slow to Autotune s oscillation or excessive noise in the tem torni 8 Testing for temperature stability or the new control parameters are caus Use a smaller initial P value perature reading after control parameter Baa
108. User s Manual Model 335 Temperature Controller 335 Temperature Controller Remote Alarm we InputSetup OutputSetup DisplaySetup Curve Entry Interface Remote Local raw x QD GO CO CO GD i 18 28 i RampRate ZoneSettings Autotune Alarm Relays Max Min Reset 7 mme Lake Shore Cryotronics Inc sales lakeshore com 575 McCorkle Blvd service lakeshore com Fax 614 891 1392 Westerville Ohio 43082 8888 USA www lakeshore com Telephone 614 891 2243 Methods and apparatus disclosed and described herein have been developed solely on company funds of Lake Shore Cryotronics Inc No government or other contractual support or relationship whatsoever has existed which in any way affects or mitigates proprietary rights of Lake Shore Cryotronics Inc in these developments Methods and apparatus disclosed herein may be subject to U S Patents existing or applied for Lake Shore Cryotronics Inc reserves the right to add improve modify or withdraw functions design modifications or products at any time without notice Lake Shore shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with furnishing performance or use ofthis material Rev 1 2 P N 119 055 04 October 2012 EL akeShore www lakeshore com LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT WARRANTY PERIOD THREE 3 YEARS 1 Lake Shore warrants that products manufactured by Lake Shore the Product will be free
109. V Voltage higher than 50 V poses a shock hazard and should only be used if operator safety can be assured by the installer Voltage lower than 10 V becomes impractical because the current necessary to provide any meaningful power is too high for most cryogenic wiring B Output power there is no limit to the maximum power ofthe supply Typical warm up applications normally range between 25 W and 200 W E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 38 CHAPTER 3 Installation Model 335 Temperature Controller 3 7 5 2 Power Supply Setup Follow all operation and safety instruction in the power supply manual during setup Please consider the following suggestions for protecting the power supply and heater load B Short circuits are common in cryogenic lead wiring If the power supply does not specify that it is short circuit protected the power output should be wired with a fuse in series to prevent damage W Unipolar power supplies are designed to use a positive programming voltage and some can be damaged ifthe programming voltage is negative Be careful when wiring the system to maintain the correct polarity Never set the control output ofthe Model 335 to bipolar mode when using a unipolar power supply B Some power supplies can be damaged if there is a programming voltage present at their input when they are turned off This can happen if the Model 335 and power supply use a different source ofline powerorare turned on and off individ ually It can b
110. a tion and click Next 4 An Extraction complete message will be displayed Click to clear the Show extracted files checkbox and click Finish 6 3 3 3 3 Manually install the driver Manually installing drivers differ between versions of Windows The following sections describe how to manually install the driver using Windows Vista Windows 7 and XP To install the driver you must be logged into a user account that has administrator privileges For Windows Vista or Windows 7 1 Connectthe USB cable from the Model 335 to the computer 2 Turn on the Model 335 3 Ifthe Found New Hardware wizard appears click Ask me again later 4 Open Device Manager Usethis procedure to open Device Manager a Clickthe Windows Start button and type Device Manager in the Start Search box b Click on the Device Manager link in the Search Results Under Programs dialog box c IfUserAccount Control is enabled click Continue on the User Account Control prompt eal Click View and ensure the Devices by Type check box is selected In the main window of Device Manager locate Other Devices in the list of device types In many instances this will be between Network adapters and Ports COM amp LPT If the Other Devices item is not already expanded click the icon Lake Shore Model 335 should appear indented underneath Other Devices If it is not displayed as Lake Shore Model 335 it might be displayed as USB Device If neither are displayed cli
111. a manner adequate to preserve and protect such goods where it is shipped by someone otherthan a carrier hired by Lake Shore 9 Lake Shore disclaims any warranties oftechnological value or of non infringement with respect to the Product and Lake Shore shall have no duty to defend indemnify or hold harmless you from and against any or all damages or costs incurred by you arising from the infringement of patents or trademarks or violation or copyrights by the Product 10 THIS WARRANTY IS NOT TRANSFERRABLE This warranty is not transferrable 11 Except to the extent prohibited by applicable law neither Lake Shore nor any of its subsidiaries affiliates or suppliers will be held lia ble for direct special incidental consequential or other damages including lost profit lost data or downtime costs arising out ofthe use inability to use or result of use ofthe product whether based in warranty contract tort or other legal theory regardless whether or not Lake Shore has been advised ofthe possibility of such damages Purchaser s use of the Product is entirely at Purchaser s risk Some countries states and provinces do not allow the exclusion of liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation may not apply to you 12 This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary within or between jurisdictions where the productis purchased and or used Some jurisdictions do
112. ack temperatures to generate the proportional contribution to the output Output P Pe If proportional is acting alone with no integral there must always be an error or the output will go to O A great deal must be known about the load sensor and controller to compute a proportional setting P Most often the proportional setting is deter mined by trial and error The proportional setting is part ofthe overall control loop gain as are the heater range and cooling power The proportional setting needs to change if either of these change The integral term also called reset looks at error overtime to build the integral con tribution to the output Output I PI e dt By adding the integral to proportional contributions the error that is necessary in a proportional only system can be eliminated When the error is at 0 controlling at the setpoint the output is held constant by the integral contribution The integral setting I is more predictable than the gain setting It is related to the dominant time con stant of the load As discussed in section 2 8 3 measuring this time constant allows a reasonable calculation of the integral setting In the Model 335 the integral term is not set in seconds like some other systems The integral setting can be derived by dividing 1000 by the integral seconds Isetting 1000 seconds The derivative term also called rate acts on the change in error with time to make its contribution t
113. ad this entire chapter before installing the instrument and powering iton to ensure the best possible performance and maintain operator safety For instrument operating instructions referto Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 For computer interface installation and operation refer to Chapter 6 Inspect shipping containers for external damage before opening them Photograph any containerthat has significant damage before opening it Inspect all items for both visible and hidden damage that occurred during shipment If there is visible damage to the contents ofthe container contact the shipping company and Lake Shore immediately preferably within five days of receipt of goods for instruc tions on how to file a proper insurance claim Lake Shore products are insured against damage during shipment but a timely claim must be filed before Lake Shore will take further action Procedures vary slightly with shipping companies Keep all damaged shipping materials and contents until instructed to either return or discard them Open the shipping container and keep the container and shipping materials until all contents have been accounted for Check off each item on the packing list as it is unpacked Instruments themselves may be shipped as several parts The items included with the Model 335 are listed below Contact Lake Shore immediately if there is a shortage of parts or accessories Lake Shore is not responsible for any miss ing items if they have not been notifie
114. ails A list of accessories available for the Model 335 is as follows 106 009 T Description of Accessories Heater output connector dual banana jack G 106 233 Sensor input mating connector 6 pin DIN plug two included G 106 735 Terminal block 8 pin MAN 335 1 Model 335 user manual 112 177 Sensor heater cable assembly 10 Feet Cable assembly for two diode resistor sensors and 2 heater outputs Approximately 3 m 10 ft long Refer to FIGURE 7 1 112 178 Sensor heater cable assembly 20 Feet Cable assembly for two diode resistor sensors and two heater outputs Approximately 6 m 20 ft long Refer to FIGURE 7 1 3003 Heater output conditioner The heater output conditioner is a passive filter that further reduces the already low heater output noise of the Model 335 Refer to section 7 7 and see FIGURE 7 3 6201 1m 3 3 ft long IEEE 488 computer interface cable assembly 8001 335 CalCurve factory installed the breakpoint table from a calibrated sensor stored in the instrument CAL 335 CERTt Instrument recalibration with certificate CAL 335 DATAT Instrument recalibration with certificate and data TABLE 7 4 Accessories EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 128 CHAPTER 7 Options and Accessories ES 2 20 Description of Accessories Stycast epoxy 2850 FT Catalyst 9 20 packets 2 g each Stycast is a common highly versa tile nonconductiv
115. akeshore com 96 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation Model 335 Temperature Controller Standard event Status register ESR ESR reads and clears the register To event summary Standardevent 7 6 5 4 3 2 41 0 Bit bit ESB of status sotsenablerse Til ef ast 4 212 E 2 row sea cme exe oes ove usea Pc FIGURE 6 2 Standard event status register Name 6 2 5 2 Operation Event Register Set The Operation Event Register reports the interface related instrument events listed below Any or all of these events may be reported in the operation event summary bit through the enable register FIGURE 6 3 The Operation Event Enable command OPSTE programs the enable register and the query command OPSTE reads it OPSTR reads and clears the Operation Event Register OPST reads the Operation Condition register The used bits of the Operation Event Register are described as fol lows m Processor Communication Error COM Bit 7 this bit is set when the main pro cessor cannot communicate with the sensor input processor m Calibration Error CAL Bit 6 this bit is set if the instrument is not calibrated or the calibration data has been corrupted m Autotune Done ATUNE Bit 5 this bit is set when the Autotuning algorithm is NOT active m New Sensor Reading NRDG Bit 4 this bit is set when there is anew sensor reading m Loop 1 Ramp Done RAMP1 Bit 3 this bit is set when a loop 1 setpoint
116. al on relay remains in the active state AAlarm Relay will follow Input A alarms Both Alarms Relay active when eitherthe High or Low Alarm is active Low Alarms Relay active only when the Low Alarm is active High Alarms Relay active only when the High Alarm is active BAlarm Relay willfollow Input B alarms Both Alarms Relay active when eitherthe High or Low Alarm is active Low Alarms Relay active only when the Low Alarm is active High Alarms Relay active only when the High Alarm is active FIGURE 5 7 Relay settings When using relays with alarm operation set up alarms first The relays are rated for 30 VDC and 3 A Their terminals are in the detachable terminal block on the Model 335 rear panel In the Off mode the relay is un energized leaving the normally open NO contacts open and the normally closed NC contacts closed In the On mode the relay is ener gized so the NO contacts will be closed and the NC contacts will be open In the Alarm mode the relay will activate based on the state ofthe configured Alarm Input sensor When the Alarm to Follow parameter is set to Low the relay will energize if the con figured Alarm Input sensor goes into a low alarm state If it is set to High the relay will energize ifthe configured Alarm Input sensor goes into a high alarm state If the Alarm to Follow parameter is set to Both the relay will energize ifthe configured Alarm Input sensor goes into either a low alarm or a high alarm state Menu Nav
117. al that have been fitted to the data and two tables of data points to be used as interpolation tables Both interpolation tables are opti mized to allow accurate temperature conversion The smaller table called a break point interpolation table is sized to fit into instruments like the Model 335 where it is called a temperature response curve Itisimportant to look at instrument specifications before ordering calibrated sen sors A calibrated sensor is required when a sensor does not follow a standard curve and you wish to display in temperature Otherwise the Model 335 will operate in sen sor units like ohms or volts The Model 335 may not work over the full temperature range of some sensors The standard inputs are limited to operation above 300 mK even with sensors that can be calibrated to 20 mK SoftCal is a good solution for applications that do not require the accuracy of a pre cision calibration The SoftCal algorithm uses the well behaved nature of sensors that follow a standard curve to improve the accuracy of individual sensors A few known temperature points are required to perform SoftCal The Model 335 can also perform a SoftCal calibration You must provide one two or three known tempera ture reference points The range and accuracy of the calibration is based on these points section 5 9 Lake Shore offers two or three point SoftCal calibrated sensors that include both the large interpolation table and the sm
118. aller breakpoint interpolation table for 400 Series diodes and platinum sensors Some types of sensors behave in a very predictable manner and a standard tempera ture response curve can be created for them Standard curves are a convenient and inexpensive way to get reasonable temperature accuracy Sensors that have a stan dard curve are often used when interchangeability is important Some individual sen sors are selected for their ability to match a published standard curve but in general these sensors do not provide the accuracy of a calibrated sensor For convenience the Model 335 has several standard curves included in firmware Lake Shore provides a software application called Curve Handler which makes loading temperature curves into the Model 335 a very simple process The program can copy curves from properly formatted files into the Model 335 user curve loca tions You can use itto read curves from the Model 335 and save them to files A CD is provided with Lake Shore calibrated sensors that contains all the proper formats to load curves using the Curve Handler software program EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 16 CHAPTER 2 Cooling System Design and Temperature Control 2 4 Sensor Installation 2 4 1 Mounting Materials 2 4 2 Sensor Location 2 4 3 Thermal Conductivity Model 335 Temperature Controller The Curve Handler application is a 32 bit Microsoft Windows application that must be installed on a Windows PC
119. and units A Sensor input A B Sensor input B K Temperature in kelvin C Temperature in degrees Celsius V Sensor units of volts Q Sensor units ofohms kQ Sensor units of kilohms H Sensor units of millivolts TABLE 4 5 Display annunciators There are five basic keypad operations direct operation menu navigation Number Entry Alpha Numeric Entry and setting selection Direct operation the key function occurs as soon as the key is pressed these include the Setpoint P I D Manual Out Heater Range and All Off keys Menu Navigation each menu has a set of configurable parameters Menus that apply to multiple entities for example Input Setup could apply to Input A or B have a first level selection to determine which entity to configure Once the first level selection is made the first menu parameter is displayed The parameter label is displayed on the top line and the current value of the parameter is dis played on the bottom line The type of setting mode for any given parameter depends on the type of parameter highlighted The possible setting modes are Number Entry Alpha Numeric Entry and Setting Selection Refer to the respec tive entry mode descriptions below During menu navigation pressing Enter will immediately store the new parameter value Pressing Escape Exit Menu will perform the Exit Menu function and will not cancel any previous setting changes Number Entry allows you to enter nu
120. as possible so the system can cool quickly and improve cycle time Small mass can also havethe advantage of reduced thermal gradients Controlling a very small mass is difficult because there is no buffer to absorb small changes in the system Without buffering small disturbances can very quickly create large temperature changes In some systems it is necessary to add a small amount of thermal mass such as a copper block in orderto improve control stability Because of nonlinearities a system controlling well at one temperature may not con trol well atanothertemperature While nonlinearities exist in all temperature control systems they are most evident at cryogenic temperatures When the operating tem perature changes the behavior ofthe control loop the controller must be retuned As an example a thermal mass acts differently at different temperatures The specific heatofthe load material is a majorfactor in thermal mass The specific heat of materials like copper change as much asthree orders of magnitude when cooled from 100 K to 10K Changes in cooling power and sensor sensitivity are also sources of nonlinearity The cooling power of most cooling sources also changes with load temperature This is very important when operating at temperatures nearthe highest or lowest temper ature that a system can reach Nonlinearities within a few degrees of these high and low temperatures make it very difficult to configure them for stable control If d
121. at Returned Format Remarks CRVDEL Input Format Example CRVHDR Input Format Remarks Example CRVHDR Input Format Returned Format Model 335 Temperature Controller CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation Display Brightness Query BRIGT term brightness value term n refer to command for description Celsius Reading Query CRDG input term a input Aor B temp value term tnnnnnn Also see the RDGST query Curve Delete Command CRVDEL lt curve gt term nn lt curve gt Specifies a user curve to delete Valid entries 21 59 CRVDEL21 term deletes User Curve 21 Curve Header Command CRVHDR lt curve gt lt name gt lt SN gt lt format gt lt limit value gt lt coeffi cient gt term nn s 15 s 10 n nnn nnn n curve Specifies which curve to configure Valid entries 21 59 name Specifies curve name Limited to 15 characters SN Specifies the curve serial number Limited to ten characters format Specifies the curve data format Valid entries 1 mV K 2 V K 3 Q K 4 log Q K limit value gt Specifies the curve temperature limit in kelvin coefficient Specifies the curves temperature coefficient Valid entries 1 negative 2 positive Configures the user curve header The coefficient parameter will be calculated auto matically based on the first two curve datapoints It is included as a parameterfor compatability with the CRVHDR q
122. ations complete However the commands operate with two distinct methods The OPC command is used in conjunction with bit O OPC ofthe Standard Event Sta tus Register If DPC is sent asthe last command in a command sequence bit O will be set when the instrument completes the operation that was initiated by the command sequence Additional commands may be sent between the instrument and the bus controller while waiting forthe initial pending operation to complete Atypical use of this function would be to enable the OPC bitto generate an SRQ and include the OPC command when programming the instrument The bus controller could then be instructed to look for an SRQ allowing additional communication with the instru ment while the initial process executes The OPC query has no interaction with bit O OPC ofthe Standard Event Status Reg ister If the DPC query is sent at the end of a command sequence the bus will be held until the instrument completes the operation that was initiated by the com mand sequence Additional commands except RST should not be sent until the operation is complete as erratic operation will occur Once the sequence is complete a 1 will be placed in the output buffer This function is typically used to signal a com pleted operation without monitoring the SRQ It is also used when it is important to prevent any additional communication on the bus during a pending operation E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 100 C
123. ative rate 1 to 200 with 1 resolution Manual output 0 to 100 with 0 01 setting resolution Zone control 10 temperature zones with P I D manual heater out heater range control channel ramp rate Setpoint ramping 0 1 K min to 100 K min Model 335 Temperature Controller 1 3 4 Control 9 Type Variable DC current source Control modes Closed loop digital PID with manual output or open loop D Aresolution 16 bit 25 Q setting 50 Q setting Max power 75 W SOW 50W Max current 173A 141A 1A Voltage compliance min 43 3V 35 4V 50V Heater load for max power 250 250 500 Heater load range 10 O to1000 Ranges 3 decade steps in power Heater noise 0 12 pA RMS dominated by line frequency and its harmonics Heater connector Dual banana Grounding Output referenced to chassis ground Safety limits Curve temperature power up heater off short circuit protection 75 W only available when Output 2 is in voltage mode TABLE 1 5 Output 1 Type Current mode Variable DC current source or voltage source Voltage mode Control modes Closed loop digital PID with Closed loop digital PID with manual output zone open loop manual output zone open loop warm up monitor out D Aresolution 15 bit 16 bit bipolar 15 bit unipolar 25 Q setting 50 setting N A Max power 25W 25W 1w Max current 1A 0 71A 100 mA Voltage compliance min 25V 35
124. ature reaches the setpoint Then the output will turn off 0 V until the temperature falls 1 K below the setpoint at which point the Warm Up Percentage voltage is again applied to the output The Heater Range will never be automatically set to Off in this mode Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 2 0utput Type Voltage Output Mode Warm Up Supply gt Control Input A B ses Warmup Control Continuous Default Continuous Interface Command WARMUP In Monitor Out mode the voltage output Output 2 tracks the assigned Control Input according to the scaling parameters you entered Acommon use for this function would be to send a voltage proportional to temperature to a data acquisition system The Control Input parameter setting determines which sensor input is tracked by the output The remaining parameters detailed in this section dictate how the output value is determined An output configured to Monitor Out mode is not affected by the ALL OFF key as it does not have a Heater Range setting and by design is always enabled Menu Navigation Output Setup gt Output 2 Output Type Voltage Output Mode Monitor Out Control Input None Input A Input B Default Control Input2None Interface Command OUTMODE 5 6 1 Monitor Units 5 6 1 MonitorUnits 73 The Monitor Units parameter determines the units of the Control Input sensor to use for creating the proportional voltage output The Monitor Out scaling parameter set ting
125. ay not reach the output voltage setting due to internal overload protection For a programming input range of 0 V to5 V rec ommended values are R1 R2 2000 Fora programming input range of OV to1 V recommended values are R1 500 Q R2 4500 Exact resistor value type and tol erance are generally not important for this application Model 335 Power supply Output 2 voltage mode R2 Program input R1 Output 2 Program input voltage mode FIGURE 3 10 Voltage divider circuit for Output 2 voltage mode EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 40 CHAPTER 3 Installation Model 335 Temperature Controller 4 1 General 41 Chapter 4 Operation 4 1 General This chapter provides instructions forthe general operating features of the Model 335 temperature controller Advanced operation is in Chapter 5 Computer interface instructions are in Chapter 6 LED Direct annunciators operation LakeShore 335 Temperature Controller g CA SETPOINT InputSetup OutputSetup DisplaySetup CurveEntry Interface Remote Local REN ve sx OOOO O RampRate ZoneSettings Autotune Alarm Relays Max MinReset a 18 2 Ce CD D qua Menu LED number pad annunciators FIGURE 4 1 Model 335 front panel 4 1 1 Understanding This section isintended to be a quick guide through the necessary key presses to Menu Navigation arrive at and set the desired features Each feature that is discussed in this chapter will include a
126. bon Glass CGR 1 2000 2 Kto 325 K2 T gt 2K amp B lt 19T Rox RX 102 0 3 K to 40 K3 T gt 2K amp B lt 10T Rox RX 103 1 4Kto40K T gt 2K amp BS10T Rox RX 202 0 3 K to 40 K3 T gt 2K amp BS10T Thermocouples Type K 9006 006 3 2 Kto 1505 K Not recommended 3060 TypeE 9006 004 3 2 K to 934 K Not recommended Chromel AuFe 0 07 9006 002 1 2 Kto 610 K Not recommended 1 Non HT version maximum temperature 325 K 2 Low temperature limited by input resistance range 3 Low temperature specified with self heating error lt 5 mK TABLE 1 1 Sensor temperature range EL akeShore www lakeshore com 6 CHAPTER 1 Introduction Temperature Accuracy including Electronic Accuracy CalCurve and Calibrated Sensor Electronic Control Stability5 Temperature Equivalents Electronic Accuracy Temperature Equivalents Measurement Resolution Temperature Equivalents Nominal Resistance Voltage Example Typical Sensor Sensitivity Lake Shore Sensor Temperature 14K 1664V 1249mV K 13 mK 25 mK 1 6 mK SITE End 77K 1 028V 1 73 mV K 5 8 mK 76mK 98mK 11 6 mK n 300K 0 5597V 2 3 mV K 4 4mK 47 mK 79 mK 18 8 mK 500K 0 0907V 2 12mV K 4 7 mK 40 mK 90 mK 19 4 mK Drayospas 54K 16981V 131mV K 0 8 mK 13 mK 325mK 16mK sliesmbibde Wan 77K 1 0203V 192mv K 5 2 mK 69 mK 91 mK 10 4 mK calibration 300K 0 5189V 2 4 mV K 4 2 mK
127. by the control input tempera ture curve s Setpoint Limit When controlling in sensor units the setpoint is limited by the limits of the configured control sensor Default 0 0000 K Interface Command SETP 4 5 1 HeaterOutputs 63 4 5 1 7 7 Setpoint Ramping The Model 335 can generate a smooth setpoint ramp when the setpoint units are expressed in temperature You can set a ramp rate in degrees per minute with a range of Oto 100 and a resolution of 0 1 Once the ramping feature is turned on its action is initiated by a setpoint change When a new setpoint is entered the instrument changes the setpoint temperature from the old value to the new value at the ramp rate A positive ramp rate is always entered it is used by the instrument to ramp either up or down in temperature Always use the ramping feature to minimize temperature overshoot and undershoot When ramping is not used a setpoint change can cause the error used by the PID equation to become very large which causes the contribution ofthe control output equation to become larger the longerthe error exists This will result in a large over shoot or undershoot once the setpoint temperature is reached since the I contribu tion will only decrease when the error polarity is reversed Using a ramp rate that keeps the control output from reaching the extremes of 100 or 0 while ramping is optimal The ramping feature is useful by itself but itis even more powerful when used with
128. ce on the measurement If it is not taken out lead resistance is a direct error when measuring a sensor In a 4 lead measurement current leads and voltage leads are run separately up to the sensor With separate leads there is little current in the voltage leads so their resis tance does notenter into the measurement Resistance in the current leads will not change the measurement as long as the voltage compliance ofthe current source is not reached When 2 lead sensors are used in 4 lead measurements the short leads on the sensor have an insignificant resistance Resistive sensor Diode option only V V v gt y FIGURE 3 5 4 lead measurement EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 34 CHAPTER 3 Installation 3 5 6 Two Lead Sensor Measurement 3 5 7 Lowering Measurement Noise Model 335 Temperature Controller There are times when crowding in a cryogenic system forces users to read sensors in a 2 lead configuration because there are not enough feedthroughs or room for lead wires If this is the case plus voltage to plus current and minus voltage to minus cur rent leads are attached at the back ofthe instrument or at the vacuum feedthrough The error in a resistive measurement is the resistance of the lead wire run with cur rent and voltage together If the leads contribute 2 Q or 3 Q to a 10 kQ reading the error can probably be tolerated When measuring voltage for diode sensors the error in voltage can be ca
129. change samples Refer to section 3 7 5 for information on using an external power supply for Warm Up Supply mode Warm Up Supply mode is only available when Output 2 is in Voltage mode The Con trol Input setting determines the sensor that is used for feedback in the Warm Up Supply mode Referto section 4 5 1 7 1 for details on the Control Input parameter and section 4 5 1 for Output Type Once Warm Up Supply mode is configured use the Setpoint key to set the desired temperature then use the Heater Range key to activate the output by setting the range to On The front panel display must be configured to show the Warm Up control loop for the Setpoint and Heater Range keys to be used Refer to section 4 2 and section 4 3 for details on front panel keypad operation and display setup The Power Up Enable feature determines if the output will remain on after power is cycled Refer to section 4 5 1 4 for details on the Power Up Enable feature Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 2 Output Type Voltage Output Mode Warm Up Supply Interface Command OUTMODE E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 72 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation 5 5 1 Warm Up Percentage 5 5 2 Warm Up Control 5 6 Monitor Out Model 335 Temperature Controller Use the Warm Up Percentage parameter to determine the voltage amount to apply to the voltage output Output 2 when using Warm Up mode to control an external power supply The voltage applied will be the full scale
130. chosen for each tempera ture range or zone the instrument will update the control settings each time the setpoint crosses into a new zone Ifthe settings are changed manually the controller will use the new setting while it is in the same zone and will update to the pro grammed zone table settings when the setpoint crosses into a new zone If desired the control parameters can be changed manually just like Closed Loop PID mode but they will be automatically updated once the setpoint crosses a zone boundary CAUTION 4 5 1 HeaterOutputs 59 The control algorithm used for each zone is identical to that used in Closed Loop PID mode The Zone feature is useful by itself but it is even more powerful when used with other features We recommend using zone mode with setpoint ramping section 4 5 1 7 7 Refer to section 5 3 for details on setting up zones Refer to section 2 7 fora detailed discussion of PID control Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 1 or 2 Output Mode Zone Interface OUTMODE 4 5 1 6 3 Open Loop Mode Open Loop output mode allows you to directly set the output using only the Manual Output and Range parameters This guarantees constant current to the load but it does not actively control temperature Any change in the characteristics of the load will cause a change in temperature Any output can be configured to Open Loop mode When an output is configured in this mode the Manual Output and Heater Range param
131. ck Action and then Scan for hardware changes which may open the Found New Hardware wizard automatically If the Found New Hardware wizard opens click Cancel 7 Right click on Lake Shore Model 335 and click Update Driver Software 8 Click Browse my computer for driver software 9 Click Browse and selectthe location ofthe extracted driver 10 Ensure the Include subfolders check box is selected and click Next 11 Whenthe driver finishes installing a confirmation message stating Windows has successfully updated your driver software should appear Click Close to com plete the installation n For Windows XP 1 Connectthe USB cable from the Model 335 to the computer 2 Turnon the Model 335 3 The Found New Hardware wizard should appear If the Found New Hardware wizard does not appear the following procedure can be used to open the Hard ware Update wizard which can be used instead a Open Device Manager Use this procedure to open the Device Manager m Right clickon My Computer and then click Properties This will open the System Properties dialog m Clickthe Hardware tab and then click Device Manager b ClickView and ensure the Devices by Type check box is selected 6 3 3 Installingthe USB Driver 103 c Inthe main window of Device Manager locate the Ports COM amp LPT device type In many instances this will be between the Network adapt ers and Processors items If the Ports COM amp LPT item is not already ex
132. creasing temperature A negative coefficient indicates that the sensor signal decreases with increasing temperature Temperature response data of a calibrated sensor must be reduced to a table of breakpoints before entering it into the instrument A curve consists of 2 to 200 break points and each breakpoint consists of one value in sensor units and one temperature value in kelvin The Model 335 uses linear interpolation to calculate temperature between breakpoints The instrument will show T OVER or T UNDER on the display if the sensorreading is outside the range ofthe breakpoints Sensor units are defined by the format setting in TABLE 5 3 EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 78 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation 5 9 Front Panel Curve Entry Operations 5 9 1 Edit Curve Model 335 Temperature Controller Breakpoint setting resolution is six digits in temperature Most temperature values are entered with 0 001 resolution Temperature values of 1000 K and greater can be entered to 0 01 resolution Temperature values below 10 K can be entered with 0 00001 resolution Temperature range for curve entry is OK to 9999 99 K Sensor type Typical Lake Shore Limit K Temperature Typical sensor model coefficient resolution DT 670 WK 475 Silicon Diode Negative 0 00001 V GaAlAs Diode TG 120 WK 325 Negative 0 00001 V Platinum 100 PT 100 Q K 800 Positive 0 001 Q Platinum 1000 x Q K 800 Positive 0 01 Q Rhodium Iron R
133. current gt lt current power gt term n n n n nnn n Heater Status Query HTRST lt output gt term n lt output gt Specifies which heater output to query 1 or 2 error code term n error code Heater error code 0 no error 1 heater open load 2 heater short Error condition is cleared upon querying the heater status which will also clear the front panel error message IEEE 488 Interface Parameter Command IEEE address term nn address Specifies the IEEE address 1 30 Address 0 and 31 are reserved IEEE 4 term after receipt of the current terminator the instrument responds to address 4 IEEE Input Returned Format INCRV Input Format Remarks Example INCRV Input Format Returned Format INNAME Input Format Example Remarks INNAME Input Format Returned Format 6 4 1 InterfaceCommands 117 IEEE 488 Interface Parameter Query IEEE term address term nn refer to command for description Input Curve Number Command INCRV lt input gt lt curve number term a nn lt input gt Specifies which input to configure A or B curve number Specifies which curve the input uses If specified curve type does not match the configured input type the curve number defaults to O Valid entries O none 1 20 standard curves 21 59 user curves Specifies the curve an input uses for temperature conversion INCRVA 23 term InputA uses User Curv
134. d be attached to a resistive heater used fortemperature control The binding posts ora dual banana plug can be used to connect to the Model 3003 The ground terminals on the Model 3003 continue the shield if the heater cable is shielded FROM CONTROLLER CAUTION THIS HI TERMINAL HI MUST BE CONNECTED TO HI TERMINAL OF THE CONTROLLER a LakeShore 3003 Heater Output Conditioner FIGURE 7 3 Model 3003 heater output conditioner EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 132 CHAPTER 7 Options and Accessories Model 335 Temperature Controller E Chapter 8 Service 8 1 General This chapter provides basic service information forthe Model 335 temperature con troller Customer service of the product is limited to the information presented in this chapter Factory trained service personnel should be consulted if the instrument requires repair 8 2 USB This section provides USB interface troubleshooting for issues that arise with new Troubleshooting installations existing installations and intermittent lockups 8 2 1 New Installation 1 Checkthatthe USB driveris installed properly and thatthe device is functioning In Microsoft Windows the device status can be checked using Device Manager by right clicking Lake Shore Model 335 Temperature Controller under Ports COM amp LPT or Other Devices and then clicking Properties Refer to section 6 3 3 for details on installing the USB driver 2 Checkthatthe correct com port is being used In
135. d be in and Nitrogen accordance with the manufacturer supplier s instructions During this transfer it is important that all safety precautions written on the storage Dewar and recom Safety Precautions mended by the manufacturer be followed EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 150 Appendices A WARNING ANY EV Ute B 5 Recommended First Aid Model 335 Temperature Controller Liquid helium and liquid nitrogen are potential asphyxiants and can cause rapid suffoca tion without warning Store and use in area with adequate ventilation DO NOT vent con tainer in confined spaces DO NOT enter confined spaces where gas may be present unless area has been well ventilated If inhaled remove to fresh air If not breathing give artifi cial respiration If breathing is difficult give oxygen Get medical help Liquid helium and liquid nitrogen can cause severe frostbite to the eyes or skin DO NOT touch frosted pipes or valves In case of frostbite consult a physician at once If a physi cian is not readily available warm the affected areas with water that is near body tem perature The two most important safety aspects to consider when handling LHe and LN are adequate ventilation and eye and skin protection Although helium and nitrogen gases are non toxic they are dangerous in that they replace the air in a normal breathing atmosphere Liquid products are of an even greater threat since a small amount of liquid evaporates to create a la
136. d connection on the terminal block Twisting the thermocouple wires helps reject noise If shielding is necessary extend the shield from the oven or cryostat to cover the thermocouple wire but do not attach the shield to the instrument EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 36 CHAPTER 3 Installation 3 7 Heater Output Setup 3 7 1 Heater Output Description 3 7 2 Heater Output Connectors 3 7 3 Heater Output Wiring Model 335 Temperature Controller The following section covers the heater wiring from the vacuum shroud to the instru ment for both heater outputs Specifications are detailed in section 1 3 For help on choosing and installing an appropriate resistive heater referto section 2 5 Output 1 and Output 2 in current mode are traditional control outputs for a cryogenic temperature controller Both are variable DC current sources with software settable ranges and limits Both are configurable for optimization using eithera 25 Oora 500 heater resistance At the 50 O setting Output 1 is limited to 1 A 50 W and Output 2 is limited to 0 707 A 25 W Atthe 25 O setting the maximum heater output current is 1 732A 75 W for Output 1 and 1A 25 W for Output 2 if Output 1 is set to 50 W orless The compliance voltage of Output 1 is 50 V minimum but can reach as high as 58 V if the heater resistance is higher than the nominal setting and the compliance voltage of Output 2 is 35 4 V minimum but can reach as high as 41V if the h
137. d may have very large temperature changes thattake along time to settle out Delicate loads can even be damaged by too much power Often there is little information on the cooling power of the cooling system at the desired setpoint If this is the case try the following allow the load to cool completely with the heater off Set Manual Output to 50 while in Open Loop control mode Turn the heater to the lowest range and write down the temperature rise if any Select the next highest heater range and continue the process until the load warms up to room temperature Do not leave the system unattended the heater may have to be turned off manually to prevent overheating If the load never reaches room tempera ture some adjustment may be needed in heater resistance or load The list of heater range versus load temperature is a good reference for selecting the proper heater range It is common for systems to require two or more heater ranges for good control overtheirfull temperature Lower heater ranges are normally needed for lower temperature The Model 335 is of no use controlling at or below the temperature reached when the heater was off Many systems can be tuned to control within a degree or two above that temperature The proportional setting is so closely tied to heater range that they can be thought of as fine and course adjustments of the same setting An appropriate heater range must be known before moving on to the proportional setting
138. d ofthe thermocouple 6 Press Input Setup and select the corresponding sensor input Press Enter until the Room Calibration parameter appears then press A until Yes appears press Enter to accept it 7 Thecurrenttemperature reading is displayed in kelvin Enter the true tempera ture that the thermocouple should read If the inputis shorted then enterthe actual room temperature measured by the thermometer Press Enterto save the value 8 Toverify the calibration check that the temperature reading for the calibrated input matches the room temperature calibration setting value Any previous calibration can be cleared using the Clear Calibration submenu Menu Navigation Input Setup gt Room Calibration gt Clear Calibration Default Room calibration cleared The Model 335 supports a variety oftemperature sensors manufactured by Lake Shore and other manufacturers After the appropriate sensor type is selected section 2 2 an appropriate curve may be selected The Model 335 can use curves from several sources Standard curves are preloaded with every instrument and they are numbered 1 to 20 User curves numbered 21 to 59 can be used when a sensor does not match a standard curve SoftCal calibrations are stored as user curves or the user can enter their own curves from the front panel section 5 9 or computer interface section 6 2 The complete list of sensor curves preloaded in the Model 335 is provided in TABLE 4 8 During normal
139. d specifications Power requirement Size Weight Approval Model 335 Temperature Controller 5 C to 40 C at reduced specifications 100 120 220 240 VAC 10 50 or 60 Hz 210 VA 217 mm W x90 mm H x 317 mmD 8 5 in x 3 5 in x 14 5 in half rack 7 6 kg 16 8 Ib CE mark 1 4 Safety Summary and Symbols 1 4 SafetySummary and Symbols 11 Observe these general safety precautions during all phases of instrument operation service and repair Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warn ings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended instrument use Lake Shore Cryotronics Inc assumes no liability for Cus tomer failure to comply with these requirements The Model 335 protects the operator and surrounding area from electric shock or burn mechanical hazards excessive temperature and spread of fire from the instru ment Environmental conditions outside of the conditions below may pose a hazard to the operator and surrounding area m Indooruse Altitude to 2000 m Temperature for safe operation 5 C to 40 C Maximum relative humidity 80 for temperature up to 31 C decreasing linearly to 50 at 40 C Power supply voltage fluctuations not to exceed 10 of the nominal voltage Overvoltage category II Pollution degree 2 IPXO not protected against harmful ingress of water Ground the Instrument To minimize shock hazard the instrument is equipped wi
140. d the temperatures vacuum levels and bonding materials found in typical cryogenic cooling systems Experiments done in magnetic fields are very common Field dependence of tempera ture sensors is an important selection criteria for sensors used in these experiments This manual briefly qualifies the field dependence of most common sensors in the specifications section 1 3 Detailed field dependence tables are included in the Lake Shore Temperature Measurement and Control Catalog When available specific data on other environmental factors is also included in the catalog Temperature measurements have several sources of uncertainty that reduce accu racy Be sure to account for errors induced by both the sensor and the instrumenta tion when computing accuracy The instrument has measurement error in reading the sensor signal and error in calculating a temperature using a temperature response curve Error results from the sensor being compared to a calibration stan dard and the temperature response of a sensor will shift with time and with repeated thermal cycling from very cold temperatures to room temperature Instrument and sensor manufacturers specify these errors but there are things you can do to main tain good accuracy For example choose a sensorthat has good sensitivity in the most critical temperature range as sensitivity can minimize the effect of most error sources Install the sensor properly following guidelines in section 2 4
141. d to any alarm or operated manually The 10 V analog voltage output can be configured to send a voltage proportional to temperature to a strip chart recorder or data acquisition system You may selectthe scale and data sent to the output including temperature or sensor units E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 4 CHAPTER 1 Introduction sensor input connectors USB interface Line input assembly output 1 heater Terminal block IEEE 488 interface output 2 heater Thermocouple analog outputs and relays option inputs FIGURE 1 2 Model 335 rear panel 1 1 4 Configurable The Model 335 offers a bright vacuum fluorescent display that simultaneously dis Display plays up to four readings You can display both control loops or if you need to monitor just one input you can display just that one in greater detail Or you can custom con figure each display location to suit your experiment Data from any input can be assigned to any of the locations and your choice of temperature sensor units can be displayed For added convenience you can also custom label each senor input elimi nating the guesswork in remembering or determining the location to which a sensor input is associated m Two Input Output Display with Labels Standard display option featuring two inputs and associated outputs m Custom Display with Labels Reading locations can be user configured to accom modate application needs Here the input names are shown above
142. d values The Autotune pro cess can be cancelled by pressing Autotune and choosing Yes to the cancel Auto tune prompt FIGURE 5 1 Left Example of a screen when Autotune has been initiated Actual screen will show the message blinking Right Autotune error Purpose for stage Reason for failure Possible solution Curve not assigned to Input heater not Ensure curve is assigned to input heater is on and 0 Testing initial conditions Determine if Autotuning can be initiated on ortemperature not within MC 5 K of setpoint temperature is within 5 Kof setpoint Ensures that temperature is not still Sunpatstun ues meine tanemichis Allow the temperature to 1 Waiting for temperature to settle settling toward the setpoint or drifting p 8 settle more before initiating properly Autotune away from the setpoint Autotune Ensures that there is no temperature Nm n aH s 2 p May indicate thatthe initial P value is too Sane 2 Testing for temperature stability oscillation or excessive noise in the high Use a smaller initial P value temperature reading 8 System response is too slow orthe If not already using High Observing system response to Control parameters are changed based y p y E 8 3 heater is too underpowered for the sys range increase initial setpoint change on observation tem to Autotune heater range Waiting for temperature to settle System response is too slow to Autotune
143. d within 60 days of shipment Ifthe instrument must be returned for recalibration replacement or repair a return authorization RMA number must be obtained from a Lake Shore representative before it is returned Refer to section 8 14 2 forthe Lake Shore RMA procedure Items Included with the Model 335 temperature controller BH 1Model335instrument 1 Model 335 user manual 2 sensor input mating connectors 6 pin DIN G 106 233 2 heater output connectors dual banana for heater Outputs 1 and 2 1terminal block mating connector 8 pin terminal block for Output 2 in voltage mode and relays 1 and 2 1line power cord 1line power cord for alternative voltage Included only when purchased with VAC 120 ALL power option E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 30 CHAPTER 3 Installation 3 3 Rear Panel This section provides a description ofthe Model 335 rear panel connections The rear Definition panel consists ofthe Input A and B sensor input connectors 1 in FIGURE 3 1 Out put 2 voltage output and relays 1 and 2 terminal block connector 2 USB B type con nector 3 IEEE 488 interface connector 4 line input assembly 5 Output 1 and 2 heater output connectors 6 and 7 and the thermocouple option inputs 8 Refer to section 8 10 for rear panel connector pin out details 1 CAUTIO N Always turn off the instrument before making any rear panel connections This is espe cially critical when making sensor to instrument connections
144. determines which type of output and which rear panel connector is used Menu Navigation Output Setup gt Output 2 Output Type Current or Voltage Default Current Interface HTRSET 4 5 1 2 75 W Configuration The Model 335 can provide a total of 75 W of power In the standard configuration Output 1 can provide up to 50 W and Output 2 can provide upto 25 W into either a 25 Q or 50 Q heater Alternatively when Output 2 is configured as a voltage output its power can be diverted to Output 1 which can then provide up to 75 W into a 25 O heater In this configuration Output 2 can still provide 1 W into a 100 Q heater Follow this procedure to configure Output 1 for up to 75 W 1 Setthe Heater Output Type setting for Output 2 to Voltage 2 Ensure that the Heater Resistance setting for Output 1 is set to 25 Q The 1 732 A 75 W setting will then be available for the Max Current setting on Output 1 3 Applythis setting 1 732 A 75 W setting to getthe desired 75 W output 4 Alternatively the User setting can be used for the Max Heater Output setting to set the maximum current to any value from 0 1 A to 1 732 A Once a Max Current setting of more than 1 41 Ais applied the Heater Output Type for Output 2 cannot be set backto Current until the Max Current setting for Output 1 is reduced to 1 41 A or less Refer to section 4 5 1 1 for information about the Heater Output Type setting Refer to section 4 5 1 3 for information about the
145. dient across a piece of voltage lead Thermal EMF voltages must exist because the sensor is almost never the same temperature as the instrument They can be minimized by careful wiring making sure the voltage leads are symmetrical in the type of metal used and how they are joined and by keeping unnecessary heat sources away from the leads Evenina well designed system thermal EMF voltages can be an appreciable part of a low voltage sensor measurement The Model 335 can help with a thermal compensation algorithm The instrument will automatically reverse the polarity of the current source every other reading The average of the positive and negative sensor readings will cancel the thermal EMF voltage that is present in the same polarity regardless of current direction This cor rection algorithm is enabled by default for RTD sensor types but you can turn it off using the Current Reversal parameter The Current Reversal parameter defaults to On any time the Sensor Type parameter is changed to PTC RTD or NTC RTD E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 50 CHAPTER 4 Operation 4 4 6 Thermocouple Sensor Input Setup Model 3060 Only Model 335 Temperature Controller When Current Reversal is On the sensor excitation current is a 10 Hz square wave 5 Hz for NTC RTD on the 100 K range This square wave excitation generates a small electro magnetic noise signal in the sensor cable which can be picked up by sensitive measure ment equipment in th
146. e General purpose grease well suited for cryogenic use because of its low viscosity It is often used as a means of thermally anchoring cryogenic sensors as well as lubricating joints and o rings Contains high molecular weight polymeric hydrocarbon additive that gives it a tenacious rubbery consistency allowing the grease to form a cushion between mating surfaces Melting pointis 316 K 43 C Can be removed using Xylene with an isopropyl alcohol rinse HTR 25 25 Q cartridge heater The heater features precision wound nickel chromium resistance wire magnesium oxide insulation two solid pins non magnetic package and has UL and CSA com ponent recognition The heater is 25 Q 6 35 mm 0 25 in diameter by 25 4 mm 1in long The 25 Q rating is in dead air With proper heat sinking the cartridge heater can handle many times this dead air power rating HTR 50 50 Q cartridge heater The heater features precision wound nickel chromium resistance wire magnesium oxide insulation two solid pins non magnetic package and has UL and CSA com ponent recognition The heater is 50 6 35 mm 0 25 in diameter by 25 4 mm 1in long The 50 O rating is in dead air With proper heat sinking the cartridge heater can handle many times this dead air power rating RM 1 2 Half rack mounting kit for one Model 335 temperature controller Half length mounting panel and mounting ears to attach one Model 335 to a 483 mm 19 in rack mount space
147. e Thermal anchor bobbin Cryogenic wire small diameter large AWG Sensor Second stage and Heater sample holder wiring not shown Drawing not to scale K forelarity Optical window if required FIGURE 2 1 Typical sensor installation in a mechanical refrigerator 2 4 7 Lead Soldering When additional wire is soldered to short sensor leads care must be taken not to overheat the sensor A thermal anchor such as a metal wire clamp or alligator clip will anchor the leads and protect the sensor Leads should be tinned before bonding to reduce the time that heat is applied to the sensor lead Solder flux should be cleaned after soldering to prevent corrosion or outgassing in vacuum 2 4 8 Thermal Sensor leads can be a significant source of error if they are not properly anchored Anchoring Leads Heat will transfer down even small leads and alter the sensor reading The goal of thermal anchoring is to cool the leads to a temperature as close to the sensor as possi ble This can be accomplished by putting a significant length of lead wire in thermal contact with every cooled surface between room temperature and the sensor Lead wires can be adhered to cold surfaces with varnish over a thin electrical insulator like cigarette paper They can also be wound onto a bobbin that is firmly attached to the cold surface Some sensor packages include a thermal anchor bobbin and wrapped lead wires to simplify thermal anchoring Model 335 Temperature Controller
148. e 23 for temperature conversion Input Curve Number Query INCRV input term a input Specifies which input to query A or B curve number term nn refer to command for description Sensor Input Name Command INNAME lt input gt lt name gt term a s 15 lt input gt Specifies input to configure A or B lt name gt Specifies the name to associate with the sensor input INNAME A Sample Space term the string Sample Space will appear on the front panel display when possible to identify the sensor information being displayed Be sure to use quotes when sending strings otherwise characters such as spaces and other non alpha numeric characters will be interpreted as a delimiter and the full string will not be accepted It is not recommended to use commas or semi colons in sensor input names as these characters are used as delimiters for query responses Sensor Input Name Query INNAME input term a input Specifies input to query A or B name term s 15 refer to command for description E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 118 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation INTYPE Input Format Example Remarks INTYPE Input Format Returned Format Remarks Model 335 Temperature Controller Input Type Parameter Command INTYPE lt input gt lt sensor type gt lt autorange gt lt range gt lt compensa tion gt lt units gt term a n n n n n lt input gt Specifies in
149. e Controller 6 2 5 StatusSystem Detail StatusRegisterSets 95 6 2 4 8 Clearing Registers The methods to clear each register are detailed in TABLE 6 3 Condition registers None registers are not latched Event registers Standard event status register ESR clears Standard Event uery the event register Query 8 Status Register Operation event register Send CLS CLS clears both registers Power on instrument Enable registers Write O to the ESE 0 clears Standard Event Standard Event Status Enable Register Operation Event Enable Register Service Request Enable Register enable register Status Enable register Power on instrument Status byte There are no commands that directly clear the status byte as the bits are non latching to clear individual summary bits clearthe event register that corresponds to the summary bit sending CLS will clear all event If bit 5 ESB ofthe status byte is set send ESR to read the standard event status register registers which in turn clears the status byte and bit 5 will clear Power on instrument TI 6 2 5 Status System Detail Status Register Sets TABLE 6 3 Register clear methods As shown in FIGURE 6 1 there are two register sets in the status system ofthe Model 335 Standard Event Status Register and Operation Event Register 6 2 5 1 Standard Event Status Register Set The Standard Event Status Register reports the foll
150. e Range iii ii bp AREA IK 13 2 2 2 SensorSensitiVIty isses pa a 13 2 2 3 Environmental Conditions cece cece cece cece eee e tenet eee eee 14 2 2 4 IMEASUFEMENBACCUFACY ioi i VE PROU T VP quts 14 22 5 Sensor Package isses ria HR ETERNA 14 Sensor Calibrations 3 ssaa ei T QE YR IP AN 14 2 3 1 Precision Calibration 4 isceee rere aaa 15 23 2 SoftCal os site tes pis vend TERCERA DE TERR nian sai EDAD SEEN QOI LIN NES 15 2 3 3 Sensors Using Standard Curves sss 15 2 3 4 Curve Haridler M ius eec eec re ert RR e Rr de up d DTP REA RITE 15 Sensor InstallatlOR s eren ttr Eti URU E RA E DUtu Prada pe EOM aree 16 2 4 1 Mounting Materials eee eee 16 2 4 2 SensorLocationi i iste toe tea pax pera 16 2 4 3 Thermal Conductivity eee e eee 16 2 4 4 CONA CTAN stia EREIXAR TROP RE ERE a 17 2 4 5 Contact Pressure siae e aa 17 2 4 6 Lead Wire esee esee e e e e enn 17 24 7 Lead Soldering i cet aaa 18 2 4 8 Thermal Anchoring Leads ee 18 2 4 9 Thermal R dlation cete operi Roe TERR CENERTRERERRCOORL EU EE 19 Heater Selection and Installation eee 19 2 5 1 Heater Resistance and Power cece e cece eee e eee e ene e es 19 25 2 H aterLOCatiOn os sc etertr br E EE OUR ENSE sede Pepe Kerr ER OSEE 20 2 5 3 Heater TV PCS sii met ER a ERN DIN EUR PO UNTERE 20 2 5 4 Heater WIFIDB sess ri EO Ee a I HO s 21 Consideration for Good Control e eee e teens 21 2 6 1 Ther
151. e area Similar to sensor lead wire the entire length of the heater wire should be in good thermal contact with the load to allow for thermal transfer Ther mal anchoring also protects the wire from overheating and burning out 2 5 4 Heater Wiring 2 6 Consideration for Good Control 2 6 1 Thermal Conductivity 2 6 2 Thermal Lag 2 6 3 Two Sensor Approach 2 5 4 HeaterWiring 21 Resistive heater wire is also wound into cartridge heaters Cartridge heaters are more convenient but are bulky and more difficult to place on small loads A typical car tridge is 6 35 mm 0 25 in in diameter and 25 4 mm 1 in long The cartridge should be snugly held in a hole in the load or clamped to a flat surface Thermal anchoring for good thermal contact is again important Foil heaters are thin layers of resistive material adhered to or screened onto electri cally insulating sheets There are a variety of shapes and sizes The proper size heater can evenly heat a flat surface or a round load The entire active area should be in good thermal contact with the load not only for maximum heating effect but to keep spots in the heater from overheating and burning out For wiring inside a vacuum shroud we recommend using 30 AWG copper wire for heater leads Too much heat can transfer in when larger wire is used Thermal anchor ing similar to that used for the sensor leads should be included so that any heat transfer does not warm the load when the h
152. e avoided if the two instruments share a switched power strip B Theheaterandwiringinthe system must be rated for both the maximum current and maximum voltage provided by the power supply The Model 335 can be set to warm up using lessthan full power ifthe load will nottolerate the full power of the supply 3 7 5 3 Connecting to the Model 335 The voltage programming cable attaches to the removable terminal block on the rear panel ofthe Model 335 FIGURE 3 9 Output number and polarity ofthe output leads are labelled The negative terminals are connected internally to the instru ment chassis to provide a ground reference 10V 30VDC 3A OUT2 RELAY1 RELAY 2 NC COM NO NC COM NO FIGURE 3 9 Output terminal block Inthe most basic configuration a two conductor cable connects directly from the output terminals to the power supply programming input Copper wire size 20 AWG to 26 AWG is recommended 3 7 5 PoweringOutput 2 Usingan External PowerSupply 39 3 7 5 4 Programming Voltages Under 10 V A voltage divider FIGURE 3 10 can be used to reduce the control output voltage if the programming input of the power supply has a range of less than OV to 10 V to ensure full output resolution and protection against overloading the external supply programming inputs The output voltage is proportional to the ratio of resistors R1 to R2 Vg 10 V x R1 R1 R2 It is also important to keep the sum of R1 R2 gt 10000orthe Model 335 output m
153. e bus which function to perform The Model 335 performs the functions of Talker and Listener but it cannot be a Bus Controller The Bus Controller is the digital computerthattells the Model 335 which functions to perform TABLE 6 1 defines the IEEE 488 capabilities and subsets for the Model 335 LINE RN NN SH1 Source handshake capability RL1 Complete remote local capability DC1 Full device clear capability DTO No device trigger capability CO No system controller capability Basic Talker serial poll capability talk only m unaddressed to talk if addressed to listen Basic Listener unaddressed to listen if L4 addressed to talk SR1 Service request capability AH1 Acceptor handshake capability PPO No parallel poll capability El Open collector electronics TABLE 6 1 Model 335 IEEE 488 interface capabilities and their subsets Instruments are connected to the IEEE 488 bus by a 24 conductor connector cable as specified by the standard section 8 10 1 Cables can be ordered from Lake Shore as IEEE 488 Cable Kit 4005 or they can be purchased from other electronic suppliers Cable lengths are limited to 2 m 6 6 ft for each device and 20 m 65 6 ft forthe entire bus The Model 335 can drive a bus with up to ten loads If more instruments or cable length is required a bus expander must be used E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 90 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation 6 2 1 Changing I
154. e epoxy resin system for cryogenic use The primary use for Stycast is for vacuum feedthroughs or permanent thermal anchors Stycast is an alternative to Apiezon N Grease when permanent sensor mountings are desired ID 10 XX Indium solder disks Quantity 10 Indium is a semi precious non ferrous metal softer than lead and extremely malleable and ductile It stays soft and workable down to cryogenic tem peratures Indium can be used to create solder bumps for microelectronic chip attachments and also as gaskets for pressure and vacuum sealing purposes ID 10 31 Indium Disks are 7 92 mm diameter x 0 13 mm 0 312 in diameter x 0 005 in ID 10 56 Indium Disks are 14 27 mm diameter x 0 127 mm 0 562 diameter x 0 005 in Indium foil sheets Quantity 5 When used as a washer between DT 470 CU silicon diode or other temperature sensors and refrigerator cold stages indium foil increases the thermal con tact area and prevents the sensor from detaching due to vibration It also may be used as a sealing gasket for covers flanges and windows in cryogenic applications Each sheet is 0 13 mm x 50 8 mm x 50 8 mm 0 005 in x 2 in x 2 in GAH 25 Apiezon H grease 25 g tube It is designed for general purposes where operating tempera tures necessitate the use of a relatively high melting point grease Melting point is 523 K 250 C Can be removed using Xylene with an isopropyl alcohol rinse GAN 25 Apiezon N grease 25 g tub
155. e high and low status of all alarms including latching alarms ANALOG Input Format Example Remarks ANALOG Input Format Returned Format ATUNE Input Format Example Remarks BRIGT Input Format Remarks 6 4 1 InterfaceCommands 111 Monitor Out Parameter Command ANALOG output input units high value low value gt lt polarity gt term n n n tnnnnn tnnnnn n output Output 2 is the only valid entry and must be included included for com patibility with other Lake Shore temperature instruments 2 Output 2 lt input gt Specifies which input to monitor 0 none 1 Input A 2 Input B lt units gt Specifies the units on which to base the output voltage 1 kelvin 2 Celsius 3 sensor units high value If output mode is Monitor Out this parameter represents the data at which the Monitor Out reaches 100 output Entered in the units designated by the units parmeter Refer to OUTMODE command low value Ifoutput mode is Monitor Out this parameter represents the data at which the analog output reaches 100 output if bipolar or 0 output if positive only Entered in the units designated by the units parmeter polarity Specifies output voltage is 0 unipolar positive output only or 1 bipolar positive or negative output ANALOG 2 1 1 100 0 0 0 0 term sets Output 2 Voltage mode to monitor Input A kelvin reading with 100 0 K at 100 output 10 0 V and 0 0
156. e on the Lake Shore website To install the driver it must be downloaded from the website and extracted Use the procedure in section 6 3 3 1 through section 6 3 3 4 to download extract and install the driver using Windows Vista Windows 7 and XP 6 3 3 3 1 Download the driver 1 Locate the Model 335 USB driver on the downloads page on the Lake Shore website 2 Right click on the USB driver download link and select save target link as 3 Savethe driver to a convenient place and take note as to where the driver was downloaded 6 3 3 3 2 Extract the driver The downloaded driver is in a ZIP compressed archive The driver must be extracted from this file Windows provides built in support for ZIP archives If this support is disabled a third party application such as WinZip or 7 Zip must be used For Windows Vista or Windows 7 1 Right click on the file and click extract all 2 AnExtract Compressed Zipped Folders dialog box will appear It is recom mended the default folder is not changed Take note ofthis folder location 3 Clickto clearthe Show extracted files when complete checkbox and click Extract For Windows XP 1 Right click on the file and click extract all 2 The Extraction wizard will appear Click Next E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 102 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation Model 335 Temperature Controller 3 Itisrecommended the default folder is not changed Take note of this folder loc
157. e shield pin of the input connector The shields should not be connected to earth ground on the instrument chassis One shield should be connected to the cryostat s ground as long asitis nearearth ground Connecting at more than one point will cause a ground loop which adds noise to the measurement The shells of the input connectors are at the same potential as the shield pin on the Model 335 Some older Lake Shore temperature controllers such as the Model 331 and Model 332 are not configured this way 3 5 4 Sensor Polarity 3 5 5 Four Lead Sensor Measurement 3 5 4 SensorPolarity 33 Lake Shore sensors are shipped with instructions that indicate which sensor leads are which It is important to follow these instructions for plus and minus leads polarity as well as voltage and current when applicable Diode sensors do not operate in the wrong polarity They look like an open circuit to the instrument 2 lead resistors can operate with any lead arrangement and the sensor instructions may not specify 4 lead resistors can be more dependent on lead arrangement Follow any specified lead assignment for 4 lead resistors Mixing leads could give a reading that appears correct but is not the most accurate Cathode P di ec Anode FIGURE 3 4 DT 670 SD Diode sensor leads All sensors including both 2 lead and 4 lead can be measured with a 4 lead tech nique The purpose of a 4 lead measurement is to eliminate the effect of lead resis tan
158. e system Turning Current Reversal off will eliminate this noise at the cost of introducing thermal EMF voltage errors into the sensor measurement Menu Navigation Input Setup nput A or B Current Reversal Off or On Default On Interface Command INTYPE When a Model 3060 thermocouple option is installed in the Model 335 a thermocou ple option becomes available under the Sensor Type parameter in the Input Setup menu The standard diode RTD sensor inputs can still be used when the thermocou ple option is installed but the thermocouple and standard inputs cannot be used simultaneously Refer to section 8 12 to install the Model 3060 Thermocouples include a variety of commercial such as E K T and specialty types such as cryogenic Chromel AuFe Standard curves are included in the Model 335 for the types listed in TABLE 4 6 Othertypes can be used as long as an appropriate tem perature response curve is loaded as a user curve Representative thermocouple specifications are given in TABLE 1 2 The Model 335 provides one thermocouple range and no excitation because thermocouples do not require it Internal room tem perature compensation is included for convenience section 4 4 6 2 and should be calibrated before use Room temperature compensation is enabled by default but can be turned off if external compensation is being used Menu Navigation Input Setup nput A or B Sensor Type Thermocouple Interface Command INTYPE
159. e to connect to Windows Update or find the drivers a message to Insert the disc that came with your Lake Shore Model 335 will be displayed Click Cancel and refer to section 6 3 3 3 to install the driver from the web 6 When the Found New Hardware wizard finishes installing the driver a confirma tion message stating the software for this device has been successfully installed will appear Click Close to complete the installation 6 3 3 2 Installing the Driver From Windows Update in Windows XP 1 Connect the USB cable from the Model 335 to the computer 2 Turnonthe Model 335 3 When the Found New Hardware wizard appears select Yes this time only and click Next 4 Select Install the software automatically Recommended and click Next 5 The Found New Hardware wizard should automatically connect to Windows Update and install the drivers If the Found New Hardware wizard is unable to connect to Windows Update or find the drivers a message saying Cannot Install this Hardware will be displayed Click the Cancel button and referto section 6 3 3 3 to install the driver from the web 6 When the Found New Hardware wizard finishes installing the driver a confirma tion message stating the wizard has finished installing the software for Lake Shore Model 335 Temperature Controller will appear Click Finish to com plete the installation 6 3 3 3 Installing the Driver From the Web The Model 335 USB driver is availabl
160. eShore www lakeshore com 152 Appendices CS tems CS O COSTO 1 0 090570 500 00 1 01064 1 19475 20 2 2 0 110239 491 0 27 1 02125 81 0 52 1 24208 17 10 3 0 136555 479 5 28 1 03167 75 0 53 1 26122 15 90 4 0 179181 461 5 29 1 04189 69 0 54 1 27811 14 90 5 0 265393 425 5 30 1 05192 63 0 55 1 29430 14 00 6 0 349522 390 0 31 1 06277 56 4 56 1 31070 13 15 7 0 452797 346 0 32 1 07472 49 0 57 1 32727 12 35 8 0 513393 320 0 33 1 09110 38 7 58 1 34506 11 55 9 0 563128 298 5 34 1 09602 35 7 59 1 36423 10 75 10 0 607845 279 0 35 1 10014 33 3 60 1 38361 10 0 11 0 648723 261 0 36 1 10393 312 61 1 40454 9 25 12 0 686936 244 0 37 1 10702 29 6 62 1 42732 8 50 13 0 722511 228 0 38 1 10974 28 3 63 1 45206 7 75 14 0 755487 213 0 39 1 11204 27 3 64 1 48578 6 80 15 0 786992 198 5 40 1 11414 26 5 65 1 53523 5 46 16 0 817025 184 5 41 1 11628 25 8 66 1 56684 4 56 17 0 844538 171 5 42 1 11853 25 2 67 1 58358 4 04 18 0 869583 159 5 43 1 12090 24 7 68 1 59690 3 58 19 0 893230 148 0 44 1 12340 24 3 69 1 60756 3 18 20 0 914469 137 5 45 1 12589 24 0 70 1 62125 2 62 21 0 934356 127 5 46 1 12913 23 7 71 1 62945 2 26 22 0 952903 118 0 47 1 13494 23 3 72 1 63516 1 98 23 0 970134 109 0 48 1 14495 22 8 73 1 63943 1 4 24 0 986073 100 5 49 1 16297 22 0 74 1 64261 1 53 25 0 998925 93 5 50 1 17651 21 3 75 1 64430 1 40 TABLE C 3 Standard DT 670 diode curve
161. eater is not running The lead wires should be twisted to minimize noise coupling between the heater and other leads in the system When wiring outside the vacuum shroud larger gauge copper cable can be used and twisting is still recommended Most ofthe techniques discussed in section 2 4 and section 2 5 to improve cryogenic temperature accuracy apply to control as well There is an obvious exception in sen sor location A compromise is suggested below in section 2 6 3 Good thermal conductivity is important in any part of a cryogenic system that is intended to be atthe same temperature Most systems begin with materials that have good conductivity themselves but as sensors heaters sample holders etc are added to an ever more crowded space the junctions between parts are often over looked In order for control to work well junctions between the elements ofthe con trol loop must be in close thermal contact and have good thermal conductivity Gasket materials should always be used along with reasonable pressure section 2 4 4 and section 2 4 5 Poor thermal conductivity causes thermal gradients that reduce accuracy and also cause thermal lag that make it difficult for controllers to do their job Thermal lag is the time ittakes for a change in heating or cooling powerto propagate through the load and getto the feedback sensor Because the feedback sensor is the only thing thatlets the controller know what is happening in the system slow i
162. eater resistance is higherthan the nominal setting Heater power is applied in one ofthree ranges high med or low Each range is one decade lower in power Refer to TABLE 4 11 for maxi mum current and power ratings into different heater resistance Dual banana jacks on the rear panel ofthe instrument are used for connecting wires to the heater outputs Two standard dual banana plug mating connectors are included in the connector kit shipped with the instrument This is a common jack and additional mating connectors can be purchased from local electronic suppliers or from Lake Shore as P N 106 009 The heater is connected between the HI and LO terminals OUT 1 HI 17AMAx LO OUT 2 HI iAMAX LO FIGURE 3 8 Rear panel showing heater output connectors Heater output current is what determines the size gauge of wire needed to connect the heater The maximum current that can be sourced from heater Output 1 is 1 732 A When less current is needed to power a cooling system it can be limited with range settings When setting up a temperature control system the lead wire for the heater must be capable of carrying a continuous current that is greater than the maximum current Wire manufacturers recommend 26 AWG or larger wire to carry 1 732 A of current butthere is little advantage in using wire smallerthan 20 AWG to 22 AWG outside the cryostat Inside the cryostat smaller gauge wire is often desirable 3 7 4 Heater Output Noise 3
163. ection 8 5 for instructions on changing the line voltage configuration The line fuse is an important safety feature of the Model 335 If a fuse ever fails it is important to replace it with the value and type indicated on the rear panel for the line voltage setting The letter T on the fuse rating indicates that the instrument requires atime delay or slow blow fuse Fuse values should be verified any time line voltage configuration is changed Refer to section 8 6 for instructions for changing and verify ing a line fuse The Model 335 includes a 3 conductor power cord that mates with the IEC 320 C14 line cord receptacle Line voltage is present on the two outside conductors and the center conductor is a safety ground The safety ground attaches to the instrument chassis and protects the user in case of a component failure A CE approved power cord is included with instruments shipped to Europe a domestic power cord is included with all other instruments unless otherwise specified when ordered Always plug the power cord into a properly grounded receptacle to ensure safe instru ment operation The delicate nature of measurements being taken with this instrument may necessi tate additional grounding including ground strapping of the instrument chassis In these cases the operator s safety should remain the highest priority and low imped ance from the instrument chassis to safety ground should always be maintained The power switch is part
164. ed This register is cleared when it is read Refer to section 6 2 5 2 for a list of operational status bits Output Mode Command OUTMODE lt output gt lt mode gt lt input gt lt powerup enable term n n n n output Specifies which output to configure 1 or 2 mode Specifies the control mode Valid entries 0 Off 1 Closed Loop PID 2 Zone 3 Open Loop 4 Monitor out 5 Warmup Supply lt input gt Specifies which input to use for control O None 1 A 2 B Specifies whether the output remains on or shuts off after power cycle Valid entries O powerup enable off 1 powerup enable on powerup enable OUTMODE 1 2 1 0 term Output 1 configured for Zone control mode using Input A forthe control input sensor and will turn the output off when power is cycled Modes 4 and 5 are only valid for Output 2 in Voltage mode Output Mode Query OUTMODE output term n output Specifies which output to query 1 or 2 lt mode gt lt input gt lt powerup enable gt term n n n refer to command for description Control Loop PID Values Command PID lt output gt lt P value gt lt I value gt lt D value gt term n nnnnn nnnnn nnnn lt output gt Specifies which output s control loop to configure 1 or 2 P value The value for output Proportional gain 0 1 to 1000 lt I value The value for output Integral reset O 1 to 1000 D value The value for output Derivative rate O t
165. ed control mode and which tuning mode is best for the application Other parameters fall into place once these have been chosen Section 2 7 of this manual describes the principals of closed loop proportional inte gral and derivative PID control Heater Outputs 1 and 2 are traditional control loop heater outputs for a cryogenic temperature controller The two outputs are identical except in the amount of power available Output 1 can provide up to 75 W when Output 2 is configured as a voltage output or 50 W when Output 2 is configured as a current output Output 2 can pro vide up to 25 W when configured as a current output and 1 W when it is configured as a voltage output The outputs include a large set of hardware and software features making them very flexible and easy to use The current outputs are well regulated DC outputs This pro vides quiet stable control for a broad range of temperature control systems in a fully integrated package The power ranges for each output provide decade steps in power Menu Navigation Output Setup gt Output 1 or 2 Default Current Interface HTRSET 4 5 1 HeaterOutputs 55 4 5 1 1 Heater Output Type Output 2 Heater Output 2 can be configured either as a standard current source output which can provide up to 25 W of power into a 25 Q or 50 Q heater or as a voltage output which can provide up to 1 W of power into a 100 O heater The Output Type parame ter only available for Output 2
166. ed loop control mode Manual Output is added directly to the output ofthe PID control equation In effect the control equa tion operates about the Manual Output setting The Manual Output setting is expressed in percent of full scale Percent of full scale is defined as percent of full scale current or power on the selected heater range Refer to section 4 5 1 5 to set the Heater Out display Available full scale current and power are determined by the heater resistance Max Current setting and Heater Range Manual Output setting range is0 to 100 with a resolution of 0 01 To set Manual Output first configure the front panel display to show the desired con trol loop information and then use the Manual Out key on the front panel A quick way to access the setting if the control loop information is not already being dis played is to usethe front panel Aor B keysto temporarily display the control loop information while the new setting is entered Refer to section 4 3 for details on con figuring the front panel display When an output is configured for Open Loop mode the Manual Output setting is available in the Output Setup menu This is because in the Open Loop mode no Con trol Input feedback sensor is required and if none is set then there would be no way to use the Manual Out front panel key to set the output unless you are in the Custom Display mode The Control Input parameter can be assigned to a sensor input that is not being used
167. ed mn au Low alarm deactivated FIGURE 5 6 Dead band example To setup an alarm enter the Alarm Setup menu by pressing Alarm If a latching alarm has been activated you will be prompted with a Reset Alarm message Select No to enterthe Alarm Setup menu Menu Navigation Alarm Input A B Alarm On res SLatching Off On Alarm iInput A B gt Alarm On Ester Deadband see note below Low and High Setpoint limits are determined by the Preferred Units ofthe associated sensor input Default Latching Off Deadband gt 1 0000 K Interface Command ALARM EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 76 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation 5 7 2 Relays Model 335 Temperature Controller There are two relays on the Model 335 numbered 1 and 2 They are most commonly thought of as alarm relays but they may be manually controlled also Relay assign ments are configurable as shown in FIGURE 5 7 Two relays can be used with one sen sor input for independent high and low operation or each can be assigned to a different input Relay 2 SS 1 off On A Alarm B Alarm off On A Alarm B Alarm Manual off Manualon Follows Follows Manual off Manualon Follows Follows masse atwestae InputA InputB omae cames InputA InputB Both Both Low High Alarms Alarms Alarm Alarm Off Manual off relay remains in the normal state On Manu
168. ed wire for heater leads Use a grounded receptacle for the instrument power cord Consider ground strapping the instrument chassis to other instruments or computers 3 6 Thermocouple Sensor Inputs Thermocouple Model 3060 3 6 1 Sensor Input Terminals 3 6 2 Thermocouple Installation 3 6 3 Grounding and Shielding 3 6 Thermocouple Sensor Inputs Thermocouple Model 3060 35 The information in this section is for a Model 335 configured with thermocouple sen sorinputs Thermocouple inputs are notinstalled on the standard Model 335 butcan be added by purchasing the Model 3060 dual thermocouple input option Refer to section 8 12 for installation of the Model 3060 Do not leave thermocouple inputs unconnected Short inputs when they are not in use Sensor connection is important when using thermocouples because the measured signal is small Many measurement errors can be avoided with proper sensor installa tion The ceramic terminal block has two thermocouple inputs and each input has two screw terminals one positive one negative FIGURE 3 7 Attach sensor leads to the screws on the ceramic terminal block Remove all insula tion from the ends ofthe thermocouple wires then tighten the screws down onto the thermocouple wires Keep the ceramic terminal blocks away from heat sources including sunlight and shield them from fans or room drafts INPUTA INPUT B iuba 4 1 N da f gt A s FIGURE 3 7 Thermocouple input de
169. ee cece eee e eee 31 3 5 2 Sensor Lead Cable eee eee 32 3 5 3 Grounding and Shielding Sensor LeadS e eee ee eee tenes 32 ISA Sensor Polaris dah ces ik e ea e ex eae e E eR ERES ERR REOR RU eats 33 3 5 5 Four Lead Sensor Measurement eee 33 3 5 6 Two Lead Sensor Measurement nee 34 3 5 7 Lowering Measurement Noise cece eee eee eee eee eeeees 34 3 6 Thermocouple Sensor Inputs Thermocouple Model 3060 35 3 6 1 Sensor nPUt Terminals ebd cte er e deeds da deemed oes 35 3 6 2 Thermocouple Installation ccc eee eee e eee e en ees 35 3 6 3 Grounding and Shielding cece eee e cence eee tenet test ee nnea 35 337 Heater OUtpUt SOLU iso deen terra sud rn ache Been P e Reb S eR von esas 36 3 7 1 Heater Output Description s 36 3 7 2 Heater Output Connectors m emen 36 3 7 3 Heater Output Wiring me 36 3 7 4 Heater Output NO S e nemen 37 3 7 5 Powering Output 2 Using an External Power Supply 37 3 7 5 1 Choosing a Power Supply ceeee cece eee eee teen eee teen ees 37 3 7 5 2 Power Supply Setup isses 38 3 7 5 3 Connecting to the Model 335 cece cece eee eee eees 38 3 7 5 4 Programming Voltages Under 10V cc cece cence eee eee ee 39 A l Generdlv ont 41 4 1 1 Understanding Menu Navigation cee eeceee cece ence ee eee eenees 41
170. egister as shown in FIGURE 6 1 An enable regis ter determines which bits in the corresponding event register will set the summary bit for the register set in the Status Byte The user may write to or read from an enable register Each event register bit is logically ANDed to the corresponding enable bit of the enable register When an enable register bit is set by the user and the correspond ing bitis set in the event register the output summary of the register will be set which in turn sets the summary bit ofthe Status Byte register 6 2 4 StatusSystem Overview 93 Standard event ENKHESENERENES o 8it Status register Not cme Not Not opc Bi ms a Ea Output or Ee em butter o CEE E EE iS standardevent 7 T6 5 4 T3 2 3 0 95 Status enable register Nor N m ESE ESE ron ru me ev is ove ise onc Name PON Power on CME Command error EXE Execution error YE Query error B GPCcOpemtoncompete Statusbyteregister 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 sit n ssa Name ROS Generate service request reset by serial poll D_ Lf ae MSS Read by sTB Service request 7 usd i Bit enable register Net T Nor loner Not SRE SRE seu Name OSB Operation summary bit operation 7 6 s 4 3 2 2 0 Bit mos seveeremest o condition register cow cat arune Roc rama pare vto aru Nama MSS Master summary status bit OPST ESB Event status summary bit o v Y d MAV Message available sum
171. er points is eight which settles to within six time constants of a step change value in 45 readings or 4 5 s The time constant time it takes to settle to within 36 8 ofthe step value after a step change fora given number of filter points can be derived using the following formula Model 335 Temperature Controller 4 4 9 Input Name 4 4 10 Temperature Limit 4 4 9 InputName 53 TC 2 0 1 In N N 1 where TC is one time constant and N is the number of filter points A reading is usually considered settled after six time constants TABLE 4 9 shows a sampling of filter settings and the resulting time constant settle time and equivalent noise bandwidth 6 time constants bandwidth 1 4 TC 0 14 s 0 9s 1 733 Hz 4 0 355 21s 0 719 Hz 8 0 75s 4 55 0 334 Hz 16 1 555 9 35 0 161 Hz 32 3 15s 18 95 0 079 Hz 64 6 355 38 15 0 039 Hz TABLE 4 9 Filter settle time and bandwidth The filter window is a limit for restarting the filter If a single reading is different from the filter value by more than the limit the instrument will assume the change was intentional and restart the filter Filter window is set in percent of full scale range Menu Navigation Input Setup gt nput A or B res Filter Off or On Input Setup nput A or B res Filter Points 2 to 64 Input Setup nput A or B Exter Filter Window 1 to 10 Default Filter gt Off
172. erates an Operation Complete event in the Event Status Register upon comple tion of all pending selected device operations Send it as the last command in a com mand string Operation Complete Query oPC term 1 term Places a 1 in the controller output queue upon completion of all pending selected device operations Send asthe last command in a command string Notthe same as 3KOPC Reset Instrument Command X RST term Sets controller parameters to power up settings SRE Input Format Remarks Example SRE Input Returned Format STB Input Returned Format Remarks TST Input Returned Format Remarks WAI Input Remarks 6 4 1 InterfaceCommands 109 Service Request Enable Register Command SRE bit weighting gt term nnn Each bit has a bit weighting and represents the enable disable mask of the corre sponding status flag bit in the Status Byte Register To enable a status flag bit send the command 3KSRE with the sum of the bit weighting for each desired bit Refer to section 6 2 6 for a list of status flags To enable status flags 4 5 and 7 send the command SRE 208 term 208 is the sum ofthe bit weighting for each bit Bit Bit Weighting Event Name 4 16 MAV 5 64 ESB 7 128 OSB Total 208 Service Request Enable Register Query SRE term lt bit weighting gt term nnn Referto section 6 2 6 fora list of status flags Status Byte Query STB term lt bit weigh
173. erature control is ensured throughout your full scale temperature range for excellent measurement reliability efficiency and throughput Two independent PID control outputs can be configured to supply 50 W and 25 Wor75 Wand 1W of heater power Precise control output is calculated based on yourtemperature set point and feedback from the control sensor Wide tuning parameters accommodate most cryogenic cooling systems and many high temperature ovens commonly used in laboratories PID values can be manually set for fine control or the improved auto tuning feature can automate the tuning process The Model 335 autotuning method calculates PID parameters and provides feedback to help build zonetables The setpoint ramp feature provides smooth continuous set point changes and predictable approaches to setpoint without the worry of over shoot or excessive settling times The instrument s zone tuning feature automatically switches temperature sensor inputs when your temperature range goes beyond the useable range of a given sensor This feature combined with the instruments ability to scale the sensor excitation through ten pre loaded current settings allows the Model 335 to provide continuous measurement and control from 300 mK to 1505 K Both control outputs are variable DC current sources referenced to chassis ground As a factory default Outputs 1 and 2 provide 50 W and 25 W of continuous power respectively both to a 50 Q or 25 Q load For increased
174. esistance The user max current setting is useful when using a non standard heater resistance value Refer to section 4 5 1 3 1 for more information on User Max Current TABLE 4 11 pro vides examples of different heater resistances and max current settings and the resulting maximum heater power The maximum heater powers in bold represent the discrete current limits available underthe Max Current setting for 25 O and 500 heaters The 1 732 A 75 W Max Current setting is only available on Output 1 when Output 2 is configured for Voltage Mode When Max Current is configured to 1 732 A on Output 1 the Current Mode setting will not be available on Output 2 In order to set Output 2 to Current Mode the Max Current setting on Output 1 must be configured to 1 41 A or less Menu Navigation Output Setup gt Output 1 or 2 mes Heater Resistance 25 Q or 50 Q Output Setup Output 1 or 2 mes Max Current User 0 707 A 1A or 1 732 A Default Heater Resistance gt 25 Q Output 1 Max Current 1 414 A Output 2 Max Current 1 A Interface Command HTRSET 4 5 1 3 1 User Max Current The provided discrete Max Current settings of 0 707 A 1A 1 414 A and 1 732 A are available for the common heater resistor values of 25 Q and 50 Q and for various common heater power ratings If you are using a heaterthat deviates from these common values the User Max Current setting is provided The optimal maximum current value should be calculated ba
175. eters become available in the Output Setup menu for setting the output For convenience the Control Input param eter can be used to assign a sensor input which then allows the output to be dis played on the front panel when using that sensor input s display mode When displayed on the front panel the Manual Output and Heater Range direct operation keys can be used for one touch access to these settings Refer to section 4 3 1 for details on configuring display modes Since there is no sensor feedback in open loop mode there is nothing to prevent the sys tem from being overheated We recommend using the Temperature Limit feature to help protect the system from overheating Refer to section 4 4 10 for temperature limits Menu Navigation Output Setup gt Output 1 or 2 Output Mode Open Loop Interface OUTMODE 4 5 1 7 Control Parameters Once the output mode is chosen the control parameters can be used to begin con trolling temperature Control Input is used to create a control loop The P I and D parameters provide fine tuning of the control algorithm Manual Output provides a baseline output power about which to control Setpoint is used to set the desired tar get temperature and Heater Range is used to turn on the control output as well as to set the power range of the output These parameters are described in detail in section 4 5 1 7 1 to section 4 5 1 7 8 4 5 1 7 1 Control Input For closed loop control Closed Loop PID Zone
176. finition and common connector polarities inputs shown shorted Thermocouples are commonly used in high temperature applications Cryogenic use of thermocouples offers some unique challenges A general sensor installation guide line is provided in section 2 4 Consider the following when using thermocouples at low temperatures W Thermocouple wire is generally more thermally conductive than other sensor lead wire Smaller gauge wire and more thermal anchoring may be needed to prevent leads from heating the sample m Attaching lead wires and passing them through vacuum tight connectors is often necessary in cryogenic systems Remember the thermocouple wire is the sensor any time it joins or contacts other metal there is potential for error B Temperature verification and calibration of room temperature compensation is difficult after the sensor is installed When possible keep a piece of scrap wire from each installation for future use m Thermocouples can be spot welded to the cryostat for good thermal anchoring as long as the cryostat has a potential close to earth ground Care must be taken to minimize the amount of noise contributed by ground loops when grounding thermocouple inputs For lowest measurement noise do not ground thermocouple sensors The instrument operates with slightly more noise if one of the thermocouples is grounded Be sure to minimize loop area when grounding both thermocouples The instrument does not offer a shiel
177. from defects in materials and workmanship for three years from the date of Purchaser s physical receipt of the Prod uct the Warranty Period If Lake Shore receives notice of any such defects during the Warranty Period and the defective Product is shipped freight prepaid back to Lake Shore Lake Shore will at its option either repair or replace the Product if it is so defective with out charge for parts service labor or associated customary return shipping cost to the Purchaser Replacement for the Product may be by either new or equivalent in performance to new Replacement or repaired parts or a replaced Product will be warranted foronly the unexpired portion ofthe original warranty or 90 days whichever is greater 2 Lake Shore warrants the Product only ifthe Product has been sold by an authorized Lake Shore employee sales representative dealer or an authorized Lake Shore original equipment manufacturer OEM 3 The Product may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use when it is originally sold to the Purchaser 4 The Warranty Period begins on the date of Purchaser s physical receipt of the Product or later on the date of operational training and verification OT amp V ofthe Product ifthe service is performed by Lake Shore provided that if the Purchaser schedules or delays the Lake Shore OT amp V for more than 30 days after delivery then the Warranty Period begins
178. functionality Output 2 can also be set to voltage mode When set to voltage mode it functions as a 10 V analog output while still providing 1W of heater power and full closed loop PID control capa bility While in this mode output 1 can provide up to 75 W of heater power to a 250 load Temperature limit settings forinputs are provided as a safeguard against system damage Each input is assigned a temperature limit and if any input exceeds that limit both control channels are automatically disabled The Model 335 is standard equipped with universal serial bus USB and parallel IEEE 488 interfaces In addition to gathering data nearly every function ofthe instrument can be controlled via computer interface You can download the Lake Shore curve handler software program to your computer to easily enter and manipulate sensor calibration curves for storage in the instrument s non volatile memory The USB interface emulates an RS 232C serial port at a fixed 57 600 baud rate but with the physical plug ins of a USB It also allows you to download firmware upgrades ensuring the most current firmware version is loaded into your instrument without having to physically change your instrument Both sensor inputs are equipped with a high and low alarm which offers latching and non latching operation The two relays can be used in conjunction with the alarms to alert you of a fault condition and perform simple on off control Relays can be assigne
179. ge status will be stage OO E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 126 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation WARMUP Input Format Example Remarks WARMUP Input Returned Format ZONE Input Format Remarks Example ZONE Input Format Returned Format Model 335 Temperature Controller Warmup Supply Parameter Command WARMUP lt output gt lt control gt lt percentage gt term n n nnn nn lt output gt control percentage Output 2 is the only valid entry and must be included Specifies the type of control used 0 Auto Off 1 Continuous Specifies the percentage of full scale 10 V Monitor Out voltage to apply to turn on the external power supply WARMUP 1 50 term Output 2 in Voltage mode will use continuous control with a 5 V 50 50 output voltage for activating the external power supply Warmup mode applies only to Output 2 in Voltage mode The Output Type parameter must be configured using the HTRSET command and the Output mode and Control Input parameters must be configured using the OUTMODE command Warmup Supply Parameter Query WARMUP output term control percentage term n nnn nn refer to command for description Control Loop Zone Table Parameter Command ZONE lt output gt lt zone gt lt upper bound gt lt P value I value D value gt lt mout value range input rate term n nn nnnnn nnnnn nnnnn nnnn nnnnn n n nnnn term
180. he high alarm Sets the value the source is checked against to activate low alarm Setsthe value that the source must change outside of an alarm condition to deactivate an unlatched alarm Specifies a latched alarm remains active after alarm condition correction where 0 off no latch and 1 2 on latch enable audible Specifies if the internal speaker will beep when an alarm condition occurs Valid entries O off 1 on visible Specifies ifthe Alarm LED on the instrument front panel will blink when an alarm condition occurs Valid entries O off 1 on Configures the alarm parameters for an input ALARM A O term turns off alarm checking for Input A ALARM B 1 270 0 0 0 1 1 1 term turns on alarm checking for input B activates high alarm if kelvin reading is over 270 and latches the alarm when kelvin reading falls below 270 Alarm condition will cause instrument to beep and the front panel Alarm LED to blink Input Alarm Parameter Query ALARM input term a input AorB lt off on gt lt high value gt lt low value gt lt deadband gt lt latch enable gt lt audible gt lt visible gt term n tnnnnnn tnnnnnn nnnnnn n n n refer to command for description Input Alarm Status Query ALARMST input term a input A B high state gt lt low state term n n high state 0 Off 1 On lt low state O Off 1 On Reset Alarm Status Command ALMRST term Clears both th
181. hree together improve accu racy to room temperature and above m Point three calibration data point near room temperature 305 K Temperatures outside the range of 200 K to 350 K are not allowed SoftCal Point One SoftCal Point Two SoftCal Point Three Liquid helium Liquid nitrogen Room temperature boiling point boiling point point 4 2K 77 35 K 305 K qf tt 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 2 10K 50 100K 200 325 K FIGURE 5 9 Acceptable temperature range for DT 400 series silicon diode SoftCal sensors 5 10 2 SoftCal Accuracy with DT 400 Series Silicon Diode Sensors 5 10 3 SoftCal With Platinum Sensors 5 10 2 SoftCal Accuracy with DT 400 Series Silicon Diode Sensors 83 A SoftCal calibration is only as good as the accuracy ofthe calibration points The accuracies listed for SoftCal assume 0 01 K for 4 2 K liquid helium 0 05 K for 77 35 K liquid nitrogen and 305 K room temperature points If you are performing the SoftCal with Lake Shore instruments note that the boiling point of liquid cryo gen though accurate is affected by atmospheric pressure Use calibrated standard sensors if possible One point SoftCal calibrations for applications under 30 K are performed at liquid helium 4 2 K temperature Accuracy for the DT 470 SD 13 diode is 0 5 K from 2 K to 30 K with no accuracy change above 30 K Two point SoftCal calibrations for applications above 30 K
182. i pr 61 4 5 1 7 6 Setpolht iii ae 62 4 5 1 7 7 Setpoint Ramplhg csset eee teh desea ter ph ys 63 4 5 1 7 8 HeaterRange sins ecco EUR ie 64 451 749 ALL OFE wis essct ei on CEU Ia ex rea baie a DR 64 4 5 2 Voltage OUtpUt occ eee re ETPIDYYER REED a 3 ANY vus 64 4 5 2 1 Warm Up Supply i eicere rete pt e sad ere pg 65 4 5 2 2 MORItOMOUT siii RR ERRORI RERO TAY A EY ei 65 4 6 nterfaGe i eres exa iii qaa Spree ded PROS 65 46 1 VSB MTS 65 4 6 2 VWEEE 4 88 s eset ia Me Mid amem feexR eel BENE 65 4 6 2 1 Remote Localb erre ARA 65 4 7 Locking and Unlocking the Keypad cece cece eect eee eee e eee e eee e ees 65 El akeShore www lakeshore com Chapter 5 Advanced Operation Chapter 6 Computer Interface Operation Model 335 Temperature Controller bl Generale e 67 5 2 AUTOLUME sii a 67 53 ZONE SENINE ss scritte apre ao 69 5 4 BipolarControl arno ia re a ana 71 5 5 Warm p SUDDIY nico O e t us i 71 oso Warm Up Percentap e ii a ira 72 5 5 2 Warm UP Comtrl citi kpa EA EEE AEEA A E E 72 5 6 Mohltor OUt aise neces ebur ia 72 5 61 Monitor UMTS ue otro etr ERR ES RO ROUES Nr oett ees 73 5 6 1 1 Polarity and Monitor Out Scaling Parameters 73 5 7 Alarms ANG Relays scwetivan sree seven ren bb eia 4 ARR e er H ied i 74 VAM RP 74 5 7 11 Alarm Annunclators ronnie 74 5 7 1 2 Alarm arching sins cec res pecie aab RR d a been 75 57
183. ic Compatibility EMC of electronic equipment is a growing concern worldwide Emissions of and immunity to electromagnetic interference is now part ofthe design and manufacture of most electronics To qualify forthe CE Mark the Model 335 meets or exceeds the requirements of the European EMC Directive 89 335 EEC as a CLASS A product A Class A product is allowed to radiate more RF than a Class B product and must include the follow ing warning WARNING This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures The instrument was tested under normal operating conditions with sensor and interface cables attached If the installation and operating instructions in the User s Manual are followed there should be no degradation in EMC performance This instrument is not intended for use in close proximity to RF transmitters such as two way radios and cell phones Exposure to RF interference greater than that found in a typical laboratory environment may disturb the sensitive measurement circuitry ofthe instrument Pay special attention to instrument cabling Improperly installed cabling may defeat even the best EMC protection Forthe best performance from any precision instrument follow the grounding and shielding instructions in the User s Manual In addition the installer ofthe Model 335 should consider the following Shield measurement and computer
184. ied including but not limited to the implied warranties or conditions of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Specifically except as provided herein Model 335 Temperature Controller LakeShore undertakes no responsibility that the products will be fit for any particular purpose for which you may be buying the Products Any implied warranty is limited in duration to the warranty period Nooralor written information or advice given by the Company its Agents or Employees shall create a warranty or in any way increase the scope ofthis limited warranty Some countries states or provinces do notallow limitations on an implied warranty so the above limita tion or exclusion might not apply to you This warranty gives you spe cific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country to country state to state or province to province 8 Further with regard to the United Nations Convention for Interna tional Sale of Goods CISC if CISG is found to apply in relation to this agreement which is specifically disclaimed by Lake Shore then this limited warranty excludes warranties that a the Product is fit for the purpose for which goods of the same description would ordinarily be used b the Product is fit for any particular purpose expressly or impliedly made known to Lake Shore at the time of the conclusion of the contract c the Product is contained or packaged in a manner usual for such goods or in
185. iffi culty is encountered it is recommended to gain experience with the system at tem peratures several degrees away from the limit and gradually approach it in small steps Keep an eye on temperature sensitivity Sensitivity not only affects control stability but it also contributes to the overall control system gain The large changes in sensi tivity that make some sensors so useful may make it necessary to retune the control loop more often For closed loop operation the Model 335 temperature controller uses an algorithm called PID control The control equation for the PID algorithm has three variable terms proportional P integral I and derivative D See FIGURE 2 2 Changing these variables for best control of a system is called tuning The PID equation in the Model 335 is Heater output P e I e dt D where the error e is defined as e setpoint feedback reading Proportional is discussed in section 2 7 1 Integral is discussed in section 2 7 2 Deriv ative is discussed in section 2 7 3 Finally the manual heater output is discussed in section 2 7 4 2 7 1 Proportional P 2 7 2 Integral 1 2 7 3 Derivative D 2 7 4 Manual Output 2 7 1 Proportional P 23 The proportional term also called gain must have a value greater than 0 for the con trol loop to operate The value ofthe proportional term is multiplied by the error e which is defined as the difference between the setpoint and feedb
186. igation Relays Relay 1 Relay 2 Mode Off On Alarm Relays Relay 1 Relay 2 Mode Alarm Alarm Input Input A B Alarm to Follow Low High Both Default Mode Off Alarm Input gt Input A Alarm to Follow Both Interface Command RELAY 5 8 Curve Numbers and Storage 5 8 1 Curve Header Parameters 5 8 2 Curve Breakpoints 5 8 Curve Numbersand Storage 77 The Model 335 has 20 standard curve locations numbered 1 through 20 At present not all locations are occupied by curves the others are reserved for future updates If a standard curve location is in use the curve can be viewed using the view operation Standard curves cannot be changed by the user and reserved locations are not avail able for user curves The Model 335 has 39 user curve locations numbered 21 through 59 Each location can hold from 2 to 200 data pairs breakpoints including a value in sensor units and a corresponding value in kelvin Using fewer than 200 breakpoints will not increase the number of available curve locations SoftCal generated curves are stored in user curve locations Each curve has parameters that are used for identification and to allow the instru mentto use the curve effectively The parameters must be set correctly before a curve can be used for temperature conversion or temperature control m Curve Number 1 to 59 m Name defaultstothe name User Curve for front panel entry A curve name of up to 15 charac
187. inappropriate heater range is potentially dan gerous to some loads so the Model 335 does not automate that step ofthe tuning process When Autotune is initiated step changes are applied to the setpoint and the system response is observed to determine the best tuning parameters The Autotuning message appears when autotuning and the display is configured to show the output ofthe control loop being tuned The message blinks to indicate that the algorithm is still processing and displays the current stage of the process such as Stage 3 of 7 If the tuning process completes successfully then the message is removed and the new PID parameters are configured If the algorithm fails the mes sage stops blinking to indicate that it is no longer processing and a failure message appears to indicate which stage ofthe process failed There are situations where Autotune is notthe answer The algorithm can be fooled when cooling systems are very fast very slow have a large thermal lag or have a non linear relationship between heater power and load temperature If a load can reach a new setpoint in under 10 s with an appropriate I setting 500 the cooling system is too fast for Autotuning Systems with a very small thermal mass can be this fast Add ing massis a solution but is unappealing to users who need the speed for fast cycle times Manual tuning is not difficult on these systems because new settings can be tested very quickly Some systems a
188. instrument m Amessage of S OVER or S UNDER on the display indicates that the measured ther mocouple input is over or under the 50 mV range 5 9 2 Erase Curve 5 9 3 Copy Curve 5 10 SoftCal 5 9 2 EraseCurve 81 User curves that are no longer needed may be erased Erase Curve sets all identifica tion parameters to default and blanks all breakpoint values To perform the Erase Curve operation follow this procedure 1 Press Curve Entry scroll to Erase Curve and press Enter 2 Scrolltothe desired curve and press Enter 3 Choose Yes at the confirmation message to finalize the operation 4 Tocancelthe operation either choose Noto the confirmation message or press Escape Menu Navigation Curve Entry gt Erase Curve 21 59 Delete Curve Yes No Interface Command CRDEL Temperature curves can be copied from one location inside the Model 335 to another This is a good way to make small changes to an existing curve Curve copy may also be necessary if the user needs the same curve with two different temperature limits or needs to extend the range of a standard curve The curve that is copied from is always preserved The copy routine allows you to overwrite an existing user curve Please ensure the curve number you are writing to is correct before proceeding with the copy curve operation To perform the Copy Curve operation follow this procedure 1 Press Curve Entry scroll to Copy Curve and press Enter 2 Scro
189. ion 3 7 To set Heater Range first configure the front panel display to show the desired control loop information then use the Heater Range key on the front panel A quick way to access the setting if the control loop information is not already displayed is to use the front panel A or B keys to temporarily display the control loop information while the new setting is entered Refer to section 4 2 for details on configuring the front panel display Menu Navigation Heater Range Off On Low Med High Default Off Interface Command RANGE 4 5 1 7 9 ALLOFF The ALLOFF key is provided as a means of shutting down all control outputs with one key It is equivalentto setting the Heater Range parameter of both outputs to Off This function is always active even if the keypad is locked or when it is in remote mode The voltage output available for Output 2 is a variable DC voltage source that has a range from 10 V to 10 V The voltage is generated by a 16 bit D A converter with resolution of 0 3 mV or 0 003 of full scale This output can be configured to Closed Loop PID Zone Open Loop Warm Up Supply or Monitor Out modes The Closed Loop PID mode can be used to control temperature It can also be set up for bipolar PID con trol which is useful when controlling a thermoelectric device Refer to section 2 11 for more information on setting up thermoelectric devices The Open Loop mode can be used to set the output to a specific consta
190. isplayed output if applicable 4 5 1 7 5 All Off Press this key to set the range for all outputs to Off not applicable for Monitor Out mode 4 5 1 7 9 TABLE 4 2 Direct operation keys 4 2 1 2 Menu Number Pad Keys input setup Press this key to configure features related to the inputs 4 4 for sensor input setup 4 4 7 for curve selection Ollitput setup Press this key to configure features related to the outputs including configuration of 45 control loops Display setup Presss this key to configure the display 4 3 Max Min reset Press this key to reset the maximum and minimum readings for both inputs 4 4 12 Cus dii o di copy and erase temperature curves and 59 Zone settings Press this key to enter user specified control parameters for up to ten temperature zones 5 3 Autotune Press this key to configure and execute the Autotune algorithm 5 2 Remote local Press this key to toggle the IEEE 488 Remote mode 4 6 2 1 Interface Press this key to configure the USB and IEEE 488 interfaces 4 6 1 for USB 4 6 2 for IEEE 488 Relays Press this key to configure the two rear panel relays 5 7 2 Alarm Press this key to configure the Alarm feature 5 7 1 A Press this key to navigate menus and to select parameters N A v Press this key to navigate menus and to select parameters N A Escape exit Press this key to cancel a number entry or exit the menu Press and hold for 3 sto reset N A menu instrument parameters to factory default values Enter Press this key t
191. ive temperature coefficient NTC RTDs Autorange mode automatically scales excitation current in NTC RTDs to reduce self heating at low temperatures as sensor resistance changes by many orders of magnitude Temperatures down to 1 4 K can be measured and con trolled using silicon or GaAlAs diodes Software selects the appropriate excitation cur rent and signal gain levels when the sensor type is entered via the instrument front panel To increase your productivity the unique zone setting feature automatically switches sensor inputs enabling you to measure temperatures from 300 mK to over 1 500 K without interrupting your experiment The Model 335 includes standard temperature sensor response curves for silicon diodes platinum RTDs ruthenium oxide RTDs and thermocouples Non volatile memory can also store up to 39 200 point CalCurves for Lake Shore calibrated tem perature sensors or user curves A built in SoftCal algorithm can be used to generate curves for silicon diodes and platinum RTDs that can be stored as user curves Tem perature sensor calibration data can be easily loaded into the Model 335 tempera ture controller and manipulated using the Lake Shore curve handler software program 1 1 2 Temperature Control 1 1 3 Interface 1 1 2 TemperatureControl 3 Providing a total of 75 W of heater power the Model 335 is the most powerful half racktemperature controller available Designed to deliver very clean heater power precise temp
192. l not directly apply to the Model 335 such as the Auto tune control modes Attempts to set an inapplicable setting will be ignored As a reference the following commands are interpreted differently depending on the emulation mode setting HTR HTRST RANGE ANALOG DISPFLD IEEE TUNEST INTYPE ZONE The Model 335 must be configured to the appropriate emulation mode in order for the commands to be interpreted correctly The PID Scaling mode determines whether the Model 335 emulates the control scal ing ofthe Model 331 and Model 332 In the Model 331 and Model 332 temperature control is calculated using sensor units Sensor units can cause the control response to be non linear across temperature ranges if the sensor s temperature response curve is non linear Using units of temperature in the PID control algorithm allows the control response to be linear throughout all temperatures leaving only the non linearities in the system to require new PID values Therefore we recommend that you set the PID Scaling mode to 335 Menu Navigation Interface rs gt Emulation Mode Model 331 Model 332 Eris gt PID Scaling 335 331 332 Interface Command EMUL Models 331 and 332 only supported baud rates of 300 1200 and 9600 When not configured for Model 331 or Model 332 emulation the Model 335 only supports a baud rate of 57600 However in Model 331 or Model 332 Emulation mode the baud rate setting becomes available for configuring va
193. larm Off On Alarm iInput A B Alarm On Lou Setpoint see note below Alarminput A B gt Alarm On res High Setpoint gt see note below Low and High Setpoint limits are determined by the Preferred Units of the associated sen sor input Defaults Alarm Off Low Setpoint 0 0000 K High Setpoint 231000 K Interface Command ALARM 5 7 1 1 Alarm Annunciators The Alarm LED annunciator steadily displays when any alarm that is enabled also has the Visible parameter enabled The annunciator flashes when an alarm with the Visi ble parameter enabled activates An input need not be displayed forthe system Alarm annunciator to indicate input alarm status but if the input is displayed on the front panel then the reading will alternate between the alarm status message and the actual reading If the Audible parameter is set to On for an enabled alarm then the beeper inside the instrument will sound when the alarm activates The two relays on the Model 335 can also be tied to alarm functions as described in section 5 7 2 You may wantto set the Visible parameter to Off ifthere is no need for showing the alarm state on the front panel for instance if you are usingthe alarm function to trigger a relay The Audible parameter can be set to Off as well to keep the audible alarm from sounding when an alarm istriggered Menu Navigation Alarm gt Input A B gt Alarm On res Visible Off On Alarminput A B gt Alarm On Ester Audib
194. lay Mode Two Input Loop A Two Input Loop B Two Loop Custom Input A Input A Max Min Input B Input B Max Min Default Custom Interface Command DISPLAY 4 3 1 1 Two Input One Loop Modes The Two Input One Loop display mode provides a preconfigured display that contains the most relevant information for the common configuration of one control loop and one secondary sensor In this mode both sensor readings are displayed on the top line in units matching the Preferred Units setting for each Depending on which loop you need to monitor you will either select Two Input Loop A or Two Input Loop B display mode For the loop you monitor that sensor reading will appear in the top left display quadrant and the other sensor reading will appear in the right display quadrant The output number control setpoint heater output percentage and heater range information forthe control loop associated with the monitored input are displayed in the bottom line FIGURE 4 3 illustrates these two displays 4 3 1 DisplayModes 45 FIGURE 4 3 Left Two Input Loop A showing input A and its associated information monitored Right Two Input Loop B showing input B and its associated information monitored Menu Navigation Display Setup Display Mode Two Input Loop A Two Input Loop B Default Custom Interface Command DISPLAY 4 3 1 2 Two Loop Mode Two Loop mode provides a preconfigured display for the common configuration of two control loops
195. lculated as the lead resistance times the current typically 10 pA For example a 10 Q lead resistance times 10 pA results in a 0 1 mV error in voltage Given the sensitivity of a silicon diode at 4 2 K the error in temperature would be only 3 mK At 77 K the sensitivity of a silicon diode is lower so the error would be close to 50 mK Again this may not be a problem for every user Connectors are also a big source of error when making 2 lead measurements Con nector contact resistance is unpredictable and changes with time and temperature Minimize interconnections when making 2 lead measurements Refer to FIGURE 3 6 for an image of a 2 lead sensor measurement V FIGURE 3 6 2 lead sensor measurement Good instrument hardware setup technique is one ofthe least expensive ways to reduce measurement noise The suggestions fall into two categories 1 do not let noise from the outside enter into the measurement and 2 let the instrument isolation and other hardware features work to their best advantage Here are some further suggestions Use 4 lead measurement whenever possible Do not connect sensor leads to chassis or earth ground Use twisted shielded cable outside the cooling system Attach the shield pin on the sensor connector to the cable shield Do not attach more than one cable shield at the other end of the cable Run different inputs and outputs in their own shielded cable Use twisted wire inside the cooling system Use twist
196. le Off On Default Visible gt On Audible gt On Interface Command ALARM 5 7 1 Alarms 75 5 7 1 2 Alarm Latching m Latching Alarms often used to detect faults in a system or experiment that requires operator intervention The alarm state remains visible to the operator for diagnostics even if the alarm condition is removed Relays often signal remote monitors or for added safety take critical equipment off line Latched alarms can be cleared by pressing Alarm and selecting Yes to the Reset Alarm prompt Select No to the Reset Alarm prompt to enter the Alarm Setup menu m Non Latching Alarms often tied to relay operation to control part of a system or experiment The alarm state follows the reading value The dead band parameter can prevent relays from turning on and off repeatedly when the sensor input reading is near an alarm setpoint FIGURE 5 6 illustrates the interaction between alarm setpoint and dead band in non latching operation With the high alarm setpoint at 100 K and the dead band at 5 K the high alarm triggers when sensor input temperature increases to 100 K and it will not deactivate until temperature drops to 95 K In addition the same 5 K dead bandis applied to the low alarm setpoint as well High alarm activated EN High alarm setpoint High alarm deactivated 100K Se 95K Temperature reading Alarm latching off Deadband 5K 55K Low alarm setpoint 50K Low alarm activat
197. le to provide sufficient heating power to warm the system The Model 335 can provide up to 75 W of power from Output 1 up to 25 W of power from Output 2 in current mode and up to 1 W of power from Output 2 in voltage mode TABLE 2 2 provides the current and voltage limits as well as the resulting maximum power for each output for the 25 O and 50 O settings using nominal heater load values 250 setting 25 Q heater 50 Q setting 50 Q heater Current limit 141A 1A Output 1 Voltage limit 50V 50V Max power 75W 50W 5 i Current limit 1A 0 71A utput ZR current mode Voltage limit 35 4 V 354V Max power 25W 25W z Current limit 100mA utput Sn voltage mode Voltage limit 10V Max power 1W TABLE 2 2 Current and voltage limits with resulting max power Even though the Model 335 heater outputs are current sources Output 2 in current mode they have a voltage limit called the compliance voltage This compliance volt age also limits maximum power So for heater values other than 25 O or 50 O the maximum power must be calculated using the following equations P 12R and P V2 R where P is maximum power is max current V is max voltage and Ris the heater resistance The current and voltage limits are in place at the same time so the smaller of the two computations gives the maximum power available to the heater When using Output 2 in voltage mode the output behaves as a voltage source
198. limited to above 300 mK in its standard configuration Temperature sensor sensitivity is a measure of how much a sensor signal changes when the temperature changes It is an important sensor characteristic because so many measurement parameters are related to it Resolution accuracy noise floor and even control stability depend on sensitivity Many sensors have different sensitiv ities at different temperatures For example a platinum sensor has good sensitivity at highertemperatures but has limited use below 30 K because its sensitivity drops sharply It is difficult to determine if a sensor has adequate sensitivity over the experi mental temperature range This manual has specifications section 1 3 that include sensor sensitivity translated into temperature resolution and accuracy at different points This is typical sensor response and can be used as a guide when choosing a sensor to be used with the Model 335 E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 14 CHAPTER 2 Cooling System Design and Temperature Control 2 2 3 Environmental Conditions 2 2 4 Measurement Accuracy 2 2 5 Sensor Package 2 3 Sensor Calibrations Model 335 Temperature Controller The experimental environment is also important when choosing a sensor Environ mental factors such as high vacuum magnetic field corrosive chemicals or even radiation can limit the use of some types of sensors Lake Shore has devoted much time to developing sensor packages that withstan
199. ll be displayed to indicate the location to which the breakpoint pair was moved FIGURE 5 8 Left Scroll to highlight a breakpoint number Middle Press the enter key to highlight the sensor value of the selected pair Right Press the enter key again and the temperature value is highlighted Menu Navigation Curve Entry Edit 21 59 tres Curve Points 1 200 Interface Command CRVPT EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 80 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation Model 335 Temperature Controller 5 9 1 2 Add a New Breakpoint Pair The last breakpoint of a curve is signified by the first pairthat contains a O value for both the temperature and sensor portions Curves are limited to 200 breakpoint pairs so if 200 pairs already exist then the 200th pair will be the last pair in the list To add a new breakpoint pairto a curve that has less than 200 pairs scroll to the end of the list and edit the 0 value pair by following the procedure for editing a breakpoint pair in section 5 9 1 1 If the curve still contains less than 200 pairs a new 0 value breakpoint will be added to the end ofthe list forentering another new breakpoint pair Menu Navigation Curve Entry Edit 21 59 Ere Curve Points 1 200 Interface Command CRVPT 5 9 1 3 Delete a Breakpoint Pair To delete a breakpoint pair scroll to the desired breakpoint number then enter a O value for both the sensor and temperature values by following the procedure for edit ing a breakp
200. ll to the desired curve to copy and press Enter Scroll to the desired user curve location to copy to and press Enter Choose Yes at the confirmation message to finalize the operation 4 Tocancelthe operation either choose No to the confirmation message or press Escape Ww Menu Navigation Curve Entry Copy Curve Copy Curve from 1 to 59 Copy Curve to 21 to 59 Interface Command No interface command directly corresponds to the copy curve operation The CRVHDR and CRVPT commands can be used to read curve information from one curve location and write that information to another curve location The Model 335 allows you to perform inexpensive sensor calibrations with a set of algorithms called SoftCal The two SoftCal algorithms in the Model 335 work with DT 400 Series silicon diode sensors and platinum sensors They create a new temper ature response curve from the standard curve and known data points entered by the user The new curve loads into one of the user curve locations 21 to 59 in the instru ment The following sections describe the data points needed from the user and the expected accuracy of the resulting curves A feature similar to SoftCal is available for compensating thermocouples using the Curve Handler program Both DT 400 Series and platinum SoftCal algorithms require a standard curve that is already present in the Model 335 When you enter the type of sensor being cali brated select the correct
201. location Erase Curve 5 9 2 Standard curves cannot be erased Copy allows the userto copy a curve from any location to any user Copy Curve Py Py 0a y y 5 9 3 curve location Curves cannot be copied into standard curve locations Allows creation of a new temperature curve from a standard curve and SoftCal 5 10 known data points entered by the user TABLE 5 5 Front panel curve entry operations Menu Navigation Curve Entry Edit Erase Copy SoftCal The Edit Curve operation is used to enter a new curve or editan existing user curve Only user curves 21 to 59 can be edited Entering the identification parameters associated with the curve is as important as entering the breakpoints Curve header parameters are listed in TABLE 5 3 Typical curve parameters for common sensors are listed in TABLE 5 4 Read this section completely and gather all necessary data before beginning the process 5 9 1 EditCurve 79 Ifthe curve you wish to enter has similar parameters as an existing curve first copy the similar curve as described in Section 5 2 4 to a new location then edit the curve to the desired parameters To perform the Edit Curve operation follow this procedure 1 Press Curve Entry scroll to Edit Curve and press Enter 2 Scrolltothe desired curve and press Enter again 3 Editthe curve header parameters using the standard keypad operation methods described in section 4 2 3 Once curve header parameters are entered the C
202. lues of 300 1200 9600 or 57600 When changing the Emulation mode back to None the baud rate setting is returned to the Model 335 default and the non configurable value of 57600 Menu Navigation Interface es Emulation Mode Model 331 Model 332 Exter Baud Rate 57600 9600 1200 300 Interface Command BAUD 5 11 6 Hardware Differences 5 11 6 Hardware Differences 87 One ofthe most significant hardware differences between the Model 335 Model 331 and Model 332 is the Loop 2 or Output 2 control output The Model 331 provides a 10 V voltage source output with 100 mA maximum current providing 1 W into a 100 Q heater The Model 332 provides a 10 V voltage source output with 1 A maxi mum current providing up to 10 W into a 10 O heater The Model 335 provides both a 10 V voltage source with 100 mA maximum current which is the exact same hard ware as the Model 331 and a 1 A current source which can be used to emulate the Loop 2 output of the Model 332 into a 10 O heater TABLE 5 9 provides a summary of these differences Controller Output 2 type Voltage source output Maximum current TEE Model 331 Voltage 10V 100 mA 1W into 1000 mulation Mode Model 335 Voltage 10V 100 mA 1Winto 1000 Model 332 Voltage 10V 1A 10 W into 100 332 Emulation Mode E Model 335 Current 35 4V 1A configurable 10 W into 100 g TABLE 5 9 Output 2 hardware comparisons between Models 331 332 and 335
203. ly known as Centigrade Originally devised by Anders Celsius 1701 1744 a Swedish astronomer m Fahrenheit abbreviation F A temperature scale that registers the freezing point of water as 32 F and the boiling point as 212 F under normal atmospheric pressure Originally devised by Gabriel Fahrenheit 1686 1736 a German phys icist residing in Holland developed use of mercury in thermometry m Kelvin abbreviation K An absolute scale of temperature the zero point of which is approximately m 273 15 C scale units are equal in magnitude to Celsius degrees Originally devised by Lord Kelvin William Thompson 1824 1907 a British physicist mathematician and inventor The three temperature scales are graphically compared in Figure A 1 Boiling point of water 373 15 K 100 C 212 F Freezing point of water 273 15 K 0 C 32 F Absolute zero OK 273 15 C 459 67 F kelvin Celsius Fahrenheit FIGURE A 1 To convert Fahrenheit to Celsius subtract 32 from F then divide by 1 8 or ec F 32 1 8 To convert Celsius to Fahrenheit multiply C by 1 8 then add 32 or F 1 8 x C 32 To convert Fahrenheitto kelvin first convert F to C then add 273 15 To convert Celsius to kelvin add 273 15 E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 148 Appendices ces eta ES ee eae 0 292 180 93 15 129 67 89 82
204. mal Conductivity eee rte tente tere PRA Re EUPIAR KG Gu en Rd 21 2 62 Thermal Lag is eeepc ESPERE CEN DEED ELE 21 2 6 3 TWO SENSORAPPFOACh isi ike be ra e e UR a 21 2 6 4 Thermal Mass ssec eo aed e uda dou ar 22 2 6 5 System Non Linearity i 22 El akeShore www lakeshore com Chapter 3 Installation Chapter 4 Operation Model 335 Temperature Controller 2 7 PID Control iaia 22 2 74 Proportional P edocet eer Ete ei eb CIEP Pp RO RUDIIA se dare 23 2 7 2 Integral I care ella Lei 23 2443 Derivative D sce iSo EUR OM RT ODER E ee pague oe 23 2 7 4 Manual Output iere a Er 23 2 8 Manual TUNNE PPP 25 2 8 1 Setting Heater Range euo oia tAn T C EROELEDU ERI ERE YE MERO 25 2 8 2 Tuning Proportional ceste ter ii a ede a 25 2 8 3 Tuning Integra arena 26 2 8 4 Tuning DerlVatiVe ss lina iaia 27 2 9 AULOLUMING sissi Liar il AI iii 27 2 10 Zone TU MING spit pi i ER ae 28 211 Thermoelectric DEVICES uri ii 28 SNC REED 29 3 2 Inspection and UNPACKING 1 2 cesses see eee e RR RTERCUD DRE XR nets 29 3 3 Rear Panel Definition ses 30 34 tineInputAssembly Ji cise erre ces ra retire nba Ei obe e e eR e 30 SAL die VoltdBe dieti met n ere rbd geo nebat RE RN UR TRI 30 3 4 2 Line Fuse and Fuse Holder iii 31 34 3 ROWED COR dde s eee Vee 31 3 4 4 PowerSwitch i 31 3 5 Diode Resistor SensorInputs emen 31 3 5 1 Sensor Input Connector and Pinout eee e
205. mary bit Operation 7 Te s 4 3 2 1 9 sit event register OPSTR cow cuc arune NRDG papa mra OVLD JAI Name gt z o E c z o Ha operationevent 7 J 6 5 4 5 2 3 6 amp oS o once onn rame COM Processor communication error CAL Calibration error ATUNE Autotune process completed NRDG New sensor reading RAMP1 Loop 1 ramp done RAMP2 Loop 2 ramp done OVLD Sensor overload ALARM Sensor alarming FIGURE 6 1 Model 335 status system 31 akeShore www lakeshore com 94 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation 6 2 4 4 Status Byte Register The Status Byte register typically referred to as the Status Byte is a non latching read only register that contains all ofthe summary bits from the register sets The status ofthe summary bits are controlled from the register sets as explained in sec tion 6 2 4 1 to section 6 2 4 3 The Status Byte also contains the Request for Service RQS Master Summary Status MSS bit This bitis used to control the Service Request hardware line on the bus and to report if any of the summary bits are set via the STB command The status of the RQS MSS bit is controlled by the summary bits and the Service Request Enable Register 6 2 4 5 Service Request Enable Register The Service Request Enable Register determines which summary bits in the Status Byte will set the RQS MSS bit ofthe Status Byte The user may write to or read from the Service Request E
206. mber data using the number pad keys Num ber pad keys include the numbers 0 9 and decimal point The Proportional control parameter is an example ofa parameter that requires number entry Dur ing a number entry sequence use the number entry keys to enter the number value press Enter to accept the new data Press Escape once to clear the entry and press it twice to return to the Menu Navigation mode EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 44 CHAPTER 4 Operation 4 3 Display Setup 4 3 1 Display Modes Model 335 Temperature Controller m Alpha Numeric Entry allows you to enter character data using the number pad keys and the A and W keys The input sensor name is an example of a parameter that requires Alpha Numeric Entry To edit an Alpha Numeric parameter press A or V Once in edit mode press A or V to cycle through the upper and lower case English alphabet numerals 0 through 9 and a small selection of common symbols Press Enterto advance the cursorto the next position or savethe string and return from Alpha Numeric Entry mode if itis in the last position Press Escape to move the cursor back one position orto cancel all changes and move on from the next menu parameter if the cursor is at the first position Press any ofthe number pad keys except for to enter that character into the string and advance the cursorto the next position automatically or to save the string and return to Menu Navigation mode if the cursor is in the
207. membering or determining the location to which a sensor input is associated These features combined with USB and IEEE 488 interfaces and intuitive menu structure and logic supports efficiency and ease of use As a replacement to our popular Model 331 and 332 temperature controllers the Model 335 offers software emulation modes for literal drop in compatibility The commands you are accustomed to sending to the Model 331and 332 will either be interpreted directly or translated to the most appropriate Model 335 setting The Model 335 comes standard equipped with all ofthe functionality ofthe controllers it replaces but offers additional features that save you time and money With the Model 335 you get a temperature controller you control from the world leader in cryogenic thermometry The Model 335 offers two standard sensor inputs that are compatible with diode and RTD temperature sensors The field installable Model 3060 option adds thermocou ple functionality to both inputs Sensor inputs feature a high resolution 24 bit analog to digital converter and each of the two powered outputs function as separate current sources Both sensor inputs are optically isolated from other circuits to reduce noise and to deliver repeatable sensor measurements Current reversal eliminates thermal electromagnetic field EMF errors in resistance sensors Ten excitation currents facilitate temperature measurement and control down to 300 mK using appropriate negat
208. menu navigation section See FIGURE 4 2 and TABLE 4 1 for an explana tion ofthe conventions used in the menu navigation A B C D E f ty hey Input Setup gt Input A or B Enter gt Room Compensation Off or On FIGURE 4 2 Menu navigation example A Bold Typically the first word in the menu navigation is in bold type which indicates the first key you will need to press The arrow indicates that the screen is advancing to the next screen In the menu navi B gt gation the item that follows the arrow is the next item you would see on the screen or the next action that you will need to perform Often the words that follow the arrow are in italic type The italic type indicate that C Italic type i i yp there is a setting that needs to be selected The items that follow the italicized word and which are in parentheses are the avail D Parentheses able selections to which you can set the desired feature E pig This symbol indicates that you will need to press Enter until you arrive at the desired feature TABLE 4 1 Menu navigation key E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 42 CHAPTER 4 Operation This section provides a description ofthe front panel controls and indicators for the 4 2 Front Panel Description Model 335 4 2 1 Keypad The keypad is divided into two sections The direct operation section includes all keys Definitions to the right of the display and the menu number pad section includes the standard
209. mmand 3KESE with the sum ofthe bit weighting for each desired bit Refer to section 6 2 5 for a list of event flags To enable event flags 0 4 and 7 send the command KESE 145 term 145 is the sum ofthe bit weighting for each bit Bit Bit Weighting Event Name 0 T OPC 2 4 QXE 4 16 EXE 5 32 CME 7 128 PON Total 181 Event Status Enable Register Query ESE term lt bit weighting gt term nnn Refer to section 6 2 5 for a list of event flags EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 108 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation ESR Input Returned Format Remarks IDN Input Returned Format Example 3 OPC Input Remarks OPC Returned Remarks 3 RST Input Remarks Model 335 Temperature Controller Standard Event Status Register Query ESR term bit weighting nnn The integer returned represents the sum ofthe bit weighting ofthe event flag bits in the Standard Event Status Register Referto section 6 2 5 for a list of event flags Identification Query IDN term lt manufacturer gt lt model gt lt instrument serial option serial firmware version term s 4 s 8 s 7 s 7 n n manufacturer Manufacturer ID model Instrument model number lt instrument serial Instrument serial number lt option card serial Option card serial number firmware version Instrument firmware version LSCI MODEL335 1234567 1234567 1 0 Operation Complete Command 3X OPC term Gen
210. mode if so desired The PID Scaling mode and baud rate settings are not automatically configured when the Emulation mode is configured to Model 331 or Model 332 These settings must be manually configured to meet your application needs Note that the PID Scaling mode and baud rate will be returned to the default state and will not be configurable when the Emulation mode is set to None Referto section 5 11 4 for information on the PID Scaling mode and section 5 11 5 for information on the Baud Rate setting E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 86 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation 5 11 2 Unsupported Commands 5 11 3 Command Interpretation 5 11 4 PID Scaling Mode 5 11 5 Baud Rate Model 335 Temperature Controller Some commands are not supported in the Model 335 regardless of the emulation mode as the associated functions are no longer included Although these commands are unsupported a properly formatted reply will be sent when these queries are received to prevent locking up or crashing software that was written to query this information These unsupported commands are m LDAT m LINEAR m MNMX Except for the unsupported commands above when the Model 335 is in the proper emulation mode it will interpret all Model 331 and Model 332 commands Each command will either be interpreted directly or it will be translated to the most appropriate Model 335 setting for full compatibility with the Model 3310rthe Model 332 Some settings wil
211. n Custom Mode Display Field Command DISPFLD lt field gt lt source gt lt units gt term n n n lt field gt Specifies field display location to configure 1 4 source Specifies item to display in the field O None 1 Input A 2 Input B 3 Setpoint 1 4 Setpoint 2 5 Output 1 6 Output 2 units Valid entries 1 kelvin 2 Celsius 3 sensor units 4 minimum data 5 maximum data 6 sensor name DISPFLD 2 1 1 term displays kelvin reading for Input A in display field 2 when dis play mode is set to Custom Since each display field is only ten characters only the first nine characters ofthe sen sor name will be displayed when the units for a field are set to display the sensor name However if two adjacent fields are assigned to the same sensor name then the entire twenty character line can be used allowing all fifteen sensor name characters to be displayed This command only applies to the readings displayed in the Custom display mode All other display modes have predefined readings in predefined locations and will use the Preferred Units parameter to determine which units to display for each sensor input Referto section 4 3 for details on display setup Custom Mode Display Field Query DISPFLD lt field gt term n field Specifies field display location to query 1 4 lt input gt lt units gt term n n refer to command for description Display Setup Command DISPLAY lt mode gt term
212. n Apiezon is a registered trademark of M amp I Materials Ltd CalCurve Cernox SoftCal Rox Curve Handler are trade marks of Lake Shore Cryotronics Inc Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc of Santa Clara CA LabVIEW is a registered trademark of National Instruments Mac is a registered trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Microsoft Windows Excel and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Stycast is a trademark of Emerson amp Cuming WinZip is a registered trademark of Nico Mak of Connecticut Copyright 2011 2012 Lake Shore Cryotronics Inc All rights reserved No portion of this manual may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the express written permission of Lake Shore EY akeShore www lakeshore com CE DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Lake Shore Cryotronics Inc 575 McCorkle Blvd Westerville OH 43082 USA hereby declare that the equipment specified conforms to the following Directives and Standards Application of Council Directives 73 23 EEC 89 336 EEC Standards to which Conformity is declared EN 61010 1 2006 Overvoltage Il Pollution Degree 2 EN 61326 1 2006 Class A Annex B Model Number Lk cred Mle i 3 29 26 Edward Maloof Pri
213. n external power supply which in turn powers the heater This can be useful if more than 75 W is needed for either closed loop PID control warm up control or open loop operation This section describes choosing and installing an external supply Section 5 5 describes operation of the warm up supply mode 3 7 5 1 Choosing a Power Supply W Voltage programmable the power supply must be voltage programmable so that Output 2 in voltage mode can control it Ideally the supply s programming input should have a range of 0 V to 10 V that corresponds to O V to 10 V range ofthe control output This guarantees that 0 to 100 of the control output scales to 0 to 100 power out ofthe supply Supplies with different programming input ranges can be used as described in section 3 7 5 4 Be aware that if the input voltage is not within the range of the power supply damage may result W DCoutput capable the power supply must be capable of continuous DC output Most commercial audio amplifiers are not suitable because they are AC coupled and cannot provide a DC output Mm Output type most available voltage programmable power supplies are configured for voltage output This is different than Outputs 1 and 2 current mode on the Model 335 which are configured for current output The differences between the two are not significant when used in warm up mode Mm Output voltage Lake Shore recommends supplies with a working output voltage between 10 V and 50
214. n to protect it from further damage 8 9 Calibration Procedure TABLE 8 2 Error messages Instrument calibration can be obtained through Lake Shore Service Refer to section 8 14 for technical inquiries and contact information EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 138 CHAPTER 8 Service 8 10 Rear Panel The sensor input heater output terminal block USB and IEEE 488 connectors are Connector defined in FIGURE 8 3 through FIGURE 8 7 Forthermocouple connector details refer ee to FIGURE 3 7 Definition FIGURE 8 3 Sensor input A and B Pin Symbol Description 1 I Current 2 vV Voltage 3 None Shield 4 V Voltage 5 I Current 6 None Shield TABLE 8 3 Sensor input A and B connector details HI 17AMAx LO OUT 2 HI 1amax LO FIGURE 8 4 Heater output connectors Model 335 Temperature Controller 8 10 Rear Panel Connector Definition 139 Use screwdriver to lock or unlock wires Slides into slot at rear of Model 335 Insert wire into slot FIGURE 8 5 Terminal block for relays and Output 2 voltage Description Output 2 Output 2 Relay 1 normally closed Relay 1 common Relay 1 normally open Relay 2 normally closed Relay 2 common TT Relay 2 normally open TABLE 8 4 Terminal block pin and connector details 2 cl 3 4 FIGURE 8 6 USB pin and connector details Description 1 VCC 5 VDC 2 D
215. nA 10 450 MO 0 002 2 00 0 04 30mQ O 0015960frdg C 900 mQ ofrdg ofrdg 0 004 of rdg 00 to 100 kO 100 nA4 100 1 50 0 005 of 10 0 Q 0 04 100 mQ 0 002 of rdg C 30 0 01 rdg ofrdg ofrdg Thermocouple X Positive 50mV NA 1pV 0 4uV 1pV 0 05 0 1 pV 0 001 of rdg C 0 8uV of rdg5 1 Control stability of the electronics only in ideal thermal system Current source error has negligible effect on measurement accuracy 3 Diode input excitation can be set to 1 mA 4 Current source error is removed during calibration 5 Accuracy specification does not include errors from room temperature compensation TABLE 1 3 Input specifications E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 8 CHAPTER 1 Introduction 1 3 2 Sensor Input Configuration 2 lead differential room Measurement t 4 lead differential dii da temperature compensated SET Constant current with Excitation NA current reversal for RTDs Diodes Silicon GaAlAs Supported sensors RTDs 100 Q Platinum 1000 Q Platinum Most thermocouple types Germanium Carbon Glass Cernox and Rox DT 470 DT 670 DT 500 D DT 500 E1 Type E Type K Type T DELLE GIO PT 100 PT 1000 RX 102A RX 202A AuFe 0 07 vs Cr AuFe 0 0396 vs CR Screw terminals in a ceramic Input connector pee isothermal block TABLE 1 4 Sensor input configuration 1 3 3 Thermometry Number of inputs 2 Input configuration Input
216. nable Register Each Status Byte summary bit is logically ANDed to the corresponding enable bit of the Service Request Enable Register When a Ser vice Request Enable Register bit is set by the user and the corresponding summary bit is set in the Status Byte the RQS MSS bit of the Status Byte will be set which in turn sets the Service Request hardware line on the bus 6 2 4 6 Reading Registers Any register in the status system may be read using the appropriate query command Some registers clear when read others do not section 6 2 4 8 The response to a query will be a decimal value that corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits in the register TABLE 6 2 The actual query commands are described later through out section 6 4 1 Position B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Decimal 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Weighting 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Example If bits 0 2 and 4 are set a query of the register will return a decimal value of 21 1 4 16 TABLE 6 2 Binary weighting ofan 8 bit register 6 2 4 7 Programming Registers The only registers that may be programmed by the user are the enable registers All other registers in the status system are read only registers To program an enable register send a decimal value that corresponds to the desired binary weighted sum of all bits in the register TABLE 6 2 The actual commands are described throughout section 6 4 1 Model 335 Temperatur
217. nd can potentially damage sensors Much care should be taken not to overheat or mechanically stress sensor packages Less perma nent mountings require some pressure to hold the sensor to its mounting surface Pressure greatly improves the action of gasket material to increase thermal conduc tivity and reduce thermal gradients A spring clamp is recommended so that different rates of thermal expansion do not increase or decrease pressure with temperature change Different types of sensors come with different types and lengths of electrical leads In general a significant length of lead wire must be added to the sensor for proper ther mal anchoring and connecting to a bulk head connector at the vacuum boundary The lead wire must be a good electrical conductor but should not be a good thermal con ductor or heat will transfer down the leads and change the temperature reading of the sensor Small 30 AWG to 40 AWG wire made ofan alloy like phosphor bronze is much better than copper wire Thin wire insulation is preferred and twisted wire should be used to reduce the effect of RF noise if itis present The wire used on the room temperature side ofthe vacuum boundary is not critical so copper cable is normally used EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 18 CHAPTER 2 Cooling System Design and Temperature Control i To room temperature Vacuum shroud Da Refrigerator first stage Vacuum space tie down sor Thermal anchor c ni bobbin ryogenic tap
218. nerates a SoftCal curve Refer to Paragraph 5 3 SCAL 1 21 1234567890 4 2 1 6260 77 32 1 0205 300 0 0 5189 term generates a three point SoftCal curve from standard curve 1 and saves it in user curve 21 Control Setpoint Command SETP output value term n tnnnnnn lt output gt Specifies which output s control loop to configure 1 or 2 value The value for the setpoint in the preferred units of the control loop sensor SETP 1 122 5 term Output 1 setpoint is now 122 5 based on its units Control settings that is P l D and Setpoint are assigned to outputs which results in the settings being applied to the control loop formed by the output and its control input Control Setpoint Query SETP output term n output value term tnnnnnn refer to command for description Specifies which output to query 1 or 2 SRDG Input Format Returned Format Remarks TEMP Input Returned Format Remarks TLIMIT Input Format Example Remarks TLIMIT Input Format Returned Format TUNEST Input Returned Format Remarks 6 4 1 InterfaceCommands 125 Sensor Units Input Reading Query SRDG lt input gt term a input Specifies which inputto query A or B sensor units value term tnnnnnn Also see the RDGST command Thermocouple Junction Temperature Query TEMP term junction temperature term nnnnn Temperature is in kelvin This query return
219. nes the Output mode must be set to Zone referto section 4 5 1 6 2 to setup Zone mode In Zone mode the instrument will update the control settings each time the setpoint crosses into a new zone Ifthe settings are changed manually the controller will use the new setting while itis in the same zone and will update to the programmed zone table settings when the setpoint crosses into a new zone The zone settings include a Control Input parameter for each temperature zone This allows a different feedback sensor to be used for each temperature zone For exam ple a diode sensorcan be used while cooling down from room temperature to 10 K at which point the Control Input could be switched to a Cernox sensor for tempera tures under 10 K AControl Input parameter of default follows the original configu ration and does not change the input To illustrate how the control parameters are updated in Zone mode consider the example zone settings in the table below Starting from room temperature about 300 K and setting a setpoint of 2 K with Setpoint Ramping turned On the setpoint will begin ramping atthe current setpoint Ramp Rate then once the setpoint crosses 100 K the control parameters from Zone 7 will be used The setpoint ramp will then continue toward 2 K ata rate of 20 K min until crossing 50 K when the control parameters from Zone 6 are loaded This pattern will continue until the final setpoint value of 2 Kisreached oranother setp
220. nformation to the sensor slows the response time For example if the temperature at the load drops slightly below the setpoint the controller gradually increases heating power If the feedback information is slow the controller puts too much heat into the system before it is told to reduce heat The excess heat causes a temperature overshoot which degrades control stability The best way to improve thermal lag is to pay close attention to thermal conductivity both in the parts used and in their junctions There is a conflict between the best sensor location for measurement accuracy and the best sensor location for control For measurement accuracy the sensor should be very nearthe sample being measured which is away from the heating and cooling sources to reduce heat flow across the sample and thermal gradients The best con trol stability is achieved when the feedback sensor is near both the heaterand cooling source to reduce thermal lag If both control stability and measurement accuracy are critical it may be necessary to use two sensors one for each function Many tempera ture controllers including the Model 335 have multiple sensor inputs for this reason E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 22 CHAPTER 2 Cooling System Design and Temperature Control 2 6 4 Thermal Mass 2 6 5 System Non Linearity 2 7 PID Control Model 335 Temperature Controller Cryogenic designers understandably want to keep the thermal mass of the load as small
221. ng is 0 Off or 1 On rate value Specifies setpoint ramp rate in kelvin per minute from 0 1 to 100 The rate is always positive but will respond to ramps up or down A rate of 0 is interpreted as infinite and will therefore respond as if setpoint ramping were off RAMP 1 1 10 5 term when Output 1 setpoint is changed ramp the current set pointto the target setpoint at 10 5 K minute Control loop settings are assigned to outputs which results in the settings being applied to the control loop formed by the output and its control input Control Setpoint Ramp Parameter Query RAMP lt output gt term n lt output gt Specifies which output s control loop to query 1 or 2 off on rate value term n nnnn refer to command for description Control Setpoint Ramp Status Query RAMPST output term n output ramp status term n ramp status Specifies which output s control loop to query 1 or 2 0 Not ramping 1 Setpoint is ramping RANGE Input Format Remarks RANGE Input Format Returned Format RDGST Input Format Returned Format Remarks RELAY Input Format Example RELAY Input Format Returned Format 6 4 1 InterfaceCommands 123 Heater Range Command RANGE lt output gt lt range gt term n n lt output gt Specifies which output to configure 1 or 2 range For Outputs 1 and 2 in Current mode 0 Off 1 Low 2 Medium 3 High
222. ng the Setpoint parameter E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 64 CHAPTER 4 Operation 4 5 2 Voltage Output Model 335 Temperature Controller 4 5 1 7 8 Heater Range The Heater Range setting is used for turning a control output on as well as setting the output power range forthe heater outputs Both outputs provide an Off setting for turning the output off The heater outputs in Current mode provide Low Medium Med and High settings which provide decade steps in power based on the maxi mum output power available to the connected heater The High range provides the maximum power the Med range provides maximum power 10 and the Low range provides maximum power 100 Refer to section 2 5 1 for details on how to calculate the maximum output power When Output 2 is configured as a voltage output only one output range On is available While controlling tempertature the following will cause the heater range to automati cally turn off m Exceeding the Temperature Limit setting m Setup changes to the control input m Powerloss with Power Up Enable feature turned off m Input errors such as T Over T Under S Over and S Under Available full scale current and power are determined by the heater resistance Max Cur rent setting and Heater Range Specifications of the heater outputs are provided in section 1 3 Heater theory of operation is provided in section 2 5 Various heater installation considerations are provided in sect
223. nit 14 Use the hex driver to replace the four screws on the sides ofthe top covers Tighten the two rear bottom screws Do not to apply power to the instrument until it has been fully reassembled Failure to comply could result in injury or death to the operator 15 Replace the power cord in the rear ofthe unit and set the power switch to On 16 To verify option card installation check the instrument information Refer to sec tion 8 7 2 for more information on instrument information This section provides instructions for updating the firmware in your instrument Periodically Lake Shore provides updates to instrument firmware The files for these updates can be downloaded from our website To accessthe firmware updates follow this procedure 1 Gotohttp www lakeshore com products cryogenic temperature controllers model 335 Pages Overview aspx to download the instrument firmware 2 Enteryour name and email address so that we can keep you updated on any new firmware for your instrument 3 Clickthe Go to the download bar and follow the prompts that are provided on the screen for you EY akeShore www lakeshore com 144 CHAPTER 8 Service 8 14 Technical Inquiries 8 14 1 Contacting Lake Shore 8 14 2 Return of Equipment 8 14 3 RMA Valid Period Model 335 Temperature Controller Referto the following sections when contacting Lake Shore for application assistance or product service Questions regarding product
224. not allow limitation in certain warranties and sothe above limitations or exclu sions of some warranties stated above may not apply to you 13 Except to the extent allowed by applicable law the terms of this limited warranty statement do not exclude restrict or modify the mandatory statutory rights applicable to the sale ofthe product to you CERTIFICATION Lake Shore certifies that this product has been inspected and tested in accordance with its published specifications and that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment The accu racy and calibration ofthis productatthe time of shipmentare trace able to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST formerly known as the National Bureau of Stan dards NBS FIRMWARE LIMITATIONS Lake Shore has worked to ensure that the Model 335 firmware is as free of errors as possible and that the results you obtain from the instrument are accurate and reliable However as with any com puter based software the possibility of errors exists In any important research as when using any laboratory equipment results should be carefully examined and rechecked before final con clusions are drawn Neither Lake Shore nor anyone else involved in the creation or production of this firmware can pay for loss of time inconvenience loss of use ofthe product or property damage caused by this product or its failure to work or any other incidental or c
225. nt value Refer to section 4 5 1 6 3 for details on Open Loop Mode The Warm Up Supply mode uses the output to drive the programming input for an external power supply for the purpose of rapidly warming a system to a user specified temperature The Monitor Out mode uses the output to provide a voltage proportional to an input sensor reading to be used by an external device such as a data logger 4 6 Interface 4 6 1 USB 4 6 2 IEEE 488 4 7 Locking and Unlocking the Keypad 4 6 Interface 65 The voltage output is designed to provide up to 1 W into a 100 O heater The output is cur rent limited to slightly over 100 mA and therefore a heater value less than 100 Q can drive the output into current limit This condition will not damage the output but it can result in discontinuous temperature control 4 5 2 1 Warm Up Supply Warm Up Supply mode is designed for controlling an external power supply used for rapidly increasing the temperature in the controlled system for example to bring a system to room temperature in orderto change samples Referto section 5 5 for more information on warm up supply operation Refer to section 3 7 5 for the procedure to install an external power supply for warm up supply mode Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 2 Voltage WarmUp Supply Interface Command OUTMODE 4 5 2 2 Monitor Out Refer to section 5 6 for more information on Monitor Out mode Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 2 Voltage M
226. nted name Vice President of Engineering Position Model 335 Temperature Controller DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY in relation to DIRECTIVE 2002 95 EC OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL OF 27 JANUARY 2003 ON THE RESTRICTION OF THE USE OF CERTAIN HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES RoHS IN ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT The Lake Shore Model 335 temperature controller complies fully with the requirements of Directive 2002 95 EC on the Restriction ofthe use of certain Hazardous Substances RoHS In accordance with Article 4 1 of Directive 2002 95 EC restricted substances are not present above the tolerated values defined within Commission Decision 2005 618 EC ileal T f 3 29 2011 Edward Maloof Printed name Vice President of Engineering Fil akeShore Lake Shore Cryotronics Inc 575 McCorkle Boulevard Westerville OH 43082 Sales 614 891 2244 Fax 614 891 1392 sales lakeshore com www lakeshore com Note The Model 335 is considered Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE Category 9 equipment therefore falling outside the current scope ofthe RoHS directive However in recognition that RoHS compliance is in the best interest of our customers employees and the environment Lake Shore has designed the Model 335 to eliminate the hazardous substances covered in the RoHS directive El akeShore wwwiakeshore com Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC for the Model 335 Temperature Controller Electromagnet
227. ntegral I 20 0 Location 1 source InputA Derivative D 0 00 Location 1 units Kelvin Manual output 0 000 Location 2 source Input B Range off Location 2 units Kelvin Ramp rate 0 100 K min Location 3 source Setpoint1 Control input Default Location 3 units Kelvin Location 4 source Output 1 Location 4 units Kelvin Brightness 7526 Model 335 Temperature Controller TABLE8 1 Default values 8 7 2 ProductInformation 137 Product information for your instrument is also found in the Factory Reset menu The The following are error messages that may be displayed by the Model 335 during Description Inputis disabled Refer to section 4 4 Input has no curve Refer to section 4 4 7 Input is at or over full scale sensor units Input is at or under negative full scale sensor units Input at or over the high end of the curve 8 7 2 Product Information following information is provided m Firmware version m Serial number m Option card type m Option card serial number 8 8 Error Messages operation Message DISABL NOCURV S OVER S UNDER T OVER T UNDER Input at or under the low end of the curve Cannot Communicate with Input Processor The main microprocessor has lost communication with the sensor input microprocessor NOVRAM Corrupt Reset Invalid data or contents in NOVRAM when this message appears Select Yes to this message and press Enter to reset the factory default values Temp Limit on
228. o 200 Control settings P I D and Setpoint are assigned to outputs which results in the settings being applied to any loop formed by the output and its control input PID 1 10 50 0 term Output 1P is 10 lis 50 andDis 0 Control Loop PID Values Query PID output term n output Specifies which output s control loop to query 1 or 2 P value l value gt lt D value term nnnnn nnnnn nnnn referto command for description E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 122 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation POLARITY Input Format Remarks POLARITY Input Returned Format RAMP Input Format Example Remarks RAMP Input Format Returned Format RAMPST Input Format Returned Format Model 335 Temperature Controller Output Voltage Polarity Command POLARITY lt output gt lt polarity gt term n n lt output gt Output for which to configure the polarity setting 2 lt polarity gt Specifies output voltage is O unipolar positive output only or 1 bipolar positive or negative output The polarity command only applies to Output 2 and only when output type is voltage Output Voltage Polarity Query POLARITY term lt polarity gt term n refer to command for description Control Setpoint Ramp Parameter Command RAMP output off on rate value term n n nnnn lt output gt Specifies which output s control loop to configure 1 or 2 off on Specifies whether rampi
229. o accept a number entry or a parameter selection Press and hold for 3 s to N A lock or unlock the keypad 0 9 Press these keys to enter numeric data This includes a key to toggle plus or minus 4 2 3 and a key for entry of a decimal point Ramp rate Press this key to configure the ramp rate parameter for the displayed control loop 4 5 1 7 7 TABLE 4 3 Menu number pad keys Model 335 Temperature Controller 4 2 2 Annunciators 4 2 2 Annunciators 43 LED annunciators two blue and two red LED annunciators are included to provide visual feedback ofthe following operation Remote The Remote LED is on steady when instrument is in Remote mode may be controlled via the 4621 Remote Local key If the LED is not illuminated the instrument is in Local mode UT The Alarm LED is on steady when the alarm feature for any sensor input is turned on and the Alarm input s Visual parameter is setto On It blinks when any input sensor alarms are in the 5 7 alarming state and the alarming input s Visual parameter is set to On The control output LED is on steady when the corresponding output is in the On state does not apply to Monitor Out mode It is Off when the corresponding output is in the Off state or is setto Monitor Out mode Control outputs 4 5 1 6 4 2 3 General Keypad Operation TABLE4 4 LED annunciators Display annunciators include symbols for sensor inputs and their respective tempera tures
230. o the output de PD Output D d By reacting to a fast changing error signal the derivative can workto boost the output when the setpoint changes quickly reducing the time it takes for temperature to reach the setpoint It can also seethe error decreasing rapidly when the temperature nears the setpoint and reduce the output for less overshoot The derivative term can be useful in fast changing systems but itis often turned off during steady state con trol because it reacts too strongly to small disturbances The derivative setting D is related to the dominant time constant ofthe load similar to the I setting and is there fore set relative to the I setting when used The Model 335 has a control setting that is not a normal part of a PID control loop Manual Output can be used for open loop control meaning feedback is ignored and the heater output stays at the user s manual setting This is a good way to put con stant heating power into a load when needed The Manual Output term can also be added to the PID output Some users preferto set a power nearthat necessary to con trol ata setpoint and letthe closed loop make up the small difference Manual Output is set in percent of full scale current or power for a given heater range section 4 5 1 7 5 Manual Output should be set to 0 when not in use EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 24 CHAPTER 2 Cooling System Design and Temperature Control v p 3 pas o a E 9
231. oint is entered Note that Input B will be used in all zones greater than 10 K zones 4 to 8 and Input A will be used in all zones below 10 K zones 1 to 3 Lower boundary Upper Manual E s output Range Ramp rate Control input 0 0 0 Off 0 1 K min Default 9 n a 0 0 0 Off 0 1 K min Default 8 100 001 K 500 K 200 20 0 0 0 High 30 K min Input B 7 50 001 K 100 K 185 25 0 0 0 Med 20 K min Input B 6 25 001K 50K 150 30 0 0 0 Med 10 K min Input B 5 15 001 K 25K 100 30 0 0 0 Med 5 K min Input B 4 10 001 K 15K 85 35 0 0 0 Med 2 K min Input B 3 7 001K 10K 85 35 0 0 0 Med 0 9 K min InputA 2 4 001 K 7K 70 0 40 0 0 0 0 Low 0 7 K min InputA 1 OK 4K 50 0 50 0 0 0 0 Low 0 5 K min InputA TABLE 5 2 Zone settings example Sensor accuracy and placement will affect how smoothly the transition from one feed back sensor to another is performed A large difference between the temperature read ings of each sensor at the time of transition could cause a temporary instability in the temperature control due to the sudden large error introduced into the control equation It is highly recommended to use the Setpoint Ramping feature when using the Control Input zone parameter to change sensor inputs Otherwise a setpoint change may cause a control input sensor to be used outside of its usable range which will cause an overload condition to shut down the control loop E3 akeShore www lakeshore com
232. oint pair in section 5 9 1 1 If you do notenterO for both sensor and temperature values then entering new values over an existing breakpoint pair will replace that pair with the new value when you press the Enter key After editing adding or deleting all desired breakpoint pairs press Escape whilethe highlight is on a breakpoint number All breakpoint pair changes additions and dele tions will be saved when exiting the menu When curve entry is complete assign the new curve to an input The Model 335 does not automatically assign the new curve to any input Refer to section 4 4 7 for details on assigning a curve to a sensor input Menu Navigation Curve Entry gt Edit 21 59 Ester Curve Points 1 200 Interface Command CRVPT 5 9 1 4 Thermocouple Curve Considerations The following are things to consider when generating thermocouple curves m Users may enter temperature response curves for all types of thermocouples Enter curve data in mV K format with thermocouple voltage in millivolts and temperature in kelvin m Thecurve must be normalized to O mV at 273 15 K 0 C Thermocouple voltages in millivolts are positive when temperature is above 273 15 K and negative when temperature is below that point m Toconvertcurves published in Celsiusto kelvin add 273 15 to the temperature in Celsius m Theinputvoltage of the Model 335 is limited to 50 mV so any part ofthe curve that extends beyond 50 mV is not usable by the
233. ol Input of any control loop then the bottom line is blank If the control loop that uses the sensor inputis in Open Loop mode then a heater percentage is shown instead of a setpoint EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 46 CHAPTER 4 Operation The input display modes are unique in that they can be set temporarily by pressing AorB onthe front panel After the key is pressed the user assignable sensor name of the respective input is displayed on the top line for 2 s then the primary input display mode becomes active for approximately 10 s before returning to the configured dis play mode Subsequent presses ofthe same key before the 10 second timeout period will toggle the temporary display between the primary Input A or Input B and the secondary Input A Max Min or Input B Max Min temporary display modes This pro vides quick access to each input and each associated control loop for gathering infor mation or changing control loop parameters Press any active keys while the temporary display mode is active to reset the timeout period of the temporary display Press Escape to manually return the display to the configured display mode Press and hold a temporary display key about 3 s until you hear an audible beep to cause the configured display mode to change to the currently displayed input display mode associated with that key Menu Navigation Display Setup gt Display Mode Input A Input A Max Min Input B Input B Max Min each inpu
234. on the 31st day after Purchaser s physical receipt of the Product 5 This limited warranty does not apply to defects in the Product resulting from a improper or inadequate installation unless OT amp V services are performed by Lake Shore maintenance repair or cali bration b fuses software power surges lightning and non rechargeable batteries c software interfacing parts or other sup plies not furnished by Lake Shore d unauthorized modification or misuse e operation outside of the published specifications f improper site preparation or site maintenance g natural disasters such as flood fire wind or earthquake or h damage during ship ment other than original shipment to you if shipped through a Lake Shore carrier 6 This limited warranty does not cover a regularly scheduled or ordi nary and expected recalibrations ofthe Product b accessories to the Product such as probe tips and cables holders wire grease varnish feed throughs etc c consumables used in conjunction with the Product such as probe tips and cables probe holders sample tails rods and holders ceramic putty for mounting samples Hall sample cards Hall sample enclosures etc or d non Lake Shore branded Products that are integrated with the Product 7 To the extent allowed by applicable law this limited warranty is the only warranty applicable to the Product and replaces all other war ranties or conditions express or impl
235. onitor Out Interface Command OUTMODE The Model 335 has two computer interfaces IEEE 488 and USB Only one ofthese interfaces can be active at any time Use the Interface key to configure the parame ters related to the selected interface The USB interface is provided as a convenient way to connect to most modern com puters as a USB interface is provided on nearly all new PCs as ofthe writing ofthis manual The Model 335 USB driver which must be installed before using the inter face section 6 3 3 creates a virtual serial com port which can be used in the same way as a traditional serial com port Refer to Chapter 6 for details on computer inter face operation An IEEE 488 GPIB interface is provided for compatibility with legacy systems Refer to Chapter 6 for details on computer interface operation 4 6 2 1 Remote Local Local refers to operating the Model 335 from the front panel Remote refers to oper ating the controller via the IEEE 488 Interface The keypad is disabled during remote operation except for the Remote Local key and the ALL OFF key When in remote mode the Remote front panel LED will be illuminated When in local mode the Remote LED will not be illuminated Menu Navigation Remote Local LED On Remote mode LED Off Local mode The keypad lock feature prevents accidental changes to parameter values When the keypad is locked some parameter values may be viewed but most cannot be changed from the front
236. onothandle ESD sensitive devices unnecessarily or remove them from the packages until they are actually used or tested The Model 3060 is field installable You will need a small Phillips head screwdriver and the 5 64 in hex driver Follow this procedure to install the 3060 option To avoid potentially lethal shocks turn off controller and disconnect it from AC power before performing these procedures The Model 3060 option card is field installable however do not attempt to service other parts of the instrument as they are not user serviceable Failure to comply could result in injury or death to the operator E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 142 CHAPTER 8 Service C CAUTION into the device The components on this board are electrostatic discharge sensitive ESDS devices Follow ESD procedures in section 8 11 to avoid inducing an electrostatic discharge ESD 1 Turn the Model 335 power switch Off Unplug the power cord from the wall out let then the instrument 2 Stand the unit on its face Use the hex driver to remove the four screws on both sides ofthe top cover set aside these screws Loosen the two rear bottom screws FIGURE 8 9 Remove rear plastic bezel Loosen bottom rear side cover screws both sides Remove top side cover screws both sides To remove top cover slide it to the rear on the tracks Model 335 Temperature Controller FIGURE 8 9 Cover and option pla
237. onse quential damages Use of our product implies that you understand the Lake Shore license agreement and statement of limited warranty FIRMWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT The firmware in this instrument is protected by United States copy right law and international treaty provisions To maintain the war ranty the code contained in the firmware must not be modified Any changes made to the code is at the user s risk Lake Shore will assume no responsibility for damage or errors incurred as result of any changes made to the firmware FIRMWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT continued Underthe terms of this agreement you may only use the Model 335 firmware as physically installed in the instrument Archival copies are strictly forbidden You may not decompile disassemble or reverse engineer the firmware If you suspect there are problems with the firmware return the instrument to Lake Shore for repair under the terms ofthe Limited Warranty specified above Any unauthorized duplication or use ofthe Model 335 firmware in whole or in part in print or in any other storage and retrieval system is forbidden TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGMENT Many manufacturers and sellers claim designations used to distin guish their products as trademarks Where those designations appear inthis manual and Lake Shore was aware of a trademark claim they appear with initial capital letters and the or symbol Alumel and Chromel are trademarks of Conceptech Inc Corporatio
238. onsibility of the user program 6 4 Command Summary 6 4 CommandSummary 105 When issuing commands the user program alone should Properly format and transmit the command including the terminator as one string Guarantee that no other communication is started for 50 ms after the last char acter is transmitted Not initiate communication more than 20 times s When issuing queries or queries and commands together the user program should Properly format and transmit the query including the terminator as one string Prepare to receive a response immediately Receive the entire response from the instrument including the terminator Guarantee that no other communication is started during the response orfor 50 ms after it completes Not initiate communication more than 20 times s Failure to follow these simple rules will result in inability to establish communication with the instrument or intermittent failures in communication This section provides a listing of the interface commands A summary of all the com mands is provided in TABLE 6 6 All the commands are detailed in section 6 4 1 and are presented in alphabetical order Command name Brief description of command Form of the command input Input Curve Number Command Syntax of user parameter input INCRV input curve number gt term see key below a nn ees lt input gt Specify input A B Definition of first parameter lt curve number gt Specify input curve Li 0 none 1 20
239. or the Open Loop control mode m Output 1 or Output 2 this option displays the output number followed by the heater output percentage and the heater range of the specified output Location 1 1 amp Location 2 Location 3 lt a Location 4 FIGURE 4 6 Custom display modes Menu Navigation Display Setup Display Mode Custom Interface Command DISPLAY Model 335 Temperature Controller 4 3 2 Display Brightness 4 4 Input Setup 4 3 2 DisplayBrightness 47 The front panel display brightness can be adjusted for optimal viewing The default value should work well in most standard lighting environments but low light or bright light environments may require the brightness to be adjusted for optimal viewing Use the lowest brightness setting that is acceptable continued use of higher brightness will shorten the life of the display Menu Navigation Display Setup gt reg Display Brightness 25 50 75 100 Default 75 Interface Command BRIGT The Model 335 supports a variety oftemperature sensors manufactured by Lake Shore and other manufacturers An appropriate sensor type must be selected for each input If the exact sensor model is not shown use the sensor input performance chart in TABLE 4 6 to choose an input type with similar range and excitation For additional details on sensors refer to the Lake Shore Temperature Measurement and Control Catalog or visit our website at www lakeshore com Any
240. other features Setpoint ramps are often used with zone control mode As tempera ture is ramped through different temperature zones control parameters are auto matically selected for best control Ramps can be initiated and status read back using a computer interface During computer controlled experiments the instrument gen erates the setpoint ramp while the computer is busy taking necessary data When an incomplete ramp is shut off the setpoint will remain on the most current setting the reading will not jump to the end ofthe ramp If the input type or input curve is changed while a ramp is in progress both ramping and the heater are turned off If Ramp is on and the setpoint is set to sensor units the ramping function will remain on but when another setpoint is entered the setpoint goes directly to the new setpoint value To bypass ramping and load the setpoint with the current temperature with the control loop displayed press and hold the Setpoint button for 3 s Menu Navigation Output Setup gt Output 1 or 2 mes Setpoint Ramping Off or On Default Off Ramp Rate 0 1 K min to 100 K min Default 0 1 K min Interface Command RAMP To stop a ramp when the desired control loop is displayed press Setpoint then imme diately press Enter This stops the ramp at the current setpoint but it leaves the ramping function activated To continue the ramp enter a new setpoint Refer to section 4 5 1 7 6 for details on setti
241. others ESD levels of only a few hundred volts may damage electronic components such as semiconductors thick and thin film resistors and piezoelectric crystals dur ing testing handling repair or assembly Discharge voltages below 4000 V cannot be seen felt or heard The following are various industry symbols used to label components as ESD sensitive A CAUTION FIGURE 8 8 Symbols indicating ESD sensitivity Observe all precautions necessary to prevent damage to ESDS components before attempting installation Bring the device and everything that contacts it to ground potential by providing a conductive surface and discharge paths As a minimum observe these precautions m De energize or disconnect all power and signal sources and loads used with unit m Place unit ona grounded conductive work surface m Technician should be grounded through a conductive wrist strap or other device using 1M series resistor to protect operator m Ground any tools such as soldering equipment that will contact unit Contact with operator s hands provides a sufficient ground for tools that are otherwise electrically isolated m Place ESD sensitive devices and assemblies removed from a unit on a conductive work surface or in a conductive container An operator inserting or removing a device or assembly from a container must maintain contact with a conductive portion ofthe container Use only plastic bags approved for storage of ESD material m D
242. output line 7 16 DIO8 Data input output line 8 17 REN Remote enable 18 GND 6 Ground wire twisted pair with DAV 19 GND 7 Ground wire twisted pair with NRFD 20 GND8 Ground wire twisted pair with NDAC 21 GND9 Ground wire twisted pair with IFC 22 GND 10 Ground wire twisted pair with SRQ 23 GND 11 Ground wire twisted pair with ATN 24 GND Logic ground TABLE 8 6 IEEE 488 rear panel connector details Model 335 Temperature Controller 8 11 Electrostatic Discharge 8 11 1 Identification of Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Components 8 11 2 Handling Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Components 8 12 Model 3060 Installation AWARNING AWARNING 8 11 Electrostatic Discharge 141 Electrostatic Discharge ESD may damage electronic parts assemblies and equip ment ESD is a transfer of electrostatic charge between bodies at different electro static potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field The low energy source that most commonly destroys Electrostatic Discharge sensitive devices is the human body which generates and retains static electricity Simply walking across a carpet in low humidity may generate up to 35 000 V of static electricity Current technology trends toward greater complexity increased packaging density and thinner dielectrics between active elements which results in electronic devices with even more ESD sensitivity Some electronic parts are more ESD sensitve than
243. owing interface related instru ment events power on detected command syntax errors command execution errors query errors operation complete Any or all ofthese events may be reported in the standard event summary bit through the enable register FIGURE 6 2 The Standard Event Status Enable command ESE programs the enable register and the query command ESE reads it ESR reads and clears the Standard Event Status Register The used bits of the Standard Event Register are described as follows m Power On PON Bit 7 this bit is set to indicate an instrument off on transition m Command Error CME Bit 5 this bit is set if a command error has been detected since the last reading This means that the instrument could not interpret the command due to a syntax error an unrecognized header unrecognized termina tors or an unsupported command m Execution Error EXE Bit 4 this bitis set if an execution error has been detected This occurs when the instrument is instructed to do something not within its capabilities m Query Error QYE Bit 2 this bit indicates a query error It occurs rarely and involves loss of data because the output queue is full m Operation Complete OPC Bit 0 when OPC is sent this bit will be set when the instrument has completed all pending operations The operation ofthis bit is not related to the OPC command which is a separate interface feature section 6 2 6 6 E3 akeShore www l
244. panded clickthe icon Lake Shore Model 335 should appear indented underneath Ports COM amp LPT If itis not displayed as Lake Shore Model 335 it might be displayed as USB Device If neither are displayed click Action and then select Scan for hardware changes which may open the Found New Hardware wizard automatically If the Found New Hardware wizard opens continue to step 4 d Right clickon Lake Shore Model 335 and click Update Driver 4 Select No notatthis time and click Next 5 Select Search for the best driver in these locations click to clear the Search removable media floppy CD ROM check box and click the Include this loca tion in the search check box 6 Click Browse and open the location ofthe extracted driver Click Next 8 Whenthe driver finishes installing a confirmation message stating The wizard has finished installing the software for Lake Shore Model 335 Temperature Con troller should appear Click Finish to complete the installation N 6 3 3 4 Installing the USB Driver from the Included CD The Model 335 USB driver is available on the included CD The following section describes the process of installing the driver from the CD To install the driver you must be logged into a user account that has administrator privileges For Windows Vista or Windows 7 1 Insertthe CD into the computer 2 Follow steps 1 9 ofthe Windows Vista or Windows 7 procedure in section 6 3 3 3 3 3 Click Browse and
245. panel AII Off is the only keypad function that remains active when the keypad is locked E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 66 CHAPTER 4 Operation Model 335 Temperature Controller Athree digit keypad lock code locks and unlocks the keypad The default code is 123 The code can be changed only through the computer interface If instrument parame ters are reset to default values the lock code resets also The instrument cannot reset from the front panel with the keypad locked To lock the keypad press and hold Enter for 5 s Use the numeric keypad to enter the three digit lock code Ifthe lock code is accepted Keypad Locked will be dis played for 3 s and the display will return to normal Changes attempted to any param eters result in a brief display ofthe Keypad Locked message To unlock the keypad press and hold Enter for 5 s Use the numeric keypad to enter the three digit lock code If the lock code is accepted Keypad Unlocked will be displayed for 3 s and the display will return to normal All Model 335 parameters are now accessible Interface Command LOCK 5 1 General 67 Chapter 5 Advanced Operation 5 1 General 5 2 Autotune This chapter provides information on the advanced operation of the Model 335 tem perature controller The Model 335 can automate the tuning process of typical cryogenic systems with the Autotune feature For additional information aboutthe algorithm refer to section
246. put device is a resistive heater which requires only unipolar output since they will add heat regardless ofthe polar ity ofthe excitation voltage There are however temperature control devices that are bipolar These devices such as thermoelectric devices can work in both polarities moving heat from one side ofthe device to the other when a current is applied There fore a surface can be heated or cooled using a bipolartemperature control device For these types of bipolar devices the Model 335 features a bipolar control mode In this mode the Model 335 is configured to drive these devices to control temperature using Output 2 in Voltage mode Referto section 2 11 for more information about thermoelectric devices To use Output 2 for bipolar control first set the Heater Output Type parameter to Voltage then set the polarity to Bipolar The Closed Loop PID control mode can then be used to control a thermoelectric device providing a control output of 10 V to 10 V Refer to 2 11 for information on thermoelectric devices Refer to sec tion 3 7 5 4 for information on scaling the output for voltages less than 10 V Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 2 0utput Type Voltage Eres gt Polarity Bipolar Interface Command ANALOG Warm Up Supply mode is designed for controlling an external power supply used for rapidly increasing the temperature in the controlled system for example to bring a system to room temperature in order to
247. put to configure A or B lt sensortype gt Specifies input sensor type 0 Disabled 1 Diode 2 Platinum RTD 3 NTC RTD 4 Thermocouple lt autorange gt Specifies autoranging 0 off and 1 on lt range gt Specifies input range when autorange is off Diode 0 25V 1 10V PTC RTD 0 100 1 300 2 1000 323000 4 1kO 5 3kQ 6 10k0 NTCRTD 02100 1 300 2 100 3 3000 4 1kO 5 3kQ 6 10k0 7 230k0 8 100k0 Thermocouple 0 50 mV TABLE 6 8 Input range lt compensation gt Specifies input compensation where 0 off and 1 on Reversal for thermal EMF compensation if input is resistive room compensation if input is thermocouple Always O if input is a diode units Specifies the preferred units parameter for sensor readings and for the control setpoint 1 kelvin 2 Celsius 3 Sensor INTYPE A 2 1 0 1 1 term sets Input A sensor type to Platinum RTD autorange on thermal compensation on and preferred units to kelvin The autorange and range parameters do not apply to thermocouple sensor type and the autorange and compensation parameters do not apply to diode sensor type When configuring diode or thermocouple sensor types these parameters must be included but are ignored A setting of 0 for each is recommended in this case Input Type Parameter Query INTYPE input term a input Specifies input to query A or B sensor type gt lt autorange
248. puter and instructs the instrument to perform a function or change a parameter setting The format is command mnemonic gt lt space gt lt parameter data gt lt terminators gt Command mnemonics and parameter data necessary for each one is described in section 6 4 Terminators must be sent with every message string A query string is issued by the computer and instructs the instrument to send a response The query format is query mnemonic gt lt gt lt space gt lt parameter data gt lt terminators gt Query mnemonics are often the same as commands with the addition of a question mark Parameter data is often unnecessary when sending queries Query mnemonics and parameter data if necessary is described in section 6 4 Terminators must be sent with every message string The computer should expect a response very soon after a query is sent A response string is the instrument s response or answer to a query string The response can be a reading value status report or the present value of a parameter Response data formats are listed along with the associated queries in section 6 4 The response is sent as soon as possible after the instrument receives the query It is important to remember that the user program is in charge of the USB communi cation at all times The instrument cannot initiate communication determine which device should be transmitting at a given time or guarantee timing between mes sages All of this is the resp
249. r term n relay number Specifies which relay to query 1 or 2 lt mode gt lt input alarm gt lt alarm type gt term n a n refer to command for description E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 124 RELAYST Input Format Returned Format SCAL Input Format Remarks Example SETP Input Format Example Remarks SETP Input Format Returned Format Model 335 Temperature Controller CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation Relay Status Query RELAYST relay number term n relay number Specifies which relay to query 1 or 2 status term n 0 Off 1 2 On Generate SoftCal Curve Command SCAL lt std gt lt dest gt lt SN gt lt T1 value gt lt Ul value gt lt T2 value gt lt U2 value gt lt T3 value gt lt U3 value gt term n nn S 10 nnnnnn tnnnnnn nnnnnn tnnnnnn nnnnnn tnnnnnn std Specifies the standard curve from which to generate a SoftCal curve Valid entries 1 6 7 dest Specifies the user curve to store the SoftCal curve Valid entries 21 59 lt SN gt Specifies the curve serial number Limited to ten characters lt T1 value Specifies first temperature point in kelvin U1 value Specifies first sensor units point T2 value Specifies second temperature point in kelvin U2 value Specifies second sensor units point T3 value Specifies third temperature point in kelvin U3 value Specifies third sensor units point Ge
250. ramp is completed m Loop 2 Ramp Done RAMP2 Bit 2 this bit is set when a loop 2 setpoint ramp is completed m Sensor Overload OVLD Bit 1 this bit is set when a sensor reading is in the over load condition m Alarming ALARM Bit 0 this bit is set when an input is in an alarming state and the Alarm Visible parameter is on 6 2 6 Status System Detail Status Byte Register and Service Request 6 2 6 Status System Detail Status Byte Register and Service Request 97 Operation i27 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Eu condition register 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Decimal OPST e n ue jsp ovo un name poy vy y v d Operation i2 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit event ester 128 64 32 as 8 2 1 becima i penc ER DZ OPSTR reads and clears the register To operation event summary eee EZ BCE ISS CR ER EE bit OSB of enable register 128 64 32 16 18 41 2 1 Decimal pe FIGURE 6 3 Operation event register As shown in FIGURE 6 1 the Status Byte Register receives the summary bits from the two status register sets and the message available summary bit from the output buf fer The status byte is used to generate a service request SRQ The selection of sum mary bits that will generate an SRQ is controlled by the Service Request Enable Register 6 2 6 1 Status Byte Register The summary messages from the event registers and the output buffer set or clear the summary bits ofthe Status Byte Regi
251. re www lakeshore com 12 CHAPTER 1 Introduction Direct current power line E Alternating current power line Alternating or direct current power line A Three phase alternating current power line Earth ground terminal AN Protective conductor terminal Frame or chassis terminal On supply Off supply O tT kri de il FIGURE 1 4 Safety symbols Model 335 Temperature Controller Equipment protected throughout by double insulation or reinforces insulation equivalent to Class Il of IEC 536 see Annex H CAUTION High voltages danger of electric shock background color yellow symbol and outline black CAUTION or WARNING See instrument documentation background color yellow symbol and outline black 2 2 1 Temperature Range 13 Chapter 2 Cooling System Design and Temperature Control 2 1 General 2 2 Temperature Sensor Selection 2 2 1 Temperature Range 2 2 2 Sensor Sensitivity Selecting the proper cryostat or cooling source is probably the most important deci sion in designing a temperature control system The cooling source defines the mini mum temperature cool down time and cooling power Information on choosing a cooling source is beyond the scope ofthis manual This chapter provides information on how to get the best temperature measurement and control from cooling sources with proper setup including sensor and heater installation This section attempts to answer some ofthe basic que
252. re too slow for the Autotune algorithm Any sys tem that takes more than 15 min to stabilize at a new setpoint is too slow with an appropriate I setting lt 5 Thermal lag can be improved by using the sensor and heater installation techniques discussed in section 2 4 to section 2 6 Lag times up to a few seconds should be expected much larger lags can be a problem System nonlinearity is a problem for both Autotune and manual tuning It is most commonly noticed when controlling nearthe maximum or minimum temperature of a temperature control system It is not uncommon however for a userto buy a cryogenic cooling system specifically to operate near its minimum temperature Ifthis is the case try to tune the system at five degrees above the minimum temperature and gradually reduce the setpoint manually adjusting the control settings with each step Any time the mechanical cooling action of a cryogenic refrigerator can be seen as periodic temperature fluctu ations the mass istoo small or temperature too low to autotune EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 28 CHAPTER 2 Cooling System Design and Temperature Control 2 10 Zone Tuning 2 11 Thermoelectric Devices Model 335 Temperature Controller Once the PID tuning parameters have been chosen for a given setpoint the whole process may have to be done again for other setpoints significantly far away that have different tuning needs Trying to remember when to use which set oftuning parameter
253. reset 4 Checkall cable connections 1 Checkcable connections and length 2 Increasethe delay between all commands to 50 msto make sure the instrument is not being overloaded The fuse drawer supplied with the Model 335 holds the instrument line fuses and line voltage selection module The drawer holds two 5 mm x 20 mm 0 2 in x 79 in time delay fuses It requires two good fuses ofthe same rating to operate safely Refer to Section 8 5 for details 120 FIGURE 8 1 Fuse drawer Use the following procedure to change the instrument line voltage selector To avoid potentially lethal shocks turn off the controller and disconnect it from AC power before performing these procedures Identify the line input assembly on the instrument rear panel See FIGURE 8 2 Turn the line power switch off O Remove the instrument power cord With a small screwdriver release the drawer holding the line voltage selector and fuse Slide out the removable plastic fuse holder from the drawer Rotate the fuse holder until the proper voltage indicator shows through the window 7 Re assemblethe line input assembly in the reverse order 8 Verifythe voltage indicator in the window ofthe line input assembly 9 Connectthe instrument power cord 10 Turn the line power switch on I Refer to FIGURE 8 2 Bump yen 8 6 Fuse Replacement YT Te CAUTION 8 6 FuseReplacement 135 50 60Hz210VAMAX 5x20mm ROHS NE oni wa AA CS 100 1
254. rge amount of gas Therefore it is impera tive that cryogenic Dewars be stored and the MTD system be operated in open and well ventilated areas Persons transferring LHe and LN should make every effort to protect eyes and skin from accidental contact with liquid or the cold gas issuing from it Protect your eyes with full face shield or chemical splash goggles Safety glasses even with side shields are not adequate Always wear special cryogenic gloves Tempshield Cryo Gloves or equivalent when handling anything that is or may have been in contact with the liquid or cold gas or with cold pipes or equipment Long sleeve shirts and cuffless trousers that are of sufficient length to prevent liquid from entering the shoes are recommended Every site that stores and uses LHe and LN2 should have an appropriate Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS present The MSDS may be obtained from the manufac turer distributor The MSDS will specify the symptoms of overexposure and the first aid to be used A typical summary of these instructions is provided as follows If symptoms of asphyxia such as headache drowsiness dizziness excitation excess salivation vomiting or unconsciousness are observed remove the victim to fresh air If breathing is difficult give oxygen If breathing has stopped give artificial respira tion Call a physician immediately If exposure to cryogenic liquids or cold gases occurs restore tissue to normal body temperature
255. s are so large Never try to permanently bond materials with linear expansion coefficients that dif fer by more than three A flexible mounting scheme should be used orthe parts will break apart potentially damaging them The thermal expansion or contraction of rigid clamps or holders could crush fragile samples or sensors that do not have the same coefficient Thermal conductivity is a property of materials that can change with temperature Do not assume that a thermal anchor grease that works well at room temperature and above will do the same job at low temperatures Finding a good place to mount a sensor in an already crowded cryostat is never easy There are fewer problems ifthe entire load and sample holder are at the same tem perature Unfortunately this not the case in many systems Temperature gradients differences in temperature exist because there is seldom perfect balance between the cooling source and heat sources Even in a well controlled system unwanted heat sources like thermal radiation and heat conducting through mounting structures can cause gradients For best accuracy sensors should be positioned nearthe sample so that little or no heat flows between the sample and sensor This may not however be the best location for temperature control as discussed in section 2 4 3 The ability of heat to flow through a material is called thermal conductivity Good thermal conductivity is important in any part of a cryogenic system that
256. s can be configured from the front panel to accept any ofthe supported inputtypes Thermocouple inputs require an optional input card that can be installed in the field Once installed the thermocouple input can be selected from the front panel like any other input type Isolation Sensor inputs optically isolated from other circuits but not each other A D resolution 24 bit Input accuracy Sensor dependent refer to Input Specifications table Measurement resolution Sensor dependent refer to Input Specifications table Maximum update rate 10 rdg s on each input 5 rdg s when configured as 100 kO NTC RTD with reversal on Autorange Automatically selects appropriate NTC RTD or PTC RTD range User curves Room for 39 200 point CalCurves or user curves SoftCal Improves accuracy of DT 470 diode to 0 25 K from 30 K to 375 K improves accuracy of platinum RTDs to 0 25 K from 70 K to 325 K stored as user curves Math Maximum and minimum Filter Averages 2 to 64 input readings 1 3 4 Control There are two control outputs 1 3 4 1 Heater Outputs Outputs 1 and 2 Control type Closed loop digital PID with manual heater output or open loop warm up mode Output 2 only Update rate 10 s Tuning Autotune one loop at a time PID PID zones Control stability Sensor dependent see Input Specifications table PID control settings Proportional gain Oto 1000 with 0 1 setting resolution Integral reset 1 to 1000 1000 s with 0 1 setting resolution Deriv
257. s can be difficult The Model 335 has a Zone feature as one of its tuning modes that can help To use the Zone feature you must determine the best tuning parameters for each part ofthe temperature range of interest The parameters are then entered into the Model 335 where up to ten zones can be defined with different P I D heater range manual output ramp rate and control input settings An upper boundary setting is assigned as the maximum temperature forthat zone The minimum temperature for a zone is the upper boundary for the previous zone and O K is the starting point for the first zone When Zone tuning is on each time the setpoint changes appropriate control parameters are chosen automatically Zone tuning works best when used in conjunction with setpoint ramping section 4 5 1 7 7 Control parameters can be determined manually or by using the Autotune feature Autotune is a good way to determine a set of tuning parameters for the control sys tem that can then be entered as zones section 2 9 Athermoelectric device sometimes referred to as a Peltier device ora solid state heat pump is a device that takes advantage of the Peltier effect When a DC current is applied to the device heat is transferred from one side ofthe device to the other Heat can be transferred in either direction by reversing the polarity of the current Thermo electric devices are well suited for controlling temperatures near room temperature since they have
258. s the temperature ofthe ceramic thermo couple block used in the room temperature compensation calculation Temperature Limit Command TLIMIT lt input gt lt limit gt term n nnnn lt input gt Specifies which input to configure A or B lt limit gt The temperature limit in kelvin for which to shut down all control outputs when exceeded Atemperature limit of zero turns the temperature limit feature off for the given sensor input TLIMIT B 450 term ifthetemperature ofthe sensor on Input B exceeds 450 K all control outputs will be turned off Atemperature limit setting of OK turns the temperature limit feature off Temperature Limit Query TLIMIT input term a input Specifies which inputto query A or B limit term nnnn refer to command for description Control Tuning Status Query TUNEST term tuning status gt lt output gt lt error status gt lt stage status term n n n nn tuning status 0 no active tuning 1 active tuning output Heater output of the control loop being tuned if tuning 1 Output 1 2 Output 2 error status O no tuning error 1 tuning error lt stage status gt Specifies the current stage in the Autotune process Iftuning error occurred stage status represents stage that failed Ifinitial conditions are not metwhen starting the autotune procedure causing the autotuning process to never actually begin then the error status will be set to 1 and the sta
259. s will be entered using the units chosen for this parameter Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 2 Output Type Voltage Output Mode Monitor Out Control Input None Input A Input B Monitor Out Units Kelvin Celsius or Sensor Default Kelvin Interface Command ANALOG 5 6 1 1 Polarity and Monitor Out Scaling Parameters In the Monitor Out and Open Loop modes the voltage output can be configured as either unipolar O V to 10 V or bipolar 10 V to 10 V In bipolar mode the Monitor Out 10 V setting determines the temperature or sensor value at which the output should be 10 V In unipolar mode the Monitor Out O V setting determines the tem perature or sensor value at which the output should be 0 V The Monitor Out 10 V setting determines the temperature or sensor value at which the output should be 10 Vin either unipolar or bipolar modes Lowest TIRE Middle Highest Bipolar ml 10V 0 OV 10V Lowest Middle Highest Unipolar OV 5V Output 10V FIGURE 5 3 Unipolar and bipolar mode For example if Polarity is set to Bipolar then setting the Monitor Out 10 V parameter to O K and the Monitor Out 10 V parameter to 100 K will cause the voltage output to correspond to the input temperature as shown in FIGURE 5 4 In this case if the actual reading was 50 K then the output would be at O V middle of the scale p OK 50K 100 K Bipolar E 10V OV 10V FIGURE 5 4 Analog outp
260. se parameters are displayed in any display mode The sensor reading is also displayed in Preferred Units in all display modes except for the Custom display mode where each sensor location can be assigned specific display units Menu Navigation Input Setup nput A or B Exter Preferred Units Kelvin Celsius or Sensor Interface INTYPE The Max Min feature captures and stores the highest Max and lowest Min reading taken since the last reset The Preferred Units parameter underthe Input Setup menu determines the units used for capturing Max and Min Max and Min are always being captured so there is no need to turn the feature on or off The readings are reset when the instrument is turned on sensor input parameters are changed or the Max Min Reset key is pressed Menu Navigation Max Min Reset Interface MNMXRST Once the sensor inputs have been configured section 4 4 the outputs can be config ured The Output Setup menu is used to create control loops for controlling tempera ture whether using feedback closed loop or manually setting the output open loop This section describes how to operate the output and control features and how to set control parameters Each control parameter should be considered before turn ing on a control loop output or the instrument may not be able to perform the most simple control functions A good starting point is deciding which control loop to use whether to operate in open or clos
261. sed on the heater s power rating or the maximum desired heater output power whichever is lower The heater output compliance voltage should also be taken into account in order to maxi mize heater setting resolution This calculated current limit can then be entered using the User Max Current setting To calculate the Max Current setting based on a heater or load power limit calculate current I using both of the following equations Sqrt P R and V R where P is the maximum allowable power V is the output compliance voltage 50 V for Output 1 and 35 5 V for Output 2 and Ris the heater resistance The load power limit and volt age compliance limit ofthe heater output are in place atthe same time so the lower calculated current is the correct User Max Current setting Example 1 A 50 O 30 W heater is connected to Output 1 Power ILimit Voltage compliance limit 2 Squrt P R 2 V R Squrt 30 W 50 Q 1 50V 500 1 0 77A I 1A 4 5 1 HeaterOutputs 57 User Max Current should be set to the smaller of the two or 0 77 A In this example the desired 30 W of power is available to the heater Example 2 A75 Q 50 W heater is connected to Output 2 Power limit Voltage compliance limit 2 Squrt P R 2 V R Squrt 50 W 750Q 1235 5 V 750 1 0 81A 1 0 47 A User Max Current should be set to the smaller of the two or 0 47 A In this example only 16 5 W ofthe total 25 W of power is available to the heater To enter a User Ma
262. selectthe drive containing the included CD 4 Ensure the Include subfolders check box is selected and click Next 5 Whenthe driver finishes installing a confirmation message stating Windows has successfully updated your driver software should appear Click Close to com plete the installation For Windows XP 1 Insertthe CD into the computer 2 Connectthe USB cable from the Model 335 to the computer 3 Turn on the Model 335 4 Whenthe Found New Hardware wizard appears select No not atthis time and click Next Select Install the software automatically recommended and click Next The Found New Hardware wizard should automatically search the CD and install the drivers 7 Whenthe Found New Hardware Wizard finishes installing the drivers a message stating the wizard has finished installing the software for Lake Shore Model 335 Temperature Controller should appear Click Finish to complete the installation SY M E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 104 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation 6 3 4 Communication 6 3 5 Message Flow Control Model 335 Temperature Controller Communicating via the USB interface is done using message strings The message strings should be carefully formulated by the user program according to some simple rules to establish effective message flow control 6 3 4 1 Character Format Acharacter is the smallest piece of information that can be transmitted by the inter face Each character is
263. side of the acceptable range is entered the value will be limited to the closest acceptable value 6 Oncethe data points are entered select yes at the Generate SoftCal prompt and press Enter 7 Tocancelthe operation either choose No to the Generate SoftCal prompt or press Escape The Generate Softcal operation will overwrite an existing user curve Please ensure the curve number you are writing to is correct before generating the calibrated curve 5 11 Emulation Modes 5 11 1 Emulation Mode Configuration 5 11 Emulation Modes 85 You can check the new curve using the Edit Curve instructions in section 5 9 2 The curve is not automatically assigned to any input so you will need to assign the new curve to an input Referto section 4 4 7 for details on assigning a curve to a sensor input Menu Navigation Curve Entry gt Select Function Softcal DT 470 Platinum 100 Platinum 1000 Data Entry see note below gt Generate Softcal Yes Interface Command SCAL Data entry includes user curve location new curve serial number and calibration points To provide compatibility with pre existing software that was written to work with a Model 331 or a Model 332 the Model 335 can be configured to emulate the remote interface of these previous model temperature controllers These emulation modes allow a Model 335 to replace a Model 331 or Model 332 in a software controlled sys tem with very little effort and very little downtime
264. stance range To manually select a resistance range set the Autorange parameter to Off then use the Range parameter to select the desired range Autorange will be On by default when ever the Sensor Type parameter is set to PTC RTD or NTC RTD Autorange is not avail able for the Diode sensor type Menu Navigation Input Setup nput A or B Sensor Type NTC RTD NTC RTD Autorange Off or On Input Setup nput A or B Sensor Type Diode Range See table below Default On Interface Command INTYPE Diode 2 5 V Silicon 25 pW at 10 pA excitation 10 pA 1mA 10 V GaAlAs 100 pW at 10 pA excitation 10 pA 1 MA 100 10 pW 300 30 pW 1000 100 pW PTC RTD Platinum 3000 300 pW TA 1kQ 1mW 3kQ 3mW 10kQ 10mW 100 10 pW 1mA 300 2 7 pW 300 uA 1000 1uW 100 pA 3000 270nW 30 pA NTC RTD Cernox 1kQ 100 nW 10 pA 3kQ 27 nW 3 pA 10kQ 10nW 1pA 30kQ 2 7nW 300 nA 100 kQ 1nw 100 nA TABLE 4 7 Range and sensor power To keep power low and avoid sensor self heating the sensor excitation is kept low There are two major problems that occur when measuring the resulting small DC voltages The first is external noise entering the measurement through the sensor leads which is discussed with sensor installation section 2 4 The second is the pres ence of thermal EMF voltages or thermocouple voltages in the lead wiring Thermal EMF voltages appear when there is a temperature gra
265. standard curve When calibration is complete assign the new curve to an input The Model 335 does not automatically assign the newly gener ated curve to either input E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 82 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation 5 10 1 SoftCal with Silicon Diode Sensors Model 335 Temperature Controller Calibration data points must be entered into the Model 335 These calibration points are normally measured at easily obtained temperatures like the boiling point of cryo gens Each algorithm operates with one two orthree calibration points The range of improved accuracy increases with more points There are two ways to get SoftCal calibration data points you can record the response of an unknown sensor at well controlled temperatures or you can purchase a SoftCal calibrated sensor from Lake Shore There are advantages to both methods m User when you can provide stable calibration temperatures with the sensor installed SoftCal calibration eliminates errors in the sensor measurement as well as the sensor Thermal gradients instrument accuracy and other measure ment errors can be significant to some users Calibration can be no betterthan user supplied data m Purchased Lake Shore sensors with SoftCal calibration include a set of calibra tion points in the calibration report The SoftCal calibration points are gener ated in a controlled calibration facility at Lake Shore for best accuracy The calibration
266. ster FIGURE 6 4 These summary bits are not latched Clearing an event register will clear the corresponding summary bit in the Status Byte Register Reading all messages in the output buffer including any pending queries will clear the message available bit The bits of the Status Byte Register are described as follows m Operation Summary OSB Bit 7 this bitis set when an enabled operation event has occurred m Request Service RQS Master Summary Status MSS Bit 6 this bit is set whena summary bit and the summary bit s corresponding enable bit in the Service Request Enable Register are set Once set the user may read and clear the bit in two different ways which is why it is referred to as both the RQS and the MSS bit When this bit goes from low to high the Service Request hardware line on the bus is set this is the RQS function of the bit section 6 2 6 3 In addition the status of the bit may be read with the STB query which returns the binary weighted sum of all bits in the Status Byte this is the MSS function of the bit Performing a serial poll will automatically clear the RQS function but it will not clear the MSS function A STB will read the status of the MSS bit along with all of the summary bits but also will not clear it To clear the MSS bit either clear the event register that set the summary bit or disable the summary bit in the Service Request Enable Register EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 98
267. stions concerning temperature sensor selection Additional useful information on temperature sensor selection is available in the Lake Shore Temperature Measurement and Control Catalog The cat alog hasa large reference section that includes sensor characteristics and sensor selection criteria Several important sensor parameters must be considered when choosing a sensor The first is temperature range The experimental temperature range must be known when choosing a sensor Some sensors can be damaged by temperatures that are eithertoo high ortoo low Manufacturer recommendations should always be followed Sensor sensitivity changes with temperature and can limitthe useful range of a sen sor It is important not to specify a range larger than necessary If an experiment is being done at liquid helium temperature a very high sensitivity is needed for good measurement resolution at that temperature That same resolution may not be required to monitor warm up to room temperature Two different sensors may be required to tightly cover the range from base temperature to room temperature but lowering the resolution requirement on warm up may allow a less expensive one sensor solution Anotherthing to consider when choosing a temperature sensor is that instruments like the Model 335 are notable to read some sensors over their entire temperature range Lake Shore sells calibrated sensors that operate down to 20 millikelvin mK butthe Model 335 is
268. sures that the heater range is turned off on power up Setting it to On will return the Heater Range to its previous setting when power is restored Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 1 or 2 mes Power Up Enable Off or On Default Off Interface Command OUTMODE E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 58 CHAPTER 4 Operation Model 335 Temperature Controller 4 5 1 5 Heater Out Display The heater output can be displayed in units of percent of full scale current or percent of full scale power The heater output display on the front panel is displayed in these units and the Manual Output parameter is set in these units The availability of full scale current and power is determined by the heater resistance max current setting and heater range The heater output display is a calculated value intended to aid in system setup and tun ing It is not a measured value and may not accurately represent actual power in the heater Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 1 or 2 mes Heater Out Display Current or Power Default Current Interface Command HTRSET 4 5 1 6 Output Modes You can configure the heater outputs in one of four output modes Off Closed Loop PID Zone or Open Loop The Off mode prevents current from being sourced to the given output Closed Loop PID is the mode most often used for controlling tempera ture Zone mode builds on the Closed Loop mode by providing automatic changing of control parameters on up to
269. t can also be configured by pressing and holding A or B while the desired mode is displayed Interface Command DISPLAY 4 3 1 4 Custom Display Mode The custom display mode provides the ability to customize the displayed front panel information to your preference The display is divided into four quadrants Each quad rant can be independently configured to display various information These are the options available m None the display location will be blank m InputA or Input B after choosing Input A or Input B for a custom display location you will be prompted to choose the units in which the sensor reading will be dis played The choices are Kelvin Celsius Sensor Min Max or Name Selecting Name will display the input letter followed by the first nine characters of the input s user configurable sensor name If two adjacent display quadrants in the same row locations 1 and 2 or locations 3 and 4 are both configured to display the input name then the entire 15 character name will be displayed on the cor responding line m Setpoint 1 or Setpoint 2 this option displays the setpoint of the control loop asso ciated with the specified output If no control loop is configured either Control Input is set to None or Output mode is set to Monitor Out or Off then the display location will be blank If the Output mode is set to Open Loop then the Manual Heater Output setting will be displayed since this is considered the setpoint f
270. t output gt lt value gt nnnnn term referto command for description Specifies which output to query 1 or 2 Operational Status Query OPST term bit weighting term nnn The integer returned represents the sum ofthe bit weighting ofthe operational sta tus bits Refer to section 6 2 5 2 fora list of operational status bits Operational Status Enable Command OPSTE bit weighting term nnn Each bit has a bit weighting and represents the enable disable mask of the corre sponding operational status bit in the Operational Status Register This determines which status bits can set the corresponding summary bit in the Status Byte Register To enable a status bit send the command OPSTE with the sum ofthe bit weighting for each desired bit Refer to section 6 2 5 2 for a list of operational status bits Operational Status Enable Query OPSTE term bit weighting term nnn Referto section 6 2 5 2 for a list of operational status bits OPSTR Input Returned Format Remarks OUTMODE Input Format Example Remarks OUTMODE Input Format Returned Format PID Input Format Remarks Example PID Input Format Returned Format 6 4 1 InterfaceCommands 121 Operational Status Register Query OPSTR term bit weighting term nnn The integers returned represent the sum ofthe bit weighting ofthe operational sta tus bits These status bits are latched when the condition is detect
271. tatus register contains important operational information from the unit requesting service The SPD command ends the polling sequence 6 2 3 2 Common Commands Common commands are addressed commands that create commonality between instruments on the bus All instruments that comply with the IEEE 488 standard share these commands and theirformat Common commands all begin with an aster isk They generally relate to bus and instrument status and identification Common query commands end with a question mark Model 335 common commands are detailed in section 6 4 1 and summarized in TABLE 6 6 6 2 3 3 Device Specific Commands Device specific commands are addressed commands The Model 335 supports a vari ety of device specific commands to program instruments remotely from a digital computer and to transfer measurements to the computer Most device specific com mands also work if performed from the front panel Model 335 device specific com mands are detailed in section 6 4 1 and summarized in TABLE 6 6 6 2 3 4 Message Strings A message string is a group of characters assembled to perform an interface function There are three types of message strings commands queries and responses The computer issues command and query strings through user programs and the instru ment issues responses Two or more command strings or queries can be chained together in one communication but they must be separated by a semi colon The total communica
272. te is the D part ofthe PID control equation The derivative time constant should normally be somewhere between 14 and 1 8 the integral time in seconds if used at all As a convenience to the operator the Model 335 derivative time constant is expressed in percent of 14 the integral time The range is between 0 and 200 Start with settings of 0 50 or 100 and determine which setting gives you the type of control you desire Do not be sur prised if the setting you prefer is 0 Note that by using a percent of integral time derivative scales automatically with changes in the integral value and does not have to be revisited frequently To set D first configure the front panel display to show the desired control loop infor mation then use the D key on the front panel A quick way to access the setting if the control loop information is not already being displayed isto use the front panel Aor B keys to temporarily display the control loop information while the new setting is entered Referto section 4 3 for details on configuring the front panel display Menu Navigation D 0 to 200 Default 0 Interface Command PID 4 5 1 7 5 Manual Output Manual Output is a manual setting ofthe control output It can function in two differ ent ways depending on control mode In open loop control mode the Manual Output isthe only output to the load The user can directly set control output from the front panel or over the computer interface In clos
273. te screws 3 Remove the rear plastic bezel The cover is tracked Slide the top cover to the rear on the track to remove it 4 Removethe rear panel option plate screws these screws are not used for the rest ofthe installation Remove the rear panel o 5 ption plate Lay the instrument on its feet and turn itto view the inside circuit board 7 Placethe Model 3060 card into its position in the rear panel from inside the instrument Orient the card so that the circuit board overhang faces the bottom ofthe instrument o Rear panel option plate screws FIGURE 8 10 Align the 3060 card with input A and B 8 Locatethe screws included in the 3060 option kit Attach the card by starting both ofthese screws in a few threads before tightening either FIGURE 8 10 9 Fully tighten both screws sola ow AWARNING 8 13 Firmware Updates 8 13 1 Updating the Firmware 8 13 Firmware Updates 143 10 Insert the 14 pin ribbon cable connector plug into the socket on the option board Orientthe ribbon cable connector plug so that the arrow nub slides into the plug slot and the ribbon cable exits downward FIGURE 8 11 od FIGURE 8 11 Proper orientation of the ribbon cable connector plug 11 Plug the other end ofthe cable into the main board option connector J12 FIGURE 8 11 12 Slide the top panel forward in the track provided on each side ofthe unit 13 Replace the rear plastic bezel by sliding it straight into the u
274. tect it during shipment The user should retain any shipping carton s in which equipmentis originally received in the event that any equipment needs to be returned If original packaging is not available a minimum of 76 2 mm 3 in of shock absorbent packing material should be placed snugly on all sides ofthe instrument in a sturdy corrugated cardboard box Please use reasonable care when removing the temperature controller from its protective packaging and inspect it carefully for damage If it shows any sign of damage please file a claim with the carrier immediately Do not destroy the shipping container it will be required by the carrier as evidence to support claims Call Lake Shore for return and repair instructions All equipment returns must be approved by a member ofthe Lake Shore Service Department The service engineer will use the information provided in the service request form and will issue an RMA This number is necessary for all returned equipment It must be clearly indicated on both the shipping carton s and any correspondence relating to the shipment Once the RMA has been approved you will receive appropriate documents and instructions for shipping the equipment to Lake Shore RMAs are valid for 60 days from issuance however we suggest that equipment needing repair be shipped to Lake Shore within 30 days after the RMA has been issued You will be contacted if we do not receive the equipment within 30 days after the RMA
275. ten bits long and contains data bits bits for character timing and an error detection bit The instrument uses 7 bits for data in the American Stan dard Code for Information Interchange ASCII format One start bit and one stop bit are necessary to synchronize consecutive characters Parity is a method of error detection One parity bit configured for odd parity is included in each character ASCII letter and number characters are used most often as character data Punctua tion characters are used as delimiters to separate different commands or pieces of data A special ASCII character line feed LF OAH is used to indicate the end of a mes sage string This is called the message terminator The Model 335 will accept either the line feed character alone ora carriage return CR ODH followed by a line feed as the message terminator The instrument query response terminator will include both carriage return and line feed 6 3 4 2 Message Strings A message string is a group of characters assembled to perform an interface function There are three types of message strings commands queries and responses The computer issues command and query strings through user programs the instrument issues responses Two or more command or query strings can be chained together in one communication but they must be separated by a semi colon The total com munication string must not exceed 255 characters in length A command string is issued by the com
276. ters can be entered from eitherthe front panel or from the computer interface Refer to section 4 2 3 for Alpha Numeric entry m Serial Number a sensor serial number of up to ten characters letters or numbers can be entered from either the front panel or from the computer interface Refer to section 4 2 3 for Alpha Numeric entry The default is blank m Format the format parameter tells the instrument what breakpoint data format to expect Different sensor types require different formats Formats for Lake Shore sensors are described in TABLE 5 3 ree Sensor units Sensor units Description A full scale range maximum resolution VIK Volts vs kelvin 10V 0 00001 V Resistance vs kelvin for Bi platinum RTD sensors 10 KQ 0 0010 Log resistance vs kelvin for Lgs NTC resistive sensors 4logQ 0 00001 log Q mV K Millivolts vs kelvin for 100 mV 0 0001 mV thermocouple sensors TABLE 5 3 Curve header parameter m Setpoint Limit limits the control setpoint to values less than or equal to this set ting A setpoint limit can be included with every curve Default is 375 K Enter a setting of 9999 K if no limit is needed m Temperature Coefficient the temperature coefficient is derived by the Model 335 from the first two breakpoints The user does not enter this setting If it is not cor rect check for proper entry ofthe first two breakpoints A positive coefficient indicates that the sensor signal increases with in
277. th a 3 conductor AC power cable Plug the power cable into an approved 3 contact electrical outlet or use a 3 contact adapter with the grounding wire green firmly connected to an electrical ground safety ground atthe power outlet The power jack and mating plug ofthe power cable meet Underwriters Laboratories UL and International Electrotechnical Commission IEC safety standards ventilation The instrument has ventilation holes in its side covers Do not block these holes when the instrument is operating Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gases or fumes Opera tion of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard Keep Away from Live Circuits Operating personnel must not remove instrument covers Refer component replace ment and internal adjustments to qualified maintenance personnel Do not replace components with power cable connected To avoid injuries always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them Do Not Substitute Parts or Modify Instrument Do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the instrument Return the instrument to an authorized Lake Shore Cryotronics Inc rep resentative for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained Cleaning Do not submerge instrument Clean only with a damp cloth and mild detergent Exte rioronly E3 akeSho
278. the measure ment readings along with the designated input letters m Intuitive Menu Structure Logical navigation allows you to spend more time on research and less time on setup FIGURE 1 3 Displays showing two input output display with labels custom display with labels and the intuitive menu structure 1 1 5 Model 3060 The field installable Model 3060 thermocouple input option adds thermocouple Thermocouple Input functionality to both inputs While the option can be easily removed this is not neces sary asthe standard inputs remain fully functional when they are not being used to Option measure thermocouple temperature sensors Calibration for the option is stored on the card so it can be installed in the field and used with multiple Model 335 tempera ture controllers without recalibration Model 335 Temperature Controller 1 2 SensorSelection 5 Silicon diodes are the best choice for general cryogenic use from 1 4 K to above room temperature Diodes are economical to use because they follow a standard curve and 1 2 Sensor Selection are interchangeable in many applications They are not suitable for use in ionizing radiation or magnetic fields Cernox thin film RTDs offer high sensitivity and low magnetic field induced errors over the 0 3 K to 420 K temperature range Cernox sensors require calibration Platinum RTDs offer high uniform sensitivity from 30 K to over 800 K With excellent reproducibility they are useful as
279. thermometry standards They follow a standard curveabove 70 K and are interchangeable in many applications Model Useful range Magnetic field use Diodes Silicon Diode DT 670 SD 1 4 K to 500 K T260K amp BS3T Silicon Diode DT 670E BR 30K to 500 K T260K amp BS3T Silicon Diode DT 414 1 4Kto 375K T260K amp BS3T Silicon Diode DT 421 1 4 K to 325K T260K amp BS3T Silicon Diode DT 470 SD 1 4 K to 500 K T260K amp BS3T Silicon Diode DT 471 SD 10 K to 500 K T260K amp BS3T GaAlAs Diode TG 120 P 1 4 K to 325K To4 2K amp BS5T GaAlAs Diode TG 120 PL 1 4 K to 325K To4 2K amp BS5T GaAlAs Diode TG 120 SD 1 4 K to 500 K To4 2K amp BS5T Positive Tempera 100 Q Platinum PT 102 3 14Kto873K T gt 40K amp B 2 5T ture Coefficient RTDS 1000 Platinum PT 111 14Kto673K T gt 40K amp BS2 5T Rhodium Iron RF 800 4 1 4Kto500K T gt 77K amp BS8T Rhodium lron RF 100T U 1 4Kto325K T gt 77K amp BS8T Negative Cernox CX 1010 0 3 K to 325 K1 T gt 2K amp BS19T Temperature Cernox CX 1030 HT 0 3 K to 420 K1 3 T gt 2K amp BS19T SS ELLIS Cernox CX 1050 HT 1 4K to 420 Ki T gt 2K amp BS19T Cernox CX 1070 HT 4K to 420 K1 T gt 2K amp BS19T Cernox CX 1080 HT 20 K to 420 K1 To2K amp BS19T Germanium GR 300 AA 0 35 K to 100 K3 Not recommended Germanium GR 1400 AA 1 8 K to 100 K3 Not recommended Carbon Glass CGR 1 500 1 4 K to 325K To2K amp BS19T Carbon Glass CGR 1 1000 1 7 K to 325 K2 T gt 2K amp B lt 19T Car
280. ting gt term nnn Acts like a serial poll but does not reset the register to all zeros The integer returned represents the sum of the bit weighting of the status flag bits that are set in the Status Byte Register Refer to section 6 2 6 for a list of status flags Self Test Query TST term lt status gt term n lt status gt 0 no errors found 1 errors found The Model 335 reports status based on the test done at power up Wait to Continue Command WAI term Causes the IEEE 488 interface to hold off until all pending operations have been com pleted This is the same function as the OPC command except that it does not set the Operation Complete event bit in the Event Status Register E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 110 CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operation ALARM Input Format Remarks Example ALARM Input Format Returned Format ALARMST Input Format Returned Format ALMRST Input Remarks Model 335 Temperature Controller Input Alarm Parameter Command ALARM input off on high value low value deadband latch enable audible visible term a n tnnnnnn Xnnnnnn nnnnnn n n n input off on high setpoint gt low setpoint deadband Specifies which inputto configure A or B Determines whether the instrument checks the alarm for this input where 0 off and 1 2 on Sets the valuethe source is checked againstto activate t
281. tinum resistors follow standard curves Ruthenium oxide Rox resistors follow standard curves Thermocouples follow standard curves GaAlAs diode carbon glass Cernox germanium and rhodium iron sensors can be purchased uncalibrated but must be calibrated to accurately read in temperature units TABLE 2 1 Sensor diode sensor calibrations 2 3 1 Precision Calibration 2 3 2 SoftCal 2 3 3 Sensors Using Standard Curves 2 3 4 Curve Handler 2 3 1 PrecisionCalibration 15 Calibration is done by comparing a sensor with an unknown temperature response to an accepted standard Lake Shore temperature standards are traceable to the U S National Institute of Standards and Testing NIST orthe National Physical Labo ratory in Great Britain These standards allow Lake Shore to calibrate sensors from 20 mK to above room temperature Calibrated sensors are more expensive than uncalibrated sensors of the same type because ofthe labor cryogen use and capital equipment used in the process Precision calibration provides the most accurate temperature sensors available from Lake Shore Uncertainty from sensor calibration is almost always smallerthan the error contributed by the Model 335 The Lake Shore Temperature Measurement and Control Catalog has complete accuracy specifications for calibrated sensors Calibrated sensors include the measured test data printed and plotted the coeffi cients of a Chebychev polynomi
282. tion string must not exceed 255 characters in length A command string is issued by the computer and instructs the instrument to perform a function or change a parameter setting When a command is issued the computer is acting astalker and the instrument as listener The format is command mnemonic gt lt space gt lt parameter data gt lt terminator gt Command mnemonics and parameter data necessary for each command is described in section 6 4 1 Aterminator must be sent with every message string A query string is issued by the computer and instructs the instrument which response to send Queries are issued similar to commands with the computer acting as talker and the instrument as listener The query format is query mnemonic gt lt gt lt space gt lt parameter data gt lt terminator gt Query mnemonics are often the same as commands with the addition of a question mark Parameter data is often unnecessary when sending queries Query mnemonics and parameter data if necessary is described in section 6 4 1 A terminator must be sent with every message string Issuing a query does not initiate a response from the instrument Aresponse string is sent bythe instrument only when itis addressed as a talker and the computer becomesthe listener The instrument will respond onlyto the last query it receives The response can be a reading value status report or the present value ofa parameter Response data formats are listed along with
283. to 1 5 279520 3 340820 115 00 1 313400 2 5 272030 3 78 36 3 253410 119 50 70 1 511140 341 50 3 5 263500 4 46 37 3 165360 124 00 71 1 709250 350 50 4 5 253730 5 20 38 3 076690 128 50 72 1 928940 360 50 5 5 242690 6 00 39 2 977480 133 50 73 2 127070 369 50 6 5 229730 6 90 40 2 877550 138 50 74 2 324710 378 50 7 5 214770 7 90 41 2 776950 143 50 75 2 523070 387 50 8 5 196980 9 05 42 2 675700 148 50 76 2 643480 393 00 9 5 176250 10 35 43 2 563610 154 00 77 2 708890 396 00 10 5 150910 11 90 44 2 450770 159 50 78 2 764030 398 50 11 5 116700 13 95 45 2 337230 165 00 79 2 797580 400 00 12 5 049770 17 90 46 2 223010 170 50 80 2 950200 406 50 13 5 002120 20 70 47 2 097700 176 50 81 3 008310 409 00 14 4 938000 24 50 48 1 971630 182 50 82 3 031200 410 00 15 4 876180 28 20 49 1 844890 188 50 83 3 218040 418 00 16 4 801670 32 70 50 1 706840 195 00 84 3 300110 421 50 17 4 648620 42 00 51 1 568040 201 50 85 4 000810 451 50 18 4 569170 46 80 52 1 428520 203 00 86 4 246390 462 00 19 4 499080 51 00 53 1 277520 215 00 87 4 701810 481 50 20 4 435090 54 80 54 1 114900 222 50 88 4 947390 492 00 21 4 370520 58 60 55 0 940599 230 50 89 5 636410 521 50 22 4 303610 62 50 56 0 754604 239 00 90 5 870300 531 50 23 4 234290 66 50 57 0 556906 248 00 91 6 547630 560 50 24 4 164270 70 50 58 0 358437 257 00 92 6 711600 567 50 25 4 093560
284. too low causes the load to take too long to reach the setpoint An integral setting that is too high creates instability and can cause the load temperature to oscillate 1 Begin this part of the tuning process with the system controlling in proportional only mode 2 Use the oscillation period of the load that was measured in section 2 8 2 in sec onds Divide 1000 by the oscillation period to get the integral setting 3 Enterthe integral setting into the Model 335 and watch the load temperature approach the setpoint 4 Adjust the integral setting if necessary a Ifthe temperature does not stabilize and begins to oscillate around the setpoint the integral setting is too high and should be reduced by one half b Ifthe temperature is stable but never reaches the setpoint the integral setting is too low and should be doubled 5 Verify the integral setting by making a few small 2 K to 5 K changes in setpoint and watch the load temperature react Trial and error can help improve the integral setting by optimizing for experimental needs Faster integrals for example get to the setpoint more quickly at the expense of greater overshoot In most systems setpoint changes that raise the temperature act differently than changes that lower the temperature If it was not possible to measure the oscillation period of the load during proportional setting start with an integral setting of 20 If the load becomes unstable reduce the setting
285. tput and PID Setpoint setting resolution Same as display resolution actual resolution is sensor dependent Heater output display Numeric display in percent of full scale for power or current Heater output resolution 126 Display annunciators Control input alarm tuning LED annunciators Remote alarm control outputs Keypad 25 key silicone elastomer keypad Front panel features Front panel curve entry display brightness control and keypad lock out 1 3 6 Interface IEEE 488 2 Capabilities SH1 AH1 T5 L4 SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DTO CO E1 Reading rate To 10 rdg s on each input Software support LabVIEW driver contact Lake Shore for availability USB Function Emulates a standard RS 232 serial port Baud Rate 57 600 Connector B type USB connector Reading rate To 10 rdg s on each input Software support LabVIEW driver contact Lake Shore for availability Special interface features Model 331 332 command emulation mode Alarms Number 2 high and low for each input Data source Temperature or sensor units Settings Source high setpoint low setpoint deadband latching or non latching audible on off and visible on off Actuators Display annunciator beeper and relays Relays Number 2 Contacts Normally open NO normally closed NC and common C Contact rating 30VDCat3A Operation Activate relays on high low or both alarms for any input or manual mode Connector Detachable terminal block 1 3 7 General Ambient temperature 15 C to 35 C at rate
286. ts csse 95 6 2 5 1 Standard Event Status Register Set ee eee eee ee eee 95 6 2 5 2 Operation Event Register Set rererere 96 6 2 6 Status System Detail Status Byte Register and Service Request 97 6 2 6 1 Status Byte Reglster 22 sessio e DES REDUR QUEE RU Sa 97 6 2 6 2 Service Request Enable Register sse 98 6 2 6 3 Using Service Request SRQ and Serial Poll 98 6 2 6 4 Using Status Byte Query STB cece cece cere etree eee tees 99 6 2 6 5 Using the Message Available MAV Bit cece cece eee 99 6 2 6 6 Using Operation Complete OPC and Operation Complete Query OPC cece cece eee eee 99 USBTnterfaGe a cceinnnsvadaotinasternehlemersacheweaeenteprwantenn na 100 6 3 1 Physical Connection cece cece eee eene 100 6 3 2 Hardware Support ioci e p re ep e these ATCP HEU iene 100 6 3 3 Installing the USB Driver iiin iritatia SEn E cece eee e enna 100 6 3 3 1 Installing the Driver From Windows Update in Windows Vista or Windows 7 cece cece eee eee e eens 100 6 3 3 2 Installing the Driver From Windows Update in Windows XP 101 6 3 3 3 Installing the Driver From the Web cence eee ees 101 6 3 3 3 1 Download the driver eee e cece eee e eee ees 101 6 3 3 3 2 Extract the driver eee EEEE cece teen eee 101 6 3 3 3 3 Manually install the driver
287. ts value gt lt temp value term tnnnnnn nnnnnn refer to command for description Returns a standard or user curve data point Factory Defaults Command DFLT 99 term Sets all configuration values to factory defaults and resets the instrument The 99 is included to prevent accidentally setting the unit to defaults Diode Excitation Current Parameter Command DIOCUR lt input gt lt excitation gt term a n input Specifies which input to configure A or B excitation gt Specifies the Diode excitation current 0 10 pA 12 1 mA The 10 pA excitation current is the only calibrated excitation current and is used in almost all applications Therefore the Model 335 will default the 10 pA current set ting any time the input sensor type is changed in order to prevent an accidental change If using a current that is not 10 pA the input sensor type must first be config ured to Diode INTYPE command If the sensor type is not set to Diode when the DIOCUR command is sent the command will be ignored Diode Excitation Current Parameter Query DIOCUR input term a input AorB excitation term n refer to command for description E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 114 DISPFLD Input Format Example Remarks DISPFLD Input Format Returned Format DISPLAY Input Format Remarks DISPLAY Input Returned Format Model 335 Temperature Controller CHAPTER 6 Computer Interface Operatio
288. ture control atthe set point value m Autotune PID sets values for P I and D parameters D is always set to 100 This mode is recommended when setpoint changes are frequent but temperature is allowed to stabilize between changes Stability at setpoint may be worse than Autotune PI in noisy systems Expect slightly less overshoot or undershoot than the other modes and control at the setpoint value When the Autotune process is initiated a status message will blink overthe top ofthe setpoint and heater output information in the Two Input One Loop display mode and the Input Display mode associated with the control loop being tuned FIGURE 5 1 This message indicates the status of the Autotune process For example if Autotune P is the selected Autotune mode Atune Stage 1 of 7 is displayed when the Autotune process first begins The status message blinks to indicate that the algorithm is still processing which also allows the setpoint and heater output information to be mon itored during the Autotune process If an error occurs the status message stops blink ing and displays an error message containing the stage in which Autotune failed E3 akeShore www lakeshore com 68 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation FIGURE 5 1 See TABLE 5 1 for a description of the Autotune stages reasons for fail ure and possible solutions When the process completes successfully the previous P I and D parameters will be replaced by the newly acquire
289. uery CRVHDR 21 DT 470 00011134 2 325 0 1 term configures User Curve 21 with a name of DT 470 serial number of 00011134 data format of volts versus kelvin upper temperature limit of 325 K and negative coefficient Curve Header Query CRVHDR curve term nn curve Valid entries 1 59 lt name gt lt SN gt lt format gt lt limit value coefficient term s 15 s 10 n nnn nnn n referto command for description CRVPT Input Format Remarks Example CRVPT Input Format Returned Format Remarks DFLT Input Remarks DIOCUR Input Format Remarks DIOCUR Input Format Returned Format 6 4 1 InterfaceCommands 113 Curve Data Point Command CRVPT lt curve gt lt index gt lt units value gt lt temp value term nn nnn tnnnnnn nnnnnn lt curve gt Specifies which curve to configure Valid entries 21 59 lt index gt Specifies the points index in the curve Valid entries 1 200 units value Specifies sensor units for this point to six digits temp value Specifies the corresponding temperature in kelvin for this point to six digits Configures a user curve data point CRVPT 21 2 0 10191 470 000 N term sets User Curve 21 second data point to 0 10191 sensor units and 470 000 K Curve Data Point Query CRVPT lt curve gt lt index gt term nn nnn curve Specifies which curve to query 1 59 lt index gt Specifies the points index in the curve 1 200 uni
290. unused input should be set to disabled Sensortype Display Input range Coefficient curve Lake Shore sensors message format DT 4XX DT 500 Silicon diode Diode OVto2 5V 10 pA 1mA Negative DT 670 Series Gallium aluminum Diode OVto 10V 10 pA 1 mA Negative VIK TG 120 Series arsenide diode Platinum RTD PTC RTD 00to10kQ EIL 203 RES Platinum rhodium iron RTD Platinum 7 ranges 1mA Positive Q K RF 800 Rhodium Iron RF 100 Rhodium Iron 100 nA to 1 mA TM Negative temperature NTCRTD 00 to 100 kO decade steps in log SI Carbon class Negative Germanium Rox coefficient NTC RTD Cernox 9 ranges power autorange Q K oF iin and Thermox maintains 10 mV Chromel AuFe 0 07 Thermocouple I Type E Chromel Constantan t option 3060 only Thermocouple Sal i Positive mV Type K Chromel Alumel Type T Copper Constantan Referto the Lake Shore Temperature Measurement and Control Catalog for details on Lake Shore temperature sensors TABLE 4 6 Sensor input types Menu Navigation Input Setup nput A or B Sensor Type Disabled Diode PTC RTD Platinum NTC RTD Cernox Thermocouple Default Diode Interface Command INTYPE EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 48 CHAPTER 4 Operation 4 4 1 Diode Sensor Input Setup 4 4 2 Positive Temperature Coefficient PTC Resistor Sensor Input Setup 4 4 3 Negative Temperature Coefficient NTC Resistor Sensor Input Setup Model 3
291. urve Point entry screen is displayed The Curve Point entry screen contains a scrollable list of all curve breakpoint pairs in the selected curve There are three columns in the list From left to right the columns are breakpoint number breakpoint sensor value and breakpoint temperature value Initially the highlight is on the first breakpoint number Menu Navigation Curve Entry Edit Curve Interface Command CRVHDR 5 9 1 1 Edit a Breakpoint Pair To edit a breakpoint pair follow this procedure 1 Toselect a breakpoint pairto edit scroll to the desired breakpoint number and press Enter The highlight moves to the sensor value ofthe selected pair 2 Usethe Number Entry method to edit the value Refer to section 4 2 1 2 for details on the Number Entry method 3 Once the new sensor value is entered press Enter to highlight the temperature value Again use the Number Entry method to enter the new temperature value 4 Pressing Enter atthis point will store the new breakpoint pair pressing Escape at any time when a sensor or temperature value is highlighted will cancel any changes to either ofthe values and return the highlight to the breakpoint num ber Ifthe sensor value entered is not between the previous breakpoint sensor value and the following breakpoint sensor value then the new breakpoint pair will be moved to the position in the curve that boundsthe sensor value of the new breakpoint pair If the pair is moved a message wi
292. ut with polarity set to bipolar FIGURE 5 5 shows the output if the Polarity parameter is set to Unipolar In this case if the actual reading was 50 K the voltage output would be 5 V middle of the scale OK 50K 100 K Unipolar EL 4 OV 5V 10V FIGURE 5 5 Output with polarity parameter set to unipolar Menu Navigation Output Setup gt Output 2 Output Type Voltage Output Mode Monitor Out Control Input None Input A Input B Monitor Out Units Kelvin Celsius or Sensor rea gt Polarity Unipolar or Bipolar Output Setup Output 2 Monitor Out 0 V Unipolar or 20 V Bipolar See note below Output Setup Output 2 Monitor Out 10 See note below EJ akeShore www lakeshore com 74 CHAPTER 5 Advanced Operation 5 7 Alarms and Relays 5 7 1 Alarms Model 335 Temperature Controller Monitor Out settings depend on the Monitor Units selected and are limited to the acceptable values of the selected units Default Polarity Unipolar Monitor Out 0 Vand 10 V gt 0 0000 K Monitor Out 10 V 1000 K Interface Command ANALOG Each input ofthe Model 335 has high and low alarm capability Input reading data from any source can be compared to the alarm setpoint values A reading higher than the high alarm setpointtriggers the high alarm for that input A reading lowerthan the low alarm setpoint triggers the low alarm for that input Menu Navigation Alarm iInput A B A
293. x Current set the Heater Resistance setting to 25 O forany resis tance less than 50 Q orto 50 Q for any higher heater resistance Set the Max Current setting to User The User Max Current setting becomes available in the Output Setup menu Enter the calculated current limit value in the User Max Current parameter Heater resistance Max Current 100 250 300 1 732 A 30W 75W EGG 1 667 A User 28W 69 5 W es 1414A 20W 50W 60 W 1 25 A User 15W 39W 46W 1A 10W 25W 30W 0 707A 5W 12 5 W 15W 0 5 A User 2 5W 6W 75W Shaded dark blue Max current too high for these resistances due to voltage compliance limit Shaded light blue Maximum current power only auailable on heater output 1 Bold Discrete options available for 25 Q and 50 O heaters under the Max Current setting TABLE4 11 User Max Current Menu Navigation Output Setup Output 1 or 2 mes Heater Resistance 25 Q or 50 O Max Cur rent User 0 1 Ato 1 732 A Default Output 1 gt User Max Current 1 414 A Output 2 gt User Max Current 1 A Interface HTRSET 4 5 1 4 Power Up Enable All configuration parameters ofthe Model 335 can beretained through a power cycle Some systems require that the heater range is turned off when power is restored The power up enable feature allows the userto choose whether or not the heater range is turned off each timethe instrument poweris cycled Setting the Power Up Enable parameter to Off en
294. xcitation Current Parameter Query 113 RDGST Input Reading Status Query 123 DISPFLD Custom ModeDisplay Field Cmd 114 RELAY Relay Control Parameter Cmd 123 DISPFLD Custom Mode Display Field Query 114 RELAY Relay Control Parameter Query 123 DISPLAY Display Setup Cmd 114 RELAYST Relay Status Query 124 DISPLAY Display Setup Query 114 SCAL Generate SoftCal Curve Cmd 124 EMUL Model 331 332 Emulation Mode Cmd 115 SETP Control Setpoint Cmd 124 EMUL Model 331 332 Emulation Mode Query 115 SETP Control Setpoint Query 124 FILTER Input Filter Parameter Cmd 115 SRDG Sensor Units Input Reading Query 125 FILTER Input Filter Parameter Query 115 TEMP Thermocouple Junction Temperature Query 125 HTR Heater Output Query 115 TLIMIT Temperature Limit Cmd 125 HTRSET Heater Setup Cmd 116 TLIMIT Temperature Limit Query 125 HTRSET Heater Setup Query 116 TUNEST Control Tuning Status Query 125 HTRST Heater Status Query 116 WARMUP Warmup Supply Parameter Cmd 126 IEEE IEEE 488 Parameter Cmd 116 WARMUP Warmup Supply Parameter Query 126 IEEE IEEE 488 Interface Parameter Query 117 ZONE Control Loop Zone Table Parameter Cmd 126 INCRV Input Curve Number Cmd 117 ZONE Output Zone Table Parameter Query 126 INCRV Input Curve Number Query 117 Model 335 Temperature Controller TABLE 6 6 Command summary 6 4 1 Interface Commands CLS Input Remarks ESE Input Format Remarks Example X ESE Input Returned Format 6 4 1 Interface

Model 335 Temperature Controller

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents